manualshive.com logo in svg

Autodesk 256B1-05A761-1301 - AutoCAD Revit Structure Suite 2010, User Manual

The Autodesk 256B1-05A761-1301 - AutoCAD Revit Structure Suite 2010 is a comprehensive software package designed for architects and structural engineers. This powerful suite allows users to create and visualize 3D building models seamlessly. For your convenience, a detailed user manual is available for free download at manualshive.com, guiding you through the software's functionalities.

Share
Download
background image

Description

Name

■

Ordinate places a dimension string with values measured from the dimension
origin.

The name of the tick mark style.

Tick Mark

Sets the line weight number that designates thickness of the dimension line. You
can select from a list of values defined in Revit Architecture or define your own. You

Line Weight

can change the definition of the line weights by clicking Manage tab

 ➤ 

Project

Settings panel

 ➤ 

Settings drop-down

 ➤ 

Line Weights. See 

Line Weights

 on page

495.

Sets the line weight that designates thickness of the tick mark. You can select from
a list of values defined in Revit Architecture or define your own.

Tick Mark Line Weight

Extends the dimension line beyond the intersection of the witness lines to the spe-
cified value. When you set this value, this is the size at which the dimension line
plots, if you are printing at 100 percent.

Dimension Line Extension

Controls the extent of the dimension line beyond the flipped arrow if the arrow flips
on the ends of the dimension string. This parameter is only enabled when the tick

Flipped Dimension Line Extension

mark type parameter is set to an arrow type. See 

Changing the Dimension Line Tick

Mark

 on page 287.

Switches between the fixed gap functionality and the fixed dimension line function-
ality.

Witness Line Control

If Witness Line Control is set to Fixed to Dimension Line, this parameter becomes
available. Specifies the length of all witness lines in the dimensions. When you set

Witness Line Length

this value, this is the size at which the witness line plots, if you are printing at 100
percent.

If Witness Line Control is set to Gap to Element, this parameter sets the distance
between the witness line and element being dimensioned.

Witness Line Gap to Element

Sets the extension of a witness line beyond the tick mark. When you set this value,
this is the size at which the witness line plots, if you are printing at 100 percent.

Witness Line Extension

You can select any of the annotations symbols loaded in the project. The centerline
symbol appears above the witness lines that reference the centerlines of family in-

Centerline Symbol

stances and walls. If the witness line does not reference a center plane, you cannot
place a centerline symbol above it.

Changes the line pattern of the witness lines of the dimension, if the dimension
references are the centerlines of family instances and walls. If the references are not
at the centerline, this parameter does not affect the witness line pattern.

Centerline Pattern

Changes the tick mark at the ends of the centerline of a dimension.

Centerline Tick Mark

Designates the tick mark display for inner witness lines when adjacent segments of
a dimension line are too small for arrows to fit. When this occurs, the ends of the

Interior Tick Mark

short-segment string flip, and the inner witness lines display the designated interior
tick mark. This parameter is only enabled when the tick mark type parameter is set
to an arrow type. See 

Changing the Dimension Line Tick Mark

 on page 287.

Dimension Properties | 291

Summary of Contents for 256B1-05A761-1301 - AutoCAD Revit Structure Suite 2010

Page 1: ...Revit Architecture 2010 User s Guide March 2009 ...

Page 2: ... and or Canada and other countries Backburner Multi Master Editing River and Sparks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp in the USA and or other countries Moldflow MPA MPA design logo Moldflow Plastics Advisers MPI MPI design logo Moldflow Plastics Insight MPX MPX design logo Moldflow Plastics Xpert Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright 1989 2001 Spat...

Page 3: ...aphics Inc Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that i the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation and ii the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the softwa...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ...uted License Server Model 13 Redundant License Server Model 14 Network License Client Setup 15 Licensing from Previous Versions of Revit Architecture 15 Network License Cascading 15 License Server Reporting 15 Licensing Extension 15 License Transferring 16 License Borrowing 16 Using Help 17 Autodesk Training Programs and Products 17 Memory Usage 18 3 GB Feature Considerations 19 Enabling the 3 GB ...

Page 6: ... View References 31 Adjust the Graphics in a Drawing 32 Plan the Sheet Layout 33 Annotate the Drawings 33 Add Dimensions 33 Add Text and Leaders 34 Add Tags 34 Create Schedules 34 Door Schedule 35 Window Schedule 35 Room Finish Schedule 35 Add Details 35 Add Detail Lines and Components 36 Create Drafted Details 36 Use a Detail Library 37 Add Keynotes 37 Refine Sheets 37 Publish Construction Docume...

Page 7: ...57 Migrating to Revit Architecture 2009 57 What s Changed for Rendering 62 Navigating 2D and 3D Views 63 Dynamic View Tools in ViewCube and SteeringWheels 64 User Interface 66 Project Settings 67 Conceptual Design 67 Project Views 68 Families 70 Project Phasing 70 Visibility and Graphics 71 Rooms and Areas 71 Rooms in Section Views 71 Room Volume Enhancements 72 Building Pads Are Room Bounding 72 ...

Page 8: ...116 Refreshing the Screen 117 What Is a Project 117 Before You Begin a Project 117 Starting a New Project 118 Starting a New Project Using Default Settings 118 Starting a New Project Using a Template 118 Building with Elements 119 Categories Families and Types 120 Element Properties 120 Revit Tutorials 123 Chapter 5 Project Views 125 Plan Views 125 Creating a Plan View 126 Creating a Reflected Cei...

Page 9: ...w 148 Opening a Callout View 149 Modifying a Callout 149 Changing the Callout Tag for a Callout 150 Changing the Boundaries of a Callout 150 Adjusting the Callout Leader Line 151 Callout Tags 151 Creating a Callout Head Family 151 Creating a Callout Tag 153 Changing Display Properties for Callout Tags 153 Visibility of Callouts 153 Reference Callouts 154 Reference Callouts Overview 154 Creating a ...

Page 10: ...ule Views from Another Project 191 Foundation Footings Schedule Example 191 Exporting a Schedule 192 Duplicate Dependent Views 192 Creating Dependent Views 194 Adding Matchlines for Dependent Views 195 Adding a Matchline 195 Modifying a Matchline 195 Matchline Properties 196 Navigating Primary and Dependent Views 196 Propagating Dependent View Configuration 197 Making a Dependent View Independent ...

Page 11: ...of Structural Components 244 Display of Hidden Lines of Structural Concrete Components 244 Showing Hidden Element Lines 245 Section Elevation and Callout View Tag Setup 245 Editing Type Properties for View Tags 245 Selecting View Tags 246 Hiding Elevation Tags 246 Callout Tag Properties 246 Elevation Tag Properties 247 Section Tag Properties 247 View Range 247 Modifying the View Range 250 View Ran...

Page 12: ...nsion Line Text 286 Changing the Dimension Line Tick Mark 287 Controlling the Display Behavior of Dimension Arrows 288 Rotating Spot Coordinates and Spot Elevations with Components 289 Dimension Properties 290 Modifying Permanent or Spot Dimension Properties 290 Permanent Dimension Type Properties 290 Permanent Dimension Instance Properties 293 Spot Elevation Type Properties 293 Spot Elevation Ins...

Page 13: ...eometry 320 Creating an Extrusion 320 Editing an Extrusion 322 Extrusion Tips 322 Creating a Blend 323 Editing a Blend 325 Creating a Revolve 326 Editing a Revolve 327 Creating a Sweep 328 Creating a Segmented Sweep 329 Editing a Sweep 330 Sweep Tips 331 Creating a Swept Blend 331 Editing a Swept Blend 333 Cut Geometry 334 UnCut Geometry 336 Creating 2D Geometry 336 Adding a Reference Line 337 Cha...

Page 14: ...s in Detail Groups 363 Converting Groups and Linked Revit Models 363 Converting Groups to Linked Revit Models 363 Converting Linked Revit Models to Groups 364 Saving Groups 364 Deleting Groups 364 Group Properties 364 Using Arrays of Elements 365 Creating an Array 365 Creating a Linear Array 366 Creating a Radial Array 368 Copying an Array 369 Deleting Members from an Array 370 Changing an Array 3...

Page 15: ...es 408 Splitting Walls Horizontally 408 Splitting Faces 409 Applying a Material to the Face of an Element 411 Deleting Elements 413 Chapter 9 Revit Families 415 Families Overview 415 Different Kinds of Families 416 Family Editor 416 Opening the Family Editor 417 The Families Guide 418 Working with Families 418 Viewing Families in a Project or Template 418 Viewing Elements with a Specific Family Ty...

Page 16: ...XML Settings 447 Project Location and Orientation 448 Specifying the Project Location 448 Rotating a View to True North 449 Rotating Project North 450 Custom Parameters 450 Shared Parameters 451 Categories Allowing Shared Parameters 451 Setting Up Shared Parameter Files 452 Adding Shared Parameters to Families 454 Shared and Family Parameters 455 Exporting Shared Parameters to a Shared Parameter F...

Page 17: ...Creating a Material 489 Renaming a Material 490 Deleting a Material 490 Render Appearance Library 491 Searching for a Render Appearance 491 Entering Search Text 493 Object Styles 493 Creating Object Style Subcategories 493 Modifying Object Styles 493 Deleting an Object Style 494 Renaming an Object Style 494 Line Styles 494 Creating a Line Style 494 Deleting a Line Style 495 Modifying Line Styles i...

Page 18: ... Options 520 ViewCube Options 521 Keyboard Shortcuts 522 Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts 523 Keyboard Accelerators 523 Colors 525 Using the Windows Color Dialog 525 Using the PANTONE Color Picker 526 Chapter 11 Conceptual Design Environment 527 Conceptual Design Environment Overview 528 Exploring Conceptual Designs 528 Early Conceptual Study Models 528 Integrated Study Models 529 Intelligent Sub Co...

Page 19: ...ol 553 Unconstrained and Referenced Based Forms 554 Converting Reference based Forms to Unconstrained Forms 554 Selecting Forms 555 Form Types 556 Surface Forms 556 Extrusions 556 Revolves 557 Sweeps 558 Lofts 560 Modifying Forms 560 Adding Elements to a Form 562 Deleting Form Elements 563 Rehosting Forms 563 Dimensioning Forms 563 Loose Labeled Dimensions 564 Labeling Dimensions 564 Associating P...

Page 20: ...stances in Design Options Phases and Worksets 593 Analyzing a Conceptual Design 594 Mass Floors Overview 594 Mass Floors at the Top of a Mass 595 Mass Floors at the Bottom of a Mass 596 Creating Mass Floors 596 Selecting Mass Floors 597 Creating a Mass Floor Schedule 597 Tagging Mass Floors 599 Assigning a Usage to a Mass Floor 600 Examples of Conceptual Design Analysis 600 Area Analysis Example 6...

Page 21: ...ng Walls 636 Arc Walls 636 Adding Arc Walls 637 Resizing Arc Walls 637 Cutting Openings in Arc Walls 637 Embedded Walls 638 Embedding a Wall into Another Wall 638 Separating Embedded Walls 639 Vertically Compound Walls 639 Accessing Vertically Compound Wall Tools 640 Sample Height 641 Modify Tool 641 Split Region Tool 643 Merge Regions Tool 643 Assign Layers Tool 644 Layer Assignment Rules 644 Swe...

Page 22: ...dding a Roof by Footprint 676 Adding a Roof by Extrusion 678 Adding Sloped Glazing 680 Joining and Unjoining Roofs 681 Joining Roofs 681 Unjoining Roofs 681 Tips for Joining Roofs 682 Modifying a Roof 682 Changing the Roof Type 682 Editing a Roof Sketch 683 Resizing a Roof 683 Roof Ridges 683 Roof Slope 684 Roof Slope 685 Slope Arrow 685 Eaves 686 Creating a Plumb Cut Two Cut Plumb or Two Cut Squa...

Page 23: ...difying Floor Properties 714 Modifying Floor Sketch Line or Slope Arrow Properties 714 Floor Type Properties 715 Floor Instance Properties 716 Floor Sketch Line Properties 717 Floor Slope Arrow Properties 718 Ceilings 718 Creating Automatic Ceilings 719 Sketching a Ceiling 719 Sloped Ceilings 720 Modifying Ceilings 721 Changing Ceiling Types 721 Creating a New Ceiling Type 721 Applying a Surface P...

Page 24: ...the Main Baluster Pattern for Stairs 751 Baluster Pattern Properties 751 Specifying Start Corner and End Posts 752 Post Properties 753 Deleting Balusters and Posts 753 Railing Properties 754 Modifying Railing Properties 754 Railing Type Properties 754 Railing Instance Properties 756 Architectural Columns 756 Adding a Column 757 Attaching Columns 757 Cut Column Examples 758 Cut Target Examples 761 ...

Page 25: ...Position 799 Door Properties 799 Windows 802 Adding Windows 802 Window Tags 802 Changing the Window Type 803 Modifying the Window Position 803 Window Properties 803 Model Lines 805 Adding Model Lines 806 Modifying Lines 807 Model Line Properties 808 Components 809 Work Plane based and Face based Component Placement Options 810 Rehosting 811 Rehosting Doors and Windows 811 Rehosting Work Plane base...

Page 26: ...Structural Column Type Properties Concrete 836 Structural Column Instance Properties 836 Beams 840 Structural Usage of Beams 842 Beam Tips 843 Creating Beams 843 Sketching Individual Beams 843 Using the Grid Tool to Place Beams 844 Sketching Beams with the Chain Option 847 Sloped Beam Modeling 848 3D Snapping 848 Editing Beams 849 Beam Graphical Controls 849 Beam Handles 850 Changing Beam Geometry...

Page 27: ...ll 907 Modifying Structural Walls 908 Modifying Structural Walls 908 Defining Structural Wall Shapes or Openings 908 Arc Walls 911 Structural Wall Properties 912 Structural Wall Type Properties 912 Structural Wall Instance Properties 913 Wall Foundations 915 Creating a Wall Foundation 915 Modifying Wall Foundations 918 Default End Extensions 919 Doors and Windows 920 Wall Foundation Properties 920...

Page 28: ...ions 960 Toposurface and Subregion Properties 961 Property Lines 962 Sketching Property Lines 962 Converting Sketched Property Lines to Table Based Property Lines 963 Creating Property Lines with Survey Data 963 Reporting Cut and Fill Volumes on a Site 964 Viewing the Cut Fill Volumes 964 Cut and Fill in a Schedule 965 Cut and Fill Reporting with Building Pads 965 Building Pads 965 Adding a Buildi...

Page 29: ...fic Rooms and Boundaries 998 Scheduling Phase Specific Rooms 999 Copying Rooms Between Phases 999 Phase Specific Rooms and Linked Models 1000 Removing Rooms 1000 Unplacing or Moving Rooms 1000 Placing an Unplaced Room 1001 Viewing a List of Unplaced Rooms 1001 Hiding Unplaced Rooms in a Room Schedule 1001 Deleting Rooms 1002 Rooms and Areas as Polylines 1002 Exporting Rooms and Areas as Polylines ...

Page 30: ...Color Scheme to Rooms and Areas in Linked Models 1024 Applying the Linked Model Color Scheme to Rooms and Areas in Linked Models 1024 Removing the Color Scheme Display 1025 Color Scheme Legend 1025 Adding a Color Scheme Legend 1025 Modifying a Color Scheme Legend 1026 Color Scheme Legend Properties 1027 Chapter 17 Preparing Construction Documents 1029 Construction Documents Overview 1029 Sheets 10...

Page 31: ...ts 1059 Modifying a View Title on a Sheet 1059 Removing a View Title from a Sheet 1060 View Title Types 1061 Modifying a View Title Type 1061 Loading a View Title Type into a Project 1062 Applying a View Title Type to a Viewport Type 1062 Schedules on Sheets 1062 Adding a Schedule to a Sheet 1063 Formatting a Schedule on a Sheet 1063 Splitting a Schedule on a Sheet 1064 Moving Schedule Sections 10...

Page 32: ...ecial Character from the Windows Character Map 1090 Adding or Removing Leader Lines from a Text Note 1090 Text Note Properties 1091 Modifying Text Note Properties 1091 Text Note Type Properties 1091 Text Note Instance Properties 1092 Leader Arrowhead Properties 1092 Grids 1093 Adding Grids 1093 Modifying Grids 1094 Changing the Grid Type 1094 Changing Grid Value 1094 Offsetting a Grid Line from It...

Page 33: ...Keynotes 1119 Assigning Keynote Values 1120 Assigning Keynote Values to Materials 1120 Assigning Keynote Values to Elements 1120 Assigning Keynote Values Using Tags 1120 Keynote Legend 1120 Filtering Keynotes by Sheet 1121 Filtering Keynotes by CSI Heading 1121 Adding Additional Categories 1122 Keynote File Locations 1122 Keynote File Versions 1123 Resolving Keynote File Errors 1123 Keynote Tag En...

Page 34: ...ace 1167 Adjust Light Sources Before Rendering 1168 Creating and Modifying Lighting Fixtures 1169 Creating a Lighting Fixture with One Light Source 1169 Creating Lighting Fixtures with Multiple Light Sources 1170 Specifying an IES File for a Light Source 1178 Modifying a Lighting Fixture Family 1179 Defining a Light Source 1180 Parameters for Lighting Fixtures and Light Sources 1182 Using Lighting...

Page 35: ... Rendered Image 1228 Controlling Lighting in a Rendered Image 1228 Specifying the Background for a Rendered Image 1229 Creating the Rendered Image 1229 Adjusting the Exposure of a Rendered Image 1230 Exposure Control Settings 1230 Saving the Rendered Image as a Project View 1231 Exporting the Rendered Image to a File 1231 Changing Render Settings for a View 1232 View Templates for Render Settings ...

Page 36: ...et 1256 Renaming Worksets 1257 Deleting Worksets 1257 Using Workshared Files 1257 Creating a Local Copy of the Central File 1258 Creating a Local Copy of a Central File from the Open Dialog 1258 Creating a Local Copy from an Open Central File 1258 Editing Workshared Projects 1258 Borrowing Elements 1259 Using Worksets 1261 Filtering Non Editable Workset Elements from Selection 1264 Controlling Wor...

Page 37: ...ring or Publishing Through Linked Instance Properties 1299 Relocating and Mirroring a Project 1300 Relocating a Project 1300 Relocating a Project by Entering Points 1300 Mirroring a Project 1301 Reporting Shared Coordinates 1301 Project Base Points and Survey Points 1302 Making Project Base Points and Survey Points Visible 1302 Moving Project Base Points and Survey Points 1302 Pinning Project Base...

Page 38: ...ted Elements Are Visible in This View 1327 None of the Selected Elements Can Be Added to This Option Set 1327 Option Conflict Between Rooms 1328 Room Option Conflict 1328 Chapter 23 Project Phasing 1331 Phase Properties 1331 Creating Phases 1332 Combining Phases 1333 Phase Filters 1333 Creating Phase Filters 1334 Applying Phase Filters 1334 Defining the Graphic Display for Phase Filters 1334 Defin...

Page 39: ... Exporting Building Sites 1376 Preparing the Building Site for Export 1376 Export Settings for a Building Site 1378 Reviewing the Export Report and Delivering the Results 1381 Publish 1381 Publishing to Autodesk Seek 1382 Publishing for Manufacturers 1382 Preparing Content for Sharing 1382 Sharing with Autodesk Seek 1383 Publishing to Buzzsaw 1384 Publish DWG to Buzzsaw 1384 Publish DWF to Buzzsaw...

Page 40: ... File Operations Open Save Synchronize Are Blocked or Slow 1409 Chapter 25 Print Troubleshooting Diagnostic Tools and Error Handling 1411 Print Troubleshooting Guide 1411 General Printing Tips 1411 Graphics Issues 1412 Images 1412 Plotting 1412 Diagnostic Tool 1413 Selecting Elements by ID Number 1413 Finding an Element s ID Number 1413 Error Handling 1413 Getting More Information on Error Message...

Page 41: ...s to Revit VSTA 1443 Revit Macros FAQ 1445 Related Information about Revit Macros 1448 Glossary 1451 Glossary Terms 1451 Chapter 27 Appendix A gbXML Schema Support 1555 gbXML Element 1555 Campus Element 1556 DocumentHistory Element 1557 Location Element 1558 Building Element 1559 Space Element 1559 ShellGeometry Element 1560 SpaceBoundary Element 1561 Surface Element 1561 Opening Element 1563 Inde...

Page 42: ...xlii ...

Page 43: ...licensing and instructions on how to set up one or more network license servers if you plan to use them To set up network deployment 1 Start the Revit Architecture installation program If you are installing from a Revit Architecture DVD the installation program starts automatically when you insert the DVD If you need to start it manually navigate to the root directory of the DVD and double click S...

Page 44: ... client installations select Create Client Log If you want client installations to run in silent mode select Silent mode When silent mode is active and a user initiates the deployment the installation proceeds without any explicit user input Users will not be able to change any of your installation settings If you want to allow users to participate in the Customer Involvement Program select Custom...

Page 45: ... Locations dialog specify the search paths file names and locations for project templates user files family templates and libraries 15 In the Include Service Packs dialog do one of the following Click Include Service Packs from local drive or local network and then click Add to add one or more service packs or click Remove as applicable Do not include Service Pack Select one of the following for e...

Page 46: ...Resources using the CAD Manager Control Utility at a later time a Specify whether to allow users access to the following online tools Enable DesignCenter DC Online The DesignCenter provides access to pre drawn content such as symbol libraries manufacturers content and online catalogs Allow access to the Subscription Center The Subscription Center provides announcements and subscription program new...

Page 47: ...Demo A demo license allows you to use Revit Architecture as a viewer You can open projects export them and print them However if you make changes to the project you cannot export or print it Standalone Licensing Follow this procedure to obtain a standalone license for Revit Architecture If you have not already run Revit Architecture in trial mode the Product and License Information dialog displays...

Page 48: ... Agreement and click Next NOTE If you do not agree to the terms of the license click Cancel to cancel the installation 5 On the Review Configure Install page review your product selection and the current settings If you do not want to make any changes click Install otherwise click Configure If you click Configure on the Select Installation Type page select either Typical or Custom Accept the defau...

Page 49: ...OTE Each installation of the Network License Activation Utility is product specific If you have more than one Autodesk product and you want to install the Network License Activation Utility on all of them you must install it once for each product 2 On the Select the Products to Install page select Autodesk Network License Activation Utility and click Next 3 Review the License Agreement dialog You ...

Page 50: ...must be specified for each server host name you entered in the previous step Enter the host ID manually or click Lookup to have the utility locate the host ID for the server NOTE If your server has more than one network adapter select the one that corresponds to a physical network adapter To determine which adapters are physical enter ipconfig all at a Windows command prompt and view the Descripti...

Page 51: ...r The License server model For information about each license server model click Help The Server host name If you do not know the host name enter the following at the command prompt to locate the name of each server you plan to use prompt lmutil lmhostid hostname NOTE In a distributed server model you are limited to a maximum of 20 servers After the 20 server limit has been reached the Add button ...

Page 52: ...e File After you receive a license file from Autodesk you set up the file to configure the license server NOTE If you already have a license server running for another Autodesk product such as AutoCAD 2010 or AutoCAD Architecture you need to combine your Revit Architecture license file with the existing license file Skip this procedure and the procedure on Configuring the License Server and go to ...

Page 53: ...path to the debug log or click Browse to locate the file Best practice is to save the debug log in C Program Files Autodesk Network License Manager The log file must have a LOG extension For new log files you must enter the LOG extension manually 9 To run lmgrd exe as a service select Use Services 10 To automatically start lmgrd exe when the system starts select Start Server at Power Up 11 Click S...

Page 54: ...t feature code not just the new ones For example do not combine 2 different Revit Architecture license files into one file Obtain a new license file that contains the required total number of Revit Architecture seats If the server computer has more than one network adapter installed all Autodesk products should be bound to the same adapter Example Existing License File SERVER PCS770 0012340f10c2 U...

Page 55: ...ted license server model licenses are distributed across more than one server A unique license file is required for each server To create a distributed license server you must run the Network License Manager on each server that is part of the distributed server pool Advantages Servers can be distributed across a wide area network WAN They do not need to exist on the same subnet If one server in th...

Page 56: ...l available Disadvantages The redundant license server model is supported only on Windows 2000 Server Edition If more than one server fails no licenses are available All 3 servers must reside on the same subnet and have reliable network communications The redundant server pool does not provide network fault tolerance If one of the 3 servers is replaced you need to obtain a new license file from Au...

Page 57: ... mechanism employed by Autodesk first uses the single product license non Series and then cascades as needed to the Series licenses License Server Reporting For more information about license server reporting and license server configuration see the associated documentation on the SAMreport Lite utility that you can install with Revit Architecture Licensing Extension If you have network licensing ...

Page 58: ...hen you borrowed the license You can also return a license early NOTE If you have a standalone version of the software you cannot borrow a license To view your product license type click Licensing Product and License Information To borrow a license 1 Click Licensing Borrow License 2 Click a return date on the calendar in the dialog Be sure the date is within the valid range as shown in the dialog ...

Page 59: ...Index The Index tab displays keywords for quick information searches in Revit Architecture To open the topic associated with a keyword double click the keyword or select it and click Display If the keyword is used with more than one topic a Topics Found dialog box is displayed so you can select a specific topic to view Search Use the Search tab to search for words in the Help system and locate ass...

Page 60: ...n Autodesk Certification visit http www autodesk com certification e Learning Autodesk e Learning for Autodesk Subscription customers features interactive lessons organized into product catalogs Each lesson is 20 40 minutes in length and features hands on exercises with an option to use a simulation or the software application You can also use an online evaluation tool that identifies gaps in skil...

Page 61: ... to 4 GB of virtual address space Typically on a 32 bit machine Microsoft Windows reserves 2 GB of the 4 GB virtual address space of any process for the operating system and leaves the remaining 2 GB for the application process including the space for the code pages the stack and all dynamically allocated memory The 3 GB feature divides the virtual address space differently on 32 bit machines prov...

Page 62: ...k Start menu Settings Control Panel 2 In the Control Panel double click System 3 In the System Properties dialog click the Advanced tab 4 In the Performance field click Settings 5 In the Performance Options dialog click the Advanced tab 6 In the Virtual Memory field click Change To verify virtual memory allocation on Windows Vista 1 Click Start menu All Programs Accessories and run the command pro...

Page 63: ...ermine how and when to implement them during the project cycle Project templates provide initial settings to streamline project setup and implement standards Use a project template Link models together for example to specify the relative locations of individual buildings on a Link multiple projects campus or to coordinate efforts across disciplines architectural structural and engineering After th...

Page 64: ...hase It also indicates the Create construction phases demolition of existing construction If you need additional project phases create them Create the Site Plan The site plan provides context for the building model Define contour line intervals select section cut material and specify the poche depth for topography elements Define site settings In a site plan or a 3D view create a topographical sur...

Page 65: ... these elements of the site design later If you will retain existing trees or other site components add them to the site design Add site components Build the Model Start with the general building components walls floors roofs Then slowly refine the design adding more detailed components stairs rooms furniture as you proceed Design the Preliminary Layout Establish the larger context of the building...

Page 66: ...els Place column grid lines to help plan the building layout Add grids Use DWG and Image Files When creating the preliminary layout you can use existing DWG files or raster image files as underlays on which to sketch your design To base the new building model on an existing AutoCAD drawing import the DWG file Import a DWG file To base the new model on a raster image import the image Import a raste...

Page 67: ...ndows to the design Specify the types of windows and their sizes Add windows If needed add openings in walls or floors roofs and ceilings Add openings on page 725 Add a roof based on the building footprint Adjust the slope of the roof if needed Add roofs on page 675 Add floors using wall boundaries or by sketching lines Add floors Add ceilings using wall boundaries or by sketching lines in a Refle...

Page 68: ...ing model Create sections Create a 3D view of the building model in which all elements are the same size regardless of their distance from the camera Create an orthographic view Create a 3D view of the building model in which elements that are farther from the camera appear smaller Create a perspective view To change the orientation of a 3D view or navigate through it use the ViewCube or SteeringW...

Page 69: ...s and Areas Use rooms areas and color schemes to plan occupancy and usage of a building and to perform basic analysis of the design Place rooms in a floor plan and tag them if desired Create rooms Use separation lines to add and adjust room boundaries Add room separation lines Create an area plan to show spatial relationships based on area schemes and levels in the building model Create an area pl...

Page 70: ...adding details and creating parametric relationships to constrain the model Refine Replace Components With the basic design established you can now refine the building model to specify different element types build curtain walls and create other details To refine the types of walls doors and other components used in the building model select Refine types of building elements the elements to change...

Page 71: ...ect work or information with other team members The point at which you perform these tasks will vary by project and by organization Add Team Members to the Project If you plan to divide the design work among multiple team members use the Revit worksharing feature after creating the basic design Break Up the Model When you enable worksharing you can break up the building model into worksets In addi...

Page 72: ...orksets Grant their requests and manage your own editing requests Manage editing requests Synchronize your changes with the central file so that team members have access to your modifications to the project Save your changes Share the Model with Other Disciplines You can set up a project so that relevant information about the Revit model can be shared with engineers in multiple disciplines Link to...

Page 73: ... Buzzsaw to share design documents with remote team members Export a 3D view to FBX so that a rendering specialist can use visualization software to create sophisticated renderings of the building model Export to FBX Document the Model Prepare the construction documents that builders and engineers use Create Drawings of the Model To share design information with builders and engineers you can prod...

Page 74: ...ale and detail level Specify the graphic style of the drawing wireframe hidden line or shaded Change the graphic style If needed hide an element or an entire category of elements in a drawing or specify the line style Adjust the display of elements color and pattern for the display of each category To differentiate or hide edges of the model in a drawing use the Linework tool Change the line style...

Page 75: ...nsions text and tags to provide detailed information Add Dimensions After adding dimensions you can change their appearance add dimension text and adjust witness lines Add dimensions to a drawing Add dimensions on page 267 Add text to a dimension or replace a dimension value with text Override dimension text on page 264 Move a witness line or control the gap between a witness line and elements Adj...

Page 76: ...f text Add Tags Add tags to identify elements in views Change the appearance of tags to suit your needs and conventions You can tag all untagged elements of a particular category or several categories in one operation Tag multiple elements You can tag a selected element Tag one element If needed change properties of the tag family Change the appearance of tags Create Schedules Create schedules to ...

Page 77: ...uantities of required materials Create a schedule that specifies the type of flooring wall covering ceiling and trim for each room Create a room finish schedule If desired create fields to store additional information about rooms such as the style of Add custom parameters to rooms décor finish or trim for each room This information can display in the room schedule and you can use it for sorting an...

Page 78: ...tone or hides it Use the Display Model parameter of the view properties Create Drafted Details In Revit Architecture most views of the building model show elements from the model If you want to draft details that are not based on the building information model use a drafting view Create a drafting view that is not associated with the parametric building model Create an empty drafting view Use deta...

Page 79: ... provide information about building details Tag elements or materials with standard CSI keynotes or custom keynotes Add keynotes Refine Sheets After you have created sheets and placed drawings on them you refine the appearance of the sheets Create or modify a title block to include information about your organization Customize the title block To change the content and appearance of title marks on ...

Page 80: ...formation with the drawings Export to DWF on page 1355 Print to PDF to store the designs in electronic files Print to PDF on page 1084 Track Revisions Enter revision information mark changes with revision clouds and specify the revisions to display on each sheet Enter information about the revision in the Sheet Issues Revisions dialog Enter revision information After you update the project to impl...

Page 81: ... team members NOTE You can perform the first 4 steps in any order Create an orthographic on page 157 or perspective on page 157 3D view of the building model Create 3D views To render a 2D view create a 3D view that is oriented to an existing 2D view on page 161 Specify render appearances on page 475 for materials and apply materials on page 471 to model elements Change the render appearance of ma...

Page 82: ...the rendered image on page 1237 results Adjust lighting render quality settings exposure settings and other parameters until the rendered image meets your needs When you are satisfied with the results save the image as a project view or export it to a file Save the rendered Image Create a Walkthrough Create a virtual tour of the building model to share the design with others Draw a path through th...

Page 83: ...Export the walkthrough to an animation file or a series of still image files Export the walkthrough on page 168 Create a Walkthrough 41 ...

Page 84: ...42 ...

Page 85: ...interface has been completely redesigned to be more intuitive The 2009 toolbar menu bar and Design Bar have been replaced with a single point of access for all tools the ribbon The ribbon is organized into task based tabs and panels that align with typical workflows and reduce the learning curve When you select an element in the drawing area the ribbon displays a contextual tab of tools that apply...

Page 86: ...ious 2009 menu location and displays their current location on the 2010 ribbon To access Where Is My Command click the above link or click Help drop down Where Is My Command Tooltips Tooltips display when you move the cursor over a tool in the ribbon They provide a description of the tool and help you learn how to use the new interface You can adjust the level of information provided in tooltips a...

Page 87: ...d manipulation tools an enhanced drawing environment that allows drawing directly on surfaces and reference planes tools to divide surfaces apply patterns and create flexible parametric components an integrated workflow with the Revit project environment For complete details see Conceptual Design Environment on page 527 Form Creation Create accurate solid or void forms using the Create Form tool D...

Page 88: ...ew you do not need to rely on multiple views to see what you are developing You can draw on reference planes levels or the faces of other forms You can also use 3D snapping to enhance the ability to snap to levels grids and other form elements See Drawing in the Conceptual Design Environment on page 533 Reference Points Reference points can host lines curves and splines in the conceptual design en...

Page 89: ...gns or structural framing layouts or begin to apply curtain panels to your form with Divide Surface These designs have a persistent relationship to the BIM model at all stages of the project See Rationalizing Surfaces on page 569 Integrating the Concept Designs created in the conceptual design environment can be integrated into the Revit project environment where you can perform analyses and sched...

Page 90: ... project base point and a survey point are now available in Revit projects to support the export of building sites to civil engineering applications The coordinates of the survey point are exported from the building site to the ADSK file They correctly orient the building geometry in the coordinate system of the civil engineering application By default the project base point and the survey point a...

Page 91: ...ge 1382 Export to gbXML In Autodesk Revit Architecture 2010 you can examine an analytical model of a project before exporting the model to a gbXML file The new Export gbXML dialog lets you ensure that surface types and openings are correctly identified and verify that the entire volume for the building is being exported Worksharing Autodesk Revit Architecture 2010 includes the following improvemen...

Page 92: ...lso specify where the horizon occurs by indicating the ground plane level See Specifying the Background for a 3D View on page 158 Halftone Underlay Settings In Autodesk Revit Architecture 2010 you can control the line weight and pattern used for underlays and the brightness of halftone elements When printing views or sheets you can specify that halftones print as thin lines to retain print fidelit...

Page 93: ...ose Function parameter is set to Interior This feature can be helpful when preparing a view for export Floor plan showing interior and exterior walls and doors Floor plan with Interior filter applied to hide interior walls and doors See Hiding Elements on page 208 and Controlling Visibility and Graphic Display of Elements Using Filters on page 204 Details and Annotations Autodesk Revit Architectur...

Page 94: ...ion In Autodesk Revit Architecture 2010 the documentation has been improved as follows Architectural Workflows A new chapter in the documentation provides a high level introduction to Revit Architecture by mapping typical architectural tasks to software features and functionality This information is useful for new users of Revit Architecture See Architectural Workflows on page 21 New in Revit 2009...

Page 95: ...s Image generated using the AccuRender rendering engine Image generated using the mental ray rendering engine Rendering Workflow Enhancements The user interface for rendering images has been completely redesigned Fewer dialogs a simplified workflow improved defaults and clear terminology make it easier for users to generate realistic images with a minimum of effort even if they have limited render...

Page 96: ...for rendering For more experienced users Revit Architecture offers control over advanced settings to refine a rendered image and achieve the desired result Related topics Rendering Workflow on page 1163 54 Chapter 3 What s New ...

Page 97: ... image files for render appearances for example for custom colors or textures you can store the image files in a directory and point Revit Architecture to that directory See Additional Render Appearance Paths on page 518 To share custom render appearances with team members you use File menu Transfer Project Standards Also send the directory containing the image files See Materials on page 468 Rend...

Page 98: ...dates to realpeople that were shipped with previous releases Additional office furnishings and fixtures The new RPC content offers more photorealistic render appearances It is stored in a local read only library If your organization has purchased additional RPC content you can use it in building models to enhance rendered images The user interface for RPC content is simplified to improve the workf...

Page 99: ...ty and reduces the amount of work you must perform in 3ds Max See Exporting to 3ds Max on page 1373 Migrating to Revit Architecture 2009 After you upgrade from a previous release to Revit Architecture 2009 Revit families and projects may need to be migrated to make them compatible with the new rendering functionality Some migrations are performed automatically when you upgrade the Revit software O...

Page 100: ...igrating Entourage on page 60 Plants and Entourage on page 1203 No action required When you render an image in the project Revit 2009 updates its render appearance automatically default RPC content provided with Revit 2008 Migrating Entourage on page 60 Using the ArchVision Content Manager on page 1212 Configure the ArchVision Content Manager ACM to work with Revit Architecture additional RPC cont...

Page 101: ...owing Materials that are not used in Revit families or templates Materials that use custom AccuRender definitions in Revit 2008 or prior releases In rendered images this default render appearance displays as gray and the material s Comments field displays the following text Rendering appearance not upgraded You must update these materials to assign new render appearances to them See Updating a 200...

Page 102: ...on the light sources for the lighting fixtures render photometrically and they have more photometric properties For more information see Lights on page 1164 Migrating Light Groups In a Revit 2008 project you may have created light groups to control light settings on off or dimming in rendered images When you migrate a Revit 2008 project to Revit Architecture 2009 the light groups are maintained Ho...

Page 103: ...ed any special attributes for the decal using Revit 2008 those attributes are not retained Instead Revit Architecture 2009 provides a more accurate rendering of decals For more information see Decals on page 1215 Migrating Rendered Images in a Project Revit Architecture 2009 does not automatically re render images in a migrated project To update a rendered image using the new rendering functionali...

Page 104: ...d color For the sun position you can select from predefined settings or define a sun position based on date time location or azimuth altitude Daylight Portals on page 1227 For rendered images daylighting is performed automatically For advanced lighting quality in Daylighting interior views you can enable daylight portals if needed Defining Render Settings on page 1221 View Templates for Render Set...

Page 105: ...cates the current orientation of a model and lets you adjust the viewpoint The ViewCube displays by default when you open a 3D view You can show or hide the ViewCube using Window menu ViewCube SteeringWheels SteeringWheels are tracking menus that allow you to access different 2D and 3D navigation tools from a single point SteeringWheels are divided into different sections known as wedges Each wedg...

Page 106: ...In a 2D context pan scrolls the view If you are using pan with an active view on a sheet pan scrolls the sheet view not the active view on the sheet Scroll NOTE In a 3D context primarily when you are using 3D SteeringWheels pan dollies the camera left and right Full Navigation Wheel Zoom Tour Building Wheel Forward Zoom 3D View Navigation Options In ViewCube SteeringWheels In Dynamic View Steering...

Page 107: ...n the ViewCube or right click the ViewCube and click Orient to a Direction Orient to a Direction Right click SteeringWheels or ViewCube and click Orient to View Orient to a View Right click SteeringWheels and click Orient to a Plane Orient to a Plane Perspective View Navigation Options In SteeringWheels In Dynamic View Walkthrough Tab Options Pan Dolly Full Navigation Wheel Walk Tour Building Whee...

Page 108: ...is not listed in the Recent Files window click Browse for additional project files or click Create new project The Recent Files window provides fast access to your recent projects and families After you have worked in a Revit file you can return to the Recent Files window by clicking Window menu Recent Files or press CTRL TAB if the window is still open See Opening Revit Files on page 112 Selectio...

Page 109: ... format project units to suppress trailing zeros for example 123 400 displays as 123 4 and suppress spaces for example 1 2 displays as 1 2 See Setting Project Units on page 502 Decimal Display and Digit Grouping The decimal display option for project units has changed When you select the decimal display type you can also select how to group the digits in the unit value See Changing Decimal Display...

Page 110: ...the exterior of the building based on linear dimensions or surface area HVAC heating ventilation air conditioning requirements for different levels of the building See Analyzing a Conceptual Design on page 594 Related topics Swept Blend Project Views This topic describes the new and enhanced features for project views in Revit Architecture 2009 68 Chapter 3 What s New ...

Page 111: ... view at the far clip plane See Cutting an Elevation Section or Callout View by the Far Clip Plane on page 133 Custom View Scale The view scale is the proportional system used to represent objects in a drawing You can assign a different scale to each view in a project In Revit Architecture 2009 you can now create custom view scales See View Scale on page 243 View Template Enhancement Using the new...

Page 112: ... Swept Blend Modeling complex geometry can be achieved using the Swept Blend tool The tool allows massing or family geometry to be defined by 2 different profiles placed along a 2D path containing an arc or a spline See Creating a Swept Blend on page 331 Families Guide Documentation for family creation has been restructured revised and enhanced with more detailed conceptual information and tutoria...

Page 113: ... element in a view the joined to element that remained visible might look incomplete For example when you hid a wall that was joined to another wall in a view the other wall displayed an edge with some gaps in geometry In Revit Architecture 2009 such a wall displays an edge with clean geometry Rooms and Areas This topic describes new and enhanced features for rooms and areas in Revit Architecture ...

Page 114: ... at this height and uses this information when computing the room area and volume In previous releases the room computation height was a project wide setting In Revit Architecture 2009 the computation height is now a parameter of a level family If needed you can change this parameter You can also create multiple level families that use different computation heights For example you may want to defi...

Page 115: ...ture 2009 you can do the following Use the Tag All Not Tagged tool to simultaneously tag all rooms or areas that have not yet been tagged Change the orientation of a tag to be horizontal vertical or aligned with walls or boundary lines in the building model Rotate the tag using the Rotate tool See Room Tags on page 985 and Areas and Area Tags on page 1011 Unplace and Place Rooms and Areas You can ...

Page 116: ...ly disallow a join to a mid end wall using the join icons that appear above the end of the wall To explicitly disallow or allow a join on a mid end wall 1 Select the wall 2 Click Disallow Join or Allow Join above the mid end wall face Slope a Building Pad You can slope building pads using the Slope Arrow command on the Design Bar if for example you want to add drainage for your building See Slopin...

Page 117: ...n Open Loop You can use the Close snap to close valid open loops when sketching If there is more than one option to close the loop you can move the cursor or press Tab to see other snap options See Closing an Open Loop on page 315 Details and Annotations This topic describes the new and enhanced features for details and annotations in Revit Architecture 2009 Baseline and Ordinate Dimensions You ca...

Page 118: ... element is rotated You can specify this type property in the Element Properties dialog for the spot elevation Spot Coordinate Enhancements You can display the elevation of the selected point with spot coordinates See Spot Coordinates on page 280 You can add supplementary text to spot coordinates See Adding Supplementary Text to Spot Coordinate Dimensions on page 281 The Rotate with Component type...

Page 119: ...Annotations Tool on page 853 You can set tags and spot elevations to rotate in reference to a beam s location and rotation This allows the placement of a tag that moves and repositions with the beam See Structural Framing Tag Families on page 853 Text Note Styles You can now create or modify text note styles using Settings Annotations Text See Specifying Text Note Styles on page 500 Editing Elemen...

Page 120: ...ision schedules can display information in various ways Some design firms use a top down approach with column headings and revision rows starting at the top of the schedule Other design firms use a bottom up approach with column headings and revision rows starting at the bottom of the schedule A new feature allows you to specify how Revit Architecture builds revision schedules See Building a Revis...

Page 121: ...sion Schedule On sheets the revision schedule includes information about revisions that are identified by revision clouds and tags In this release you can specify that the revision schedule is to include revision information that is not represented by revision clouds and tags in the sheet s views See Specifying the Revisions to Include in a Revision Schedule on page 1079 Revisions and Sheets 79 ...

Page 122: ... phases in the linked Revit model To do this you set up the phase map in the properties of the linked file and then apply the phase map in the host model See Phase Mapping Linked Revit Models on page 1280 Visibility and Graphic View Settings You can control visibility and graphic view settings such as filters workset visibility and display of annotations for section elevation and 3D views in linke...

Page 123: ...ate will not be exported Categories marked as Not Exported in the IFC Export Classes dialog will not be exported Split wall and columns by level This option allows you to divide multi level walls and columns by level See Exporting a Project to IFC on page 1369 DWFx The meaning of the term DWF has expanded to include DWFx DWFx is based on the XML Paper Specification XPS from Microsoft making it eas...

Page 124: ... Application Programming Interface API that allows you to extend the functionality of the product Starting with Revit Architecture 2009 you can use the API to define macros that can be saved with the application or project For example you might define a macro to add a grid to your project to rotate a selected object or to collect information about the square footage of all the rooms in your struct...

Page 125: ...Families Guide Documentation for family creation has been restructured revised and enhanced with more detailed conceptual information and tutorials See The Families Guide on page 418 Documentation 83 ...

Page 126: ...84 ...

Page 127: ...icrosoft Windows operating system Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks In the Revit interface many of the components such as walls windows and doors are available at the click of a button You can drop these components into the drawing and immediately determine whether they meet your design requirements 4 85 ...

Page 128: ...verview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file It provides all the tools necessary to create a project The ribbon can be customized by changing its view state and by rearranging the panels that contain the tools The ribbon has 3 types of buttons button invokes a tool drop down button contains a drop down arrow that displays additional related tools split button invokes a ...

Page 129: ... you need to create the building model Home many of the tools you need to create a family Create family files only tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images and CAD files Insert tools used for adding 2D information to a design Annotate tools used for editing existing elements data and systems When working on the Modify Modify tab select the tool first then select what you want ...

Page 130: ...tab displays showing 3 panels Select contains the Modify tool Element contains Element Properties and the Type Selector Draw contains the drawing tools necessary for the wall sketch A contextual ribbon tab closes when you exit the tool To reset the ribbon and Quick Access toolbar delete the UIState dat file located in the Autodesk Revit Architecture 2010 folder under one of the following folders F...

Page 131: ...ion Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions It also allows you to manage your files using more advanced tools such as Export and Publish NOTE Revit Architecture settings can be updated in Options on the application menu See Setting Options on page 516 Access Common Tools Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu Click to quickly access the...

Page 132: ...se the drop down list at the top of the Recent Documents list to sort or group files by File name File size File type Date the files were last modified Currently Open Documents Files display in the Open Documents list with the most recently opened file at the top To make a file current click the file in the list Quick Access Toolbar View Undo and Redo History The Quick Access toolbar displays opti...

Page 133: ...onizes a local file with one on the central server Synchronize and Modify Settings Customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar To enable or disable Customize Quick Access Toolbar an item click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop down NOTE The New button displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop down but is not enabled by default To undo or redo a series o...

Page 134: ...amount of information displayed in tooltips or how quickly the information displays You can also turn off the tooltips when you no longer need them To adjust or turn off tooltips 1 Click Options 2 On the General tab under Notifications for Tooltip assistance select one of the following values Description Value Displays only the brief description provided by tooltips suppressing the display of addi...

Page 135: ... will move to and what its shape will be Release the mouse button to place the browser in the desired location You can also drag the Project Browser outside the Revit window to the desktop To float the Project Browser in the drawing area double click its title bar You can then move the browser to the desired location and drag its borders to resize it You can customize the organization of project v...

Page 136: ... views copy a view with view specific elements right click the view name and click Rename In the Rename View dialog enter a new name and click OK rename views schedules right click the sheet name and click Rename In the Sheet Title dialog enter a name and number for the sheet and click OK rename a sheet right click the view name and click Close close a view right click the view name and click Dele...

Page 137: ...into the project See Modifying Families in a Project or Nested Family on page 430 right click the family name and click De lete or click the family name and press delete a family Delete If the project includes instances of that family a dialog displays asking if you want to unload the family and delete all instances of it in your project Click Yes to delete the family or click No to cancel NOTE Th...

Page 138: ...avigate to the desired group then drag the group into the place a group instance in a view drawing area See Placing Groups on page 358 right click the group type and select one of the following tools modify group types Delete Deletes the group type Rename Renames the group type Select All Instances Selects all in stances of a group type in the pro ject Properties Changes type properties under Grou...

Page 139: ...Revit model click the desired tool to unload or reload the model See Managing Links on page 1286 Renderings then If you want to click Show Rendering Dialog on the View Control Bar then select Render on the Rendering dialog view rendered images drag the rendered image name onto the sheet in the drawing area place rendered images onto sheets Drawing Area The drawing area of the Revit window displays...

Page 140: ...ntire design in another window Use the Tile tool to see both views at the same time Any changes that you make to the project in the new window also appear in other windows of the project To arrange all open windows in a series in the drawing area click View tab Windows panel Cascade To see all open views at the same time click View tab Windows panel Tile To close all hidden views click View tab Wi...

Page 141: ...n option See Selecting Elements in Design Options and the Main Model on page 1314 Filter Refines the element categories selected in a view See Selecting Elements Using a Filter on page 341 To hide the status bar click View tab Windows panel User Interface drop down Clear the Status Bar check box Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a tool such as Rotate and are not sure what to do next...

Page 142: ...n page 250 Shadows On Off See Creating a Solar Study on page 1241 Show Hide Rendering Dialog Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view See Defining Render Settings on page 1221 Crop Region On Off See Crop Regions on page 211 Show Hide Crop Region See Showing or Hiding Crop Regions on page 212 Temporary Hide Isolate See Temporarily Hiding or Isolating Elements or Element Categories on...

Page 143: ...ts left To browse search results On the panel for Search Results Subscription Center Communication Center or Favorites on the right side of the category header do one of the following Click the Next button Click the Previous button To rearrange the topics displayed on a panel 1 Display a panel by doing one of the following In the InfoCenter box enter a keyword or phrase Then press ENTER or click t...

Page 144: ...nd publish Also anno will find annotative annotation annoupdate annoreset and so on Replaces a single character For example cop will find copy but not copybase Adds grammatical form variations to a keyword when added at the beginning or end of a word For example plotting will find plots plotted and so on Also plot will find preplot replot and so on When performing the exact phrase search use doubl...

Page 145: ...he program You can customize the items that display in the Communication Center panel Communication Center Online Policy Communication Center is an interactive feature that must be connected to the Internet in order to deliver content and information Each time Communication Center is connected it sends your information to Autodesk so that you receive the correct information All information is sent...

Page 146: ... panel are organized into the same groups or categories from which they were added To save a link in InfoCenter as a favorite 1 Display a panel by doing one of the following In the InfoCenter box enter a keyword or phrase Then press ENTER or click the Search button In the InfoCenter box click the Subscription Center button In the InfoCenter box click the Communication Center button 2 Click the sta...

Page 147: ...ol Utility to specify InfoCenter Search and Communication Center settings Click Help in the CAD Manager Control Utility window for details about the CAD Manager Channel settings you can control To specify locations to search for information 1 In the InfoCenter box click the down arrow next to the Search button 2 Click Search Settings 3 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box Search Locations panel i...

Page 148: ...tart your Autodesk product 7 In the InfoCenter box click the down arrow next to the Search button 8 Click Search Settings 9 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box in the left pane click Communication Center The CAD Manager Channel location and name are displayed NOTE A green check mark is displayed if the channel can be located and a yellow warning sign is displayed if it cannot be located To speci...

Page 149: ...t to add Click Add 6 In the InfoCenter RSS Feed Confirmation dialog box click Close 7 Click OK To remove an RSS feed from Communication Center 1 In the InfoCenter box click the down arrow next to the Search button 2 Click Search Settings 3 In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box in the left pane click RSS Feeds 4 In the right pane do one of the following Click Remove Right click an RSS feed Click Re...

Page 150: ...icans with Disabilities Act ADA Autodesk Seek can help you locate such information and products and get them into your design For more information about LEED green building certification visit the U S Green Building Council website http www usgbc org For more information about ADA standards for accessible design visit U S Department of Justice website http www usdoj gov crt ada The design and prod...

Page 151: ...escription Language file GSM ArchiCAD library container file LCF Mathcad document file MCD Revit material library file MLIB Adobe portable document format PDF Revit family file RFA Revit template file RTE Rich Text Format file RTF Revit External Group file RVG Revit project file RVT Sketchup Document file SKP Text file TXT Microsoft Excel spreadsheet XLS Compressed archive file ZIP Searching for C...

Page 152: ...utodesk product library such as Revit Structure Downloading Content from Autodesk Seek After you have located product or design information that you want to add to your design you need to get it from the Autodesk Seek website and into your drawing NOTE The first time you download a file you must agree to and accept the Autodesk Seek terms and conditions Accepting the terms installs a cookie on you...

Page 153: ... the family does not have a Readme extract the files to the locations specified in the following table NOTE These locations are the default Windows XP and Windows Vista paths that are set during installation Because these paths can be changed during installation your paths might be different Location File Type The Revit library which is installed by de fault in Family RFA Windows XP C Documents an...

Page 154: ...ew tab Windows panel User Interface drop down Recent Files To open a Revit file use any of the following methods Press CTRL O Click Open Click Open and select a Revit file type Click and select a file from the Recent Documents list Click on the Quick Access toolbar When you click a file under Projects or Families Revit Architecture opens the file NOTE If you are editing a non workshared file other...

Page 155: ... file other users will have read only access to the file Opening Files from the Conceptual Design Environment The conceptual design environment contains family files and templates that you can download and use in a massing study See Template Files for the Conceptual Design Environment on page 532 To open files from the conceptual design environment 1 Click View tab Windows panel User Interface dro...

Page 156: ...ltiple files from Windows Explorer into an active session of Revit Architecture A dialog opens asking whether you want to open dropped files in separate windows or load dropped families into the current project NOTE If you are editing a non workshared file and another user attempts to open the same file the user will be given access to the file in a read only state Saving Revit Files The Save tool...

Page 157: ...shared Files on page 1257 Open workset default Sets the workset default for the central file when opened locally From this list you save a worksharing file to always default to one of the following options All Editable Last Viewed or Specify See Creating a Central File from an Existing Workshared File on page 1272 The only way a user can change this option is to resave a new central file by select...

Page 158: ...g how many times the file has been saved The backup file resides in the same folder as the project file You can specify the maximum number of backup files that Revit Architecture saves See Specifying the Number of Backup Files on page 116 If the number of backup files exceeds the maximum then Revit Architecture purges the oldest files For example if the maximum is 3 backup files and the project fo...

Page 159: ...automate the deletion of old journal files see General Options on page 516 Refreshing the Screen The Refresh tool repaints the screen to remove any extraneous images You do not normally need to use this tool but it assures a clean image Press F5 to refresh the screen What Is a Project In Revit Architecture the project is the single database of information for your design the building information m...

Page 160: ...tarting a New Project Using Default Settings 1 Start Revit Architecture 2 Start a new project using one of the following methods Press Ctrl N Click New Project In the New Project dialog for Template select None For Create New click Project Click OK In the Select Initial Units dialog click Imperial or Metric Revit Architecture creates a new project file using the default settings The default projec...

Page 161: ...nes are datum elements View specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed They help to describe or document the model For example dimensions tags and 2D detail components are view specific elements There are 2 types of model elements Hosts or host elements are generally built in place at the construction site Walls and roofs are examples of hosts Model components are all the...

Page 162: ...able is a different type within the same family Instance Instances are the actual items individual elements that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building model instances or on a drawing sheet annotation instances Each instance belongs to a family and within that family a particular type Element Properties In Revit Architecture most elements have two sets of properties ...

Page 163: ...The following image shows the Instance Properties dialog for a wall Modifying Type Properties To modify type properties for elements use either of the following methods In the drawing area select an element belonging to the desired type Then click Modify Element tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Type Properties In the drawing area select an element belonging to the desired type Then r...

Page 164: ...amilies on page 427 Previewing Family Types The Type Properties dialog features a preview window that shows an image of the family type As you set parameters and change values for the type the image in the window updates accordingly To preview a family type 1 In the drawing area select an element belonging to the desired type 2 Click Modify Element tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Ty...

Page 165: ...als are available to help you be more productive using Revit Architecture Follow the self paced exercises to get comfortable with using Revit Architecture To access the Revit Architecture tutorials click Help drop down Tutorials Revit Tutorials 123 ...

Page 166: ...124 ...

Page 167: ...nts on page 1029 Detail views and drafting views see Detailing on page 1134 Area plans see Area Analysis on page 1008 Linked Revit models see Linking Revit Models on page 1277 Plan Views The floor plan view is the default view in a new project Most projects include at least one floor plan Floor plan views are created automatically as you add new levels to your project 5 125 ...

Page 168: ...e view scale for the new view 5 Click OK NOTE If you create duplicate plan views the duplicate view displays in the Project Browser with the following notation Level 1 1 where the value in parentheses increases with the number of duplicates Creating a Reflected Ceiling Plan View 1 Click View tab Create panel Plan Views drop down Reflected Ceiling Plan 2 In the New RCP dialog select one or more lev...

Page 169: ... of level 3 you can clip the wall from view using the Depth Clipping parameter The following image illustrates this You activate this feature using the Depth Clipping parameter for the plan view The back clip plane is defined by the View Depth parameter which is part of the view s View Range properties NOTE Plan views include floor plan views reflected ceiling plan views detail plan views and call...

Page 170: ... affect printing To cut by the back clip plane 1 In the Project Browser right click the plan view you want to cut by the back clip plane and click Properties Alternatively if the view is active in the drawing area right click and click View Properties 2 In the Instance Properties dialog find the Depth Clipping parameter The Depth Clipping parameter is available for plan and site views 3 Click the ...

Page 171: ...laying a Plan View Double click its name in the Project Browser If the view is open but hidden behind another view click View tab Windows panel Switch Windows drop down view name Plan Region The Plan Region tool lets you define a region within a plan view that has a different view range from the overall view Plan regions are useful for split level plans or for displaying inserts above or below the...

Page 172: ...tails about view range options see View Range on page 247 7 Click OK to exit the View Range dialog 8 Click OK to exit the Instance Properties dialog 9 Click Finish Plan Region You do not have to enter sketch mode to edit the shape of a plan region Each boundary line of the plan region is a shape handle as shown in the following image Select the shape handle and drag it to modify the size Related t...

Page 173: ...ght be shown in an interior elevation are kitchens and bathrooms Elevation Tags You designate elevations with an elevation tag The tag snaps to walls as you drag it around with the cursor You can set different properties for the tag See Modifying Elevation Symbol Properties on page 137 The elevation view arrowhead is visible in a plan view provided the elevation view s crop region intersects the v...

Page 174: ...ane The end points of clip planes snap and join to walls You can resize the width of the elevation by dragging the blue controls If the blue controls do not display in the view select the clip plane and click Modify Views tab Element panel Element Properties In the Instance Properties dialog select the Crop View parameter and click OK 10 In the Project Browser select the new elevation view The ele...

Page 175: ... clip plane the dotted green line is not visible right click the elevation arrowhead and click Element Properties Find the Far Clipping parameter and select an option For more information see Cutting an Elevation Section or Callout View by the Far Clip Plane on page 133 2 Drag the blue dots or the arrows to resize the clip plane Cutting an Elevation Section or Callout View by the Far Clip Plane Yo...

Page 176: ...operties dialog find the Far Clipping parameter The Far Clipping parameter is available for elevation section and callout views To use this parameter in a callout view for the Far Clip Settings parameter specify Independent 3 Click the button in the Value column The Far Clipping dialog displays 4 In the Far Clipping dialog select an option and click OK 5 Enter a value for Far Clip Offset This is w...

Page 177: ...vation The reference elevation displays in the drawing area with the default reference label as shown in the following image To change the label text select the reference elevation symbol and click Modify Elevations tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Type Properties Edit the Reference Label type parameter and click OK 6 Click Elevation tab Select panel Modify to exit the Elevation tool...

Page 178: ...on symbol perpendicular to the selected grid line and in the direction of view to display and click to place it 3 Press Esc to finish 4 Double click the elevation arrowhead to open the framing elevation The view represents a full height view of the area at the work plane of the grid or of the reference plane The view is constrained to the surrounding grids or limits of the reference plane Related ...

Page 179: ...tion Tags 2 In the Type Properties dialog make the necessary changes to the elevation symbol properties 3 Click OK Section Views Sections views cut through the model You can draw them in plan section elevation and detail views Section views display as section representations in intersecting views You can create building wall and detail section views Each type has a unique graphical display and eac...

Page 180: ...p a section line parallel or perpendicular to a non orthogonal datum or wall Snapping to a wall is available in plan views 6 Click when you reach the end point of the section The section line and the crop region appear and are selected as the following image shows 7 If desired resize the crop region by dragging the blue controls The depth of the section view changes accordingly 8 Click Modify or p...

Page 181: ...u resize the clip plane such that it no longer intersects the section line the section is not visible in the elevation view Related topic View Tags in Dedicated Views for Design Options on page 1320 Breaking Section Lines Breaking section lines is useful when you want to create a section view but you do not want the section line to appear across the drawing Breaking a section line has no effect on...

Page 182: ...n control more accurately what displays in the section view The following image shows a section and its crop region Drag the controls on the crop region to resize the width and the depth of the section view as necessary The following image shows the same section as above but with a resized crop region Segmented Section View You can split sections into segments that are orthogonal to the view direc...

Page 183: ... in a view or select an existing section 2 Click Modify Views tab Section panel Split Segment 3 Place the cursor on the section line at the point it is to be segmented and click 4 Move the cursor to the side of the split to move and move the cursor in a direction orthogonal to the view direction 5 Click to place the section Segmented Section View 141 ...

Page 184: ...ts The break control displays as a Z on the section line Click it to break up the section even further When you do the section has more controls for resizing segments Merging Segmented Section Views To change the segmented line into a continuous line move segments toward one another so that they form a continuous line and merge Reference Sections Reference sections are sections that reference an e...

Page 185: ...ns The reference section head includes a label To change the label text edit the Reference Label parameter It is a type parameter of the section family Any sections placed in a drafting view must be reference sections They do not create a new section view The Reference other view option is always selected and cannot be cleared Hiding the Section Annotation Symbol You can hide the annotation line a...

Page 186: ...ng Parameters for the Section Head There are 2 parameters you can set for the symbol the Drawing Number and the Sheet Number You can set them by placing Tag Text The Drawing Number is the number of the view on a sheet The Sheet Number is the number of the drawing sheet If you add these parameters to a symbol they automatically fill in when you add the section view to a project The following proced...

Page 187: ...el Element Properties drop down Type Properties 11 Click in the value box for the Section Tag parameter and select a tag from the list 12 Click OK to save your changes Tip for Creating a Section Head Family The intersection of the 2 perpendicular reference planes represents the origin of the symbol The origin is the point at which the symbol attaches to the section line Sketch the lines accordingl...

Page 188: ...t tag is linked to the callout view The callout view shows an enlarged version of part of the parent view and provides more information or details about that part of the building model The view in which a callout is drawn is the parent of the callout view If the parent view is deleted the callout is also deleted Callout views accessed from tags in the parent view Callout Tag Parts A callout tag is...

Page 189: ...llouts Use a detail callout when you want to provide details about a part of the building model The detail callout provides more granular information than the parent view You can add details and annotations to the detail callout These details do not display in the parent view When you add a detail callout to a view Revit Architecture creates a detail view See Detail Views on page 1134 The detail v...

Page 190: ...iews and callouts to provide a logical sequence that moves the user from large scale plans to views with greater levels of detail You can place callouts on the same sheet as the parent view or place details on sheets by category for example roof eave details or window sill details You can use standard details in drafting views as references for multiple callouts that detail the same condition Crea...

Page 191: ... click Go to View Modifying a Callout After creating a callout you can change it in the following ways then If you want to see Changing the Callout Tag for a Callout on page 150 change the type of callout tag assigned to a callout see Changing the Boundaries of a Callout on page 150 enlarge or reduce the area shown in a callout view see Creating a Callout Head Family on page 151 change the format ...

Page 192: ...ent view select the callout bubble 2 Click View tab Graphics panel View Properties 3 In the Instance Properties dialog click Edit Type 4 In the Type Properties dialog for Callout Tag select the callout tag to use If the desired callout tag is not listed you can create a new call out tag See Creating a Callout Tag on page 153 You can specify the reference label for a reference callout in the Type P...

Page 193: ... near the callout head As you move the control notice that the leader line attaches to different points on the callout bubble The leader line segments snap to vertical and horizontal planes Callout Tags The callout tag consists of the callout head callout bubble and leader line See Callout Tag Parts on page 146 Use the Family Editor to create a callout head family to define the shape of the callou...

Page 194: ...umber When you place the callout view on a sheet the callout head in the parent view updates to show the detail number and the sheet number for the callout To add a label to the callout head do the following a Click Create tab Annotate panel Label b Move the cursor to the drawing area and click where you want the information to display in the callout head c On the Edit Label dialog under Category ...

Page 195: ...sed for callout bubbles and leader lines The settings that you specify here apply to all callouts in the project To change the line styles for callout bubbles and leader lines 1 In a project click Manage tab Project Settings panel Settings drop down Object Styles 2 Click the Annotation Objects tab 3 Under Category expand Callout Boundary 4 Use the Line Weight Line Color and Line Pattern columns to...

Page 196: ...afting views Multiple reference callouts can point to the same view When using reference callouts consider the following Reference callouts in section plan elevation or callout views can reference cropped views of the same type as the view in which the reference callout is placed Reference callouts in drafting views can reference any plan section elevation or callout view if the crop region displa...

Page 197: ...callout includes a label such as Sim an abbreviation of Similar You can change this label to meet project needs or corporate standards For example you can use Mirror or Reverse as the reference label To change the reference label 1 In the parent view select the callout bubble 2 Click View tab Graphics panel View Properties 3 In the Instance Properties dialog click Edit Type 4 In the Type Propertie...

Page 198: ...d orthographic 3D views in Revit Architecture Perspective 3D Views Perspective 3D views show the building model in a 3D view where components that are further away appear smaller and components that are closer appear larger You can select elements in a perspective view and modify their type and instance properties When you create or view a perspective 3D view the View Control Bar indicates that th...

Page 199: ... in the Project Browser right click it and select Rename You can use a section box to limit the viewable portion of a 3D view See Using a Section Box in a 3D View on page 159 Creating an Orthographic 3D View 1 Click View tab Create panel 3D View This places the camera above the southeast corner of the model with the target positioned on the center of the ground floor If you want to control camera ...

Page 200: ... render a 3D view you can specify clouds and haze for the background of the rendered image See Specifying the Background for a Rendered Image on page 1229 When you export the view to an image or to a 2D DWF file the gradient background is included When you export the view to a 3D DWF file the gradient background is not included When you print a 3D view with a gradient background you can print only...

Page 201: ...ents using drag controls in the 3D view or you can modify extents from other views for example a plan or elevation view Section box extents are not cropped by the view s crop region To enable a section box 1 Open a 3D view 2 Click Modify Cameras tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Instance Properties 3 In the Instance Properties dialog under Extents select the Section Box option 4 Click...

Page 202: ...ics panel Visibility Graphics 2 In the Visibility Graphics dialog click the Annotation Categories tab 3 Clear the check box for Section Boxes and click OK This hides the section box extents in the view Select the check box to show the extents Rotating a 3D View The target point defines the axis of rotation for a 3D view You can rotate a 3D view about this axis by modifying the camera level and its...

Page 203: ...t View on page 242 1 Open a 3D view 2 Right click the ViewCube and click Orient to View or Orient to a Direction Orient to View allows you to select another view The camera moves to the same location as in the view you specify and a section box is placed around the model that emulates the extents of the selected view NOTE To turn off the section box in the Project Browser right click the view name...

Page 204: ...r right click the perspective 3D view name and select Show Camera The camera is selected in all views where the camera is visible such as plan elevation and other 3D views Selected camera in plan view Selected camera in 3D view 162 Chapter 5 Project Views ...

Page 205: ... for 3D views Description Name Graphics The scale of the 3D view View Scale A ratio derived from the view scale For example if the view scale is 1 100 the scale value is the ratio of 100 1 or 100 If you select a value of Custom for the view scale you can enter a ratio in the value field for this property Scale Value Applies the detail level setting to the view coarse medium or fine Detail level Op...

Page 206: ...ing when the section box is visible you can resize it and rotate it with the handles Camera Settings used to create a rendered image of the 3D view See Changing Render Settings for a View on page 1232 Render Settings Indicates whether the 3D view is a Perspective view See Creating a Perspective 3D View on page 157 This is a read only value Perspective Height of the camera Eye Elevation Height of t...

Page 207: ...n orthographic 3D view Also select a view scale for the 3D view 4 If you are in a plan view you can vary the height of the camera by offsetting it from a selected level Enter a height in the Offset text box and select a level from the From menu This can give you the effect that the camera is going up a flight of stairs 5 Place the cursor in a view and click to place a key frame 6 Move the cursor i...

Page 208: ... 4 While the camera is active and located at a key frame you can drag the target point of the camera and the far clip plane If the camera is not at a key frame you can change only the far clip plane Changing the Walkthrough Path 1 For Controls select Path The key frames become controls along the path 2 Drag a key frame to the desired location Notice that the value in the Frame text box stays const...

Page 209: ...a value for the desired key frame in the Accelerator column Valid values for the Accelerator are between 0 1 and 10 Cameras Along Path To help you visualize the distribution of frames along the walkthrough path select Indicators Enter a value for the increment at which you want to see camera indicators Resetting Target Points You can move the position of the camera s target point at a key frame fo...

Page 210: ...ange in the entry boxes Frames second As you change the number of frames per second the total time automatically updates 4 Under Format specify Model Graphics Style Dimensions on page 263 and Zoom to the desired values 5 Click OK 6 Accept the default output file name and path or browse to a new location and enter a new name 7 Select the file type either AVI or an image file JPEG TIFF BMP or PNG 8 ...

Page 211: ...dentifying the material associated with that pattern Phasing Shows a section of wall drawn with a selected graphic override and identifying text Legends can be added to multiple sheets Any elements that can be placed in drafting views such as detail lines text dimensions and filled regions can be placed in a legend Legend views are unique to each project and therefore cannot be transferred from on...

Page 212: ...isplays with the host in floor plan representation You can specify a value for the Host Length d Place the symbol in the view Alternate method for adding annotation symbols a Click Annotate tab Detail panel Symbol b Click Place Symbol tab Element panel and from the Type Selector select an annotation type and place the symbol in the view 5 Click Annotate tab Text panel Text 6 Click Place Text tab E...

Page 213: ... page 397 Modifying Legend Component Properties 1 Open a legend view 2 Select a legend component and click Modify Legend Components tab Element panel Element Properties 3 In the Instance Properties dialog specify the view direction host length if applicable detail level and component type By default the legend component acquires its detail level from the project view If the model family type was c...

Page 214: ...oject that affect the schedule it automatically updates to reflect those changes You can add a schedule to a drawing sheet See Adding a Schedule to a Sheet on page 1063 You can export a schedule to another software program such as a spreadsheet program Types of Schedules You can create several types of schedules Schedules or Quantities Key Schedules Material Takeoffs Annotation Schedules or Note B...

Page 215: ...e text box which you can change as necessary 3 Select Schedule building components NOTE Do not select Schedule keys If you want to create a key schedule see Key Schedules on page 173 4 Specify the phase 5 Click OK 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog specify the schedule properties See Specifying Schedule Properties on page 176 7 Click OK Key Schedules Schedules particularly for windows doors or ro...

Page 216: ...the list When you apply the new style read only properties appear in the list of instance parameters These are the properties defined in the key schedule Applying the Key to a Component Schedule 1 Create a schedule for the appropriate element such as a room schedule 2 Include in the scheduled fields the key name you created For example if you created a key name called Room Style add this key to th...

Page 217: ...nnotation schedules or note blocks list all instances of annotations that you can add using the Symbol tool See Creating an Annotation Symbol Family on page 1132 Note blocks are useful for listing notes that are applied to elements in your project For example you might want to attach a note to several walls and that note might have a building description for each of the walls Creating an Annotatio...

Page 218: ...a custom field select the field and click Edit In the Parameter Properties dialog enter a new name for the field Click Delete to delete a custom field modify a custom field click Calculated Value Enter a name for the field set its type and enter the formula for it using existing fields in the schedule For example if you want to calculate an occupancy load based on the area of a room you could add ...

Page 219: ...in a building and you need to identify in the schedule which instance of the linked model each element comes from For more information see Specifying Project Information on page 447 To learn how to specify the instance name for a linked Revit model see Linked Model Properties on page 1285 To include elements from linked models in a schedule 1 In the Project Browser right click the schedule name an...

Page 220: ... 6 In the main model open a sheet view 7 Click Modify tab Clipboard panel Paste 8 If you unloaded the linked Revit model you need to reload it To reload the linked Revit model a Click Manage tab Manage Projects panel Manage Links b In the Manage Links dialog click the Revit tab c Select the linked model and click Reload d Click OK to exit the Manage Links dialog The project parameters or area sche...

Page 221: ...ting a new door schedule do the following a Click View tab Create panel Schedules drop down Schedules Quantities b In the New Schedule dialog select Doors as the category and click OK 2 On the Fields tab click From Room or To Room from the Select available fields from list The Available fields lists updates to show all the available parameters for a room prefixed by either To Room or From Room 3 S...

Page 222: ...ery instance of an element type or collapse multiple instances onto a single row Also see Sorting and Grouping Schedule Samples on page 181 You can sort by any field in a schedule except Count then select If you want to a field for Sort By and select Ascending or Descending Select additional sort fields for Then By if necessary specify a sort field Header For example you have sorted a window sched...

Page 223: ...e row based on the sorting parameter If you do not specify a sorting parameter all in stances collapse to one row Sorting and Grouping Schedule Samples The following images illustrate sorting and grouping examples for schedules including itemizing instances sorting and totals Itemizing Element Type Instances The following images show the same schedule the first with the Itemize every instance opti...

Page 224: ... from all the groups Grand totals also display the sum of any columns with subtotals 4 Select a display option from the drop down menu Title count and totals Title shows the header information Count shows the number of elements in the group Both title and count appear left justified below the group Total shows the subtotal below a column that can have a total Examples of columns having subtotals a...

Page 225: ...ou add a schedule to a sheet view Also see Schedule Formatting Samples on page 186 Formatting Tab Options then If you want to select a field to display it in the Heading text box You can edit each column name edit the title that appears above a column in a schedule select a field Then for Heading Orientation select an orient ation option specify the orientation of a column heading on a sheet only ...

Page 226: ...is option but the Grid lines option is still selected the grid line style is used as the border style a font from the list enter a font size and select bold or italic attributes specify the font for the heading text Title To create a different underscore line style select Under line and then select the line style from the list display the title of the schedule Column headers To create a different ...

Page 227: ...a For Units select an appropriate unit b For Rounding select an appropriate value If you select Custom enter a value in the Rounding increment text box c If applicable select a Unit symbol 7 If you selected a Number field select one of the following formatting options General Displays values with up to 6 decimal places and removes trailing zeros Fixed Allows you to specify rounding and preserves t...

Page 228: ...play for example 123 400 displays as 123 4 9 Optionally select Use digit grouping When selected the Decimal symbol digit grouping option specified in the Project Units dialog is applied to the unit value 10 Click OK Schedule Formatting Samples The following images illustrate some examples of how you can format a schedule including field formatting showing or hiding grid lines calculating totals ou...

Page 229: ...Schedule Field Formatting Calculating Totals Specifying Schedule Properties 187 ...

Page 230: ...Schedule with Grid Lines Schedule with Grid Lines and an Outline 188 Chapter 5 Project Views ...

Page 231: ... For example if you move a wall the square footage updates in a room schedule accordingly When you change the properties of building components in the project the associated schedule updates automatically For example you could select a door in the project and change its manufacturer property The door schedule would reflect the change to the manufacturer property Editing Cells in a Schedule You can...

Page 232: ...text in the new row as necessary Text in the new heading row is centered To modify the text in a column group heading click the heading field and edit the text To delete the column heading row select the heading and click Modify Schedule Quantities tab Schedule panel Ungroup or right click in the heading cell and click Ungroup Headers Hiding Schedule Columns 1 Open a schedule view 2 Right click a ...

Page 233: ...e views to insert and click Open All the views that are saved with the project display in the Insert Views dialog 3 Select the views to display from the list 4 Check the views you would like to insert and click OK A new schedule view is created in the Project Browser with all the saved formatting of the original schedule and all the parameter fields that may have been customized for that schedule ...

Page 234: ...ow only the bottom column header exports Multiple rows as formatted all column headers export including grouped column header cells Export group headers footers and blank lines specifies whether sort group header rows footers and blank lines export 5 Under Output options specify how you want to display the data in the output file Field delimiter specifies whether fields in the output file are sepa...

Page 235: ...he following image the graphic display of the matchline has been overridden The default graphic display of a matchline is a dashed black line Supported View Types for Dependent Views You can create dependent views for plan views elevation views section views and callout views When you create dependent section elevation or callout views a new section elevation or callout symbol is generated on top ...

Page 236: ...dependent views Orientation Identity Data properties with the exception of the Default View Template property Extent properties with the exceptions of View Range and Associated Level Scope Box Project parameters Shared parameters Creating Dependent Views 1 In the Project Browser select the view for which you want to create dependent views NOTE You cannot create a dependent view from another depend...

Page 237: ...tch lines that you can add to a view to indicate where a view is split as shown in the following image You can customize the look of matchlines by editing the line weight color and pattern in the Object Styles dialog See Object Styles on page 493 You can add view references near a matchline to link views See Navigating Primary and Dependent Views on page 196 Adding a Matchline 1 Open the primary v...

Page 238: ...level constraints do not apply in these view types Description Name Constraints Specify the top level on which the matchline is visible Top Constraint Specify a distance above the top level on which you want the matchline to be visible Top Offset Specify the bottom level on which the matchline is visible Bottom Constraint Specify a distance below the bottom level on which you want the matchline to...

Page 239: ... dependent views except for the view that it is referencing For example if you have a view split into 2 dependent views left and right and you add a view reference to the right view to reference the left the view reference appears in the primary view and in the right view but not in the left view To hide view references 1 Click View tab Graphics panel Visibility Graphics or use the keyboard shortc...

Page 240: ...s linked Revit model elements and workset elements for each view in a project The settings that you are overriding are those specified at the project level Project level settings are specified in the Object Styles dialog See Object Styles on page 493 You can override the cut projection and surface display for model categories and filters For annotation categories and imported categories you can ed...

Page 241: ...ipment hoods shown with a third line weight on a half toned power plan Fire Safety Plan Show 1 hour 2 hour and other fire rated enclosures on a half toned floor plan in a manner so that you can distinguish the ratings Overhead exit signs and sprinklers can appear in one color and wall mounted alarm devices and fire extinguishers can appear in another color Restoration Work Show periods of existing...

Page 242: ...material color in shaded views See Halftone Underlay on page 497 Transparent display only lines for the element and not surfaces When elements are transparent only edges and fill patterns including solid fills are drawn on element faces The faces between pattern lines are not drawn In Hidden Line view and Shaded with Edges view parts of edges are hidden An edge can be hidden by the face of any non...

Page 243: ... or Imported Categories e Select Custom from the drop down menu 4 Highlight a category row 5 Click the Override button for the line or pattern to edit NOTE For annotation and imported categories you can only override projection and surface display 6 For lines edit the line weight line color and line pattern For patterns edit the fill color and fill pattern 7 Optional Select the Halftone check box ...

Page 244: ...exit the Visibility Graphics dialog When you remove a graphic display override the element category displays in the view according to the settings specified in the Object Styles dialog For more information see Object Styles on page 493 Specifying Element Category Visibility NOTE For information about visibility settings for element categories in linked Revit models and worksets see Visibility for ...

Page 245: ...f you need to apply transparency to an individual model element face see Overriding Visibility and Graphic Display of Individual Elements on page 199 1 Open the view in which you want to apply transparency to model category faces 2 Click View tab Graphics panel Visibility Graphics or right click an element in the drawing area and click Override Graphics in View By Category 3 In the Visibility Grap...

Page 246: ... all walls in the view that have the 2 hour value for the Fire Rating parameter You can then select the filter define the visibility and graphic display settings such as line style and color and apply the filter to the view When you do this all walls that meet the criteria defined in the filter update with the appropriate visibility and graphics settings Creating a Filter 1 Click View tab Graphics...

Page 247: ...e Filter By lists The parameters that display are those that are common to all selected categories For example you can create a filter to show only 2 hour fire rated doors In this case you would select only the doors category If you wanted to create a filter to show 2 hour fire rated doors and walls you would select the doors and walls categories 6 From the Filter By list select the parameter to f...

Page 248: ...ou enter If you enter 23 values less than but not equal to 23 are returned Is less than or equal to Looks for values less than or equal to the value you enter If you enter 23 values of 23 and lower are returned Contains Selects a character anywhere in a string If you enter the character H all attributes that contain the character H are returned Does not contain Excludes a character anywhere in a s...

Page 249: ...y of the filtered object on or off 6 Override the projection surface and cut line styles and projection patterns as necessary 7 Check the Halftone option to make filtered objects appear at halftone See Halftone Underlay on page 497 8 Check the Transparent option to make filtered objects transparent 9 Click OK or Apply to activate the filter for that view Filters are view specific OK activates the ...

Page 250: ...ry 4 Click OK Hiding Elements in a View You can hide individual elements or categories of elements in a view permanently or temporarily When you hide an element that is used as a reference for a tag or a dimension the tag or dimension is also hidden Hiding a revision cloud does not affect the revision table Hiding Elements 1 In the drawing area select the element to hide 2 Click Modify Element tab...

Page 251: ...that was hidden by category 4 On the View Control Bar click to exit Reveal Hidden Elements mode Temporarily Hiding or Isolating Elements or Element Categories Temporarily hiding or isolating elements or element categories may be useful when you want to see or edit only a few elements of a certain category in a view The Hide tool hides the selected elements in the view and the Isolate tool shows th...

Page 252: ... see Changing the Line Style of Elements on page 398 Overriding Host Layers Using overrides you can control the visibility of cut edges in host layers in plan and section views The hosts to which you can apply an override are walls roofs floors and ceilings You can assign line weight line color and line pattern to each of the layer functions Structure Substrate Thermal Air Finish 1 and Finish 2 Yo...

Page 253: ... model elements detail elements such as insulation and detail lines section boxes and scope boxes at the model crop boundary Visible crop boundaries of other related views are also cropped at the model crop boundary Annotation Crop Region An annotation crop region fully crops annotation elements when it touches any portion of the annotation element so that no partial annotations are drawn Annotati...

Page 254: ...r the check box for Annotation Crop 3 Click OK In the drawing area select the crop region and both annotation and model crops display The interior crop is the model crop and the exterior crop is the annotation crop Resizing Crop Regions Graphically You can use drag controls and break line controls to resize a crop region Break line controls remove portions of the view If you need to show the crop ...

Page 255: ...region with break line controls 2 Move the cursor near a break line control As you place the cursor near a break line control the portion of the view that will be removed is indicated by the X Resizing Crop Regions Graphically 213 ...

Page 256: ...Highlighted view portion to be removed 3 Click the control to break the view into separate regions 214 Chapter 5 Project Views ...

Page 257: ...nd then show it again the split crop region information is retained Resizing Crop Regions Explicitly You can explicitly set the height and width of a crop region in paper space This means the size of the region in the view is the same size as the region on a sheet You can also specify the offset of the annotation crop region from the model crop region 1 In the drawing area select the crop region 2...

Page 258: ...views scope boxes and viewports using the Rotate tool You can also rotate a crop region which in effect rotates a view For information on rotating a project to True North see Rotating a View to True North on page 449 Rotating a Section View or Scope Box 1 Open the project view that contains the section callout or scope box to rotate 2 Select the section callout or scope box 3 Click Modify view typ...

Page 259: ...ack of the current orientation of a model You can use the ViewCube tool to adjust the viewpoint of the model Overview of the ViewCube The ViewCube tool is a persistent clickable and draggable interface that you use to switch between standard and isometric views of your model When you display the ViewCube tool it is shown in one of the corners of the window over the model in an inactive state While...

Page 260: ... or the compass ring to interactively rotate the model around the center of the view To control the position of the ViewCube tool 1 Right click the ViewCube tool and click Properties 2 In the ViewCube Properties dialog box under Application Options select one of the available positions from the On screen Position drop down list 3 Click OK To control the size of the ViewCube tool 1 Right click the ...

Page 261: ...urrent view to perspective projection Perspective with Ortho Faces Switches the current view to perspective projection unless the current view aligns with a face view defined on the ViewCube Lock to Selection Uses the selected objects to define the center of the view when a view orientation change occurs with the ViewCube NOTE If you click Home on the ViewCube the view returns to the Home view eve...

Page 262: ...ing one of the corners on the ViewCube reorients the current view of the model to a three quarter view based on a viewpoint defined by three sides of the model Clicking one of the edges reorients the view of the model to a half view based on two sides of the model You can also click and drag the ViewCube to reorient the view of a model to a custom viewpoint other than one of the twenty six predefi...

Page 263: ... the ViewCube To interactively reorient the view Click the ViewCube hold down the left mouse button on your pointing device and drag to orbit the model Drag in the direction that you want to orbit the model To use animated transitions when reorienting a view to a preset orientation 1 Right click the ViewCube and click Options 2 In the Options dialog under When Clicking on the ViewCube click Use An...

Page 264: ...ar the ViewCube Right click the ViewCube and click Go Home Examine Individual Objects with the ViewCube You can lock the ViewCube to one or more selected objects This is accomplished by clicking the Lock to Selection option from the ViewCube shortcut menu Locking a selection of objects to the ViewCube specifies the center of the current view and the distance from center for the view based on the s...

Page 265: ...eas of the navigation bar and provide access to tools based on the currently active view 2D or 3D You launch navigation tools by clicking one of the buttons on the navigation bar or selecting a tool from the drop down at the bottom of the navigation bar To activate or deactivate the Navigation Bar click View tab Windows panel User Interface drop down and select or clear Navigation Bar The followin...

Page 266: ...ely positioning it along one of the edges of the current window When linked to the ViewCube tool the navigation bar is positioned above or below the ViewCube tool and in a vertical orientation When not linked or docked the navigation bar can be freely aligned along one of the edges of the current model s window You specify how the navigation bar can be repositioned from the Customize menu When not...

Page 267: ...Customize 2 Click Customize menu Docking Positions Link to ViewCube The grip handle for the navigation bar is displayed along the top of the navigation bar 3 Click the grip handle and drag the navigation bar along the edge of the window where you want it displayed Release the button on the pointing device to orient the navigation bar along the edge of the window Dragging the navigation bar to the ...

Page 268: ...Tour Building Wheel Ba sic Wheel View Object Wheel Basic Wheel Full Navigation Wheel Mini Full Navigation Wheel Mini Tour Building Wheel Mini View Object Wheel First Contact Balloon When a SteeringWheel is displayed the first time and a 3D view is current the First Contact balloon for the wheels is displayed The First Contact balloon serves as an introduction to the purpose of the wheels and shows...

Page 269: ... the cursor is moved over them The tooltips appear below the wheel and identify what action will be performed if the wedge or button is clicked Similar to tooltips tool messages and cursor text are displayed when you use one of the navigation tools from a wheel Tool messages are displayed when a navigation tool is active they provide basic instructions about using the tool Tool cursor text display...

Page 270: ... SteeringWheels at the greatest opacity The default setting is 50 4 Click OK To enable tooltips for wheels 1 Display a wheel 2 Right click on the wheel and click Options 3 In the Options dialog on the SteeringWheels tab click Show tooltips Tooltips are displayed for each wedge and buttons on a wheel when the cursor hovers over the wheel 4 Click OK To enable cursor text for wheels 1 Display a wheel...

Page 271: ...ts of the model Orient to View Orients the camera to match the view angle of the selected view a plan elevation section or 3D view Orient to a Plane Adapts the view according to a specific plane Save View Saves the current view orientation with a unique name NOTE Save View only allows you to save a 3D view with a unique name when you are viewing the default 3D view If you are viewing a previously ...

Page 272: ...rent view by panning Zoom Adjusts the magnification of the current view NOTE Pan and Zoom in a 2D steering wheel pan or zoom the page space In all other wheels Pan and Zoom moves the camera Rewind Restores the most recent view orientation You can move backward or forward by clicking and dragging left or right View Object Wheels With the View Object wheels big and mini you can view individual objec...

Page 273: ...es the current view of a model along the Z axis of the model Mini Tour Building Wheel The mini Tour Building wheel wedges have the following options Walk Top wedge Simulates walking through a model Rewind Right wedge Restores the most recent view You can move backward or forward by clicking and dragging left or right Up Down Bottom wedge Slides the current view of a model along the Z axis of the m...

Page 274: ...available depends on which wheel is active Each wheel is divided into different wedges Each wedge contains a navigation tool that you can be uses to reorient the current view of a model Which navigation tools are available depends on which wheel is active Center Tool With the Center tool you can define the center of the current view of a model To define the center you drag the cursor over your mod...

Page 275: ...ur pointing device to return to the wheel Look Tool With the Look tool you can rotate the current view vertically and horizontally When rotating the view your line of sight rotates about the current eye position like turning your head The Look tool can be compared to you standing in a fixed location and looking up or down while turning your head left or right When using the Look tool you adjust th...

Page 276: ...ace highlights that you want to look at 5 Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel To look around and walk through a model with the Look tool 1 Display the big Full Navigation wheel 2 Click and hold down the Look wedge The cursor changes to the Look cursor 3 Drag to change the direction in which you are looking 4 While holding down the button on your pointing device press ...

Page 277: ...ive you can be press and hold the Ctrl key at anytime to move the pivot point used by the Orbit tool Maintain Up Direction You can control how the model orbits around the pivot point by choosing to maintain the up direction of the model When the up direction is maintained orbiting is constrained along the XY axis and in the Z direction If you drag horizontally the camera moves parallel to the XY p...

Page 278: ...ini View Object Wheel or one of the Full Navigation wheels 2 Right click the wheel and click Options 3 In the Options dialog clear the check mark from Keep Scene Upright for Orbit Tool 4 Click OK 5 Click and hold the Orbit wedge The cursor changes to the Orbit cursor 6 Press and hold the Shift key to display the roll ring Drag to roll the model 7 Release the button on your pointing device to retur...

Page 279: ...cursor changes to the Pan cursor 3 Drag to reposition the model 4 Release the wheel or button on your pointing device to return to the wheel Rewind Tool As you use the navigation tools to reorient the view of a model the previous view is saved to the navigation history The navigation history holds a representation of the previous views of the model along with a thumbnail A separate navigation hist...

Page 280: ...long the Rewind History panel Up Down Tool Unlike the Pan tool you use the Up Down tool to adjust the height of the current viewpoint along the model s Z axis To adjust the vertical elevation of the current view you drag up or down As you drag the current elevation and the allowed range of motion is displayed on a graphical element called the Vertical Distance indicator The Vertical Distance indic...

Page 281: ... adjust the movement speed setting permanently and temporarily as you use the Walk tool To permanently adjust the movement speed use the Options dialog for the SteeringWheels or the and keys when the Walk tool is active To temporarily increase movement speed press and hold the plus key while using the Walk tool Change the Elevation As you use the Walk tool you can adjust the camera elevation by ho...

Page 282: ...r the SteeringWheels SHIFT click If you hold down the SHIFT key before you click the Zoom tool on a wheel the current view is zoomed out by a factor of 25 percent Zooming is performed from the current location of the cursor and not the current pivot point NOTE When you start the Zoom tool from the Full Navigation wheel incremental zooming must be enabled in the Options dialog for the SteeringWheel...

Page 283: ...t or out past the extents of the model The direction you can zoom in and out is controlled by the center point set by the Center tool NOTE Unlike the Zoom tool on the big View Object wheel the Zoom tool on the mini View Object wheel and the Full Navigation wheels are not constrained To zoom the view with a single click You must have enabled incremental zoom when using the Full Navigation wheels Th...

Page 284: ...dow being dragged When the CTRL key is held down the first point defines the center of the window 5 Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel To zoom in and out by scrolling the mouse wheel when a SteeringWheel is displayed 1 Display one of the wheels other than the big Tour Building wheel 2 Scroll the wheel forward or backward to zoom in or out 3 Release the button on your...

Page 285: ...ve to the zoom of the view Typically when you zoom in on a model in a small scale view element lines appear much thicker than they actually are When you activate the Thin Lines tool it affects all views but does not affect printing or print preview To activate the tool click View tab Graphics panel Thin Lines View Scale The view scale is the proportional system used to represent objects in a drawi...

Page 286: ...level Detail Level is a view instance parameter therefore every view can have a different setting for this parameter Detail Level is also view scale dependent For information on setting scales with detail level and the Detail Level tool see Detail Level on page 511 Display of Hidden Lines of Structural Concrete Components Revit Architecture provides the ability to control the display of structural...

Page 287: ... select a filled region that is overlapping a wall 3 Place the cursor on the element with lines to be shown and click to select it The lines of this element display in a hidden line style through the overlapping element To change the hidden line style of the element use the Object Styles tool 4 To reverse the effects of this tool click Modify tab Edit Linework panel Show Hidden drop down Remove Hi...

Page 288: ...the selected view tag and click Element Properties Hiding Elevation Tags You can set the view scale at which elevation tags are hidden in project views Each elevation tag instance can have a different view scale at which it is hidden To hide elevation tags 1 In the drawing area select the triangle on the elevation tag 2 Click Modify Elevations tab Element panel Element Properties 3 Select a value ...

Page 289: ...ine Pattern Specifies the typeface for the elevation symbol Text Font Specifies the size of the text with respect to the scale of the drawing Text Size Specifies the width of the interior elevation symbol Width Section Tag Properties You can set the following parameters for section tags Description Name Specifies the shape of the section head Section Head Specifies the shape of the section tail Se...

Page 290: ...y in the view The exception to this is if you set the view underlay to a level outside the view range For more information on the Underlay view property see View Properties on page 259 How are elements drawn with respect to the view range Elements within the boundaries of the primary range that are not cut are drawn in the element s projection line style Elements that are cut are drawn in the elem...

Page 291: ...hat are strictly below the cut plane but are at least partially within the view range are shown as viewed from above Components display according to Family Element Visibility Settings for Plan RCP See Managing Family Visibility and Detail Level on page 513 Walls shorter than 6 feet approximately 1 83 meters are not cut even if they intersect the cut plane The 6 feet are measured from the top of th...

Page 292: ... the upper boundary of the primary range The upper boundary is defined as a level and an offset from that level Elements display as defined by their object styles Elements above the offset value do not display Top Sets a height at which elements in a plan view are cut such that building components below the cut plane display in projection and others that intersect it display as cut Building compon...

Page 293: ...lick on the Navigation Bar SteeringWheels display in the drawing area Right click SteeringWheels and click Save View Enter a name for the new 3D view and click OK NOTE If the Navigation Bar is hidden in your view click View tab Windows panel User Interface drop down Navigation Bar The new view appears in the Project Browser under 3D Views Wireframe Model Graphics Style The Wireframe tool displays ...

Page 294: ... 252 To see all visible lines Revit Architecture recommends that you first create an opening in one surface before passing another surface through it See Defining Wall Shapes or Openings on page 662 Intersecting geometry in hidden line mode no edges are created at the intersecting surfaces Shading Model Graphics Style The Shading tool displays the image with all surfaces shaded according to their ...

Page 295: ...asting Shadows 1 On the View Control Bar click Shadows Off On Graphic Display Options 2 Under Sun and Shadows select Cast Shadows 3 If enabled use the sliders or enter values to vary sun and shadow intensity Shadow intensity controls the darkness of the shadows Sun intensity changes the intensity of ambient color Valid values are between 0 and 100 4 Click OK to apply changes For information about ...

Page 296: ...alues 5 To enable shadows on a ground plane select Ground Plane at Level and select the level at which you want the shadows to display on the ground plane Revit casts shadows on the specified level in 2D and 3D views When you clear Ground Plane at Level Revit casts shadows on the toposurface NOTE This option does not affect shadows in rendered images 6 To test new sun and shadow settings click App...

Page 297: ...y visible You can activate this tool from the Project Browser or in the drawing area Finding a View Symbol 1 In the Project Browser right click the view for which you want to locate view annotation symbols You can also open the view and right click in the drawing area 2 Select Find Referring Views 3 In the Go To View dialog select a view 4 Click Open View The view opens with the view symbol select...

Page 298: ...erties of an existing sort group select it and click Edit For information on creating a sort group or editing an existing sort group see Creating a Project Browser Sort Group on page 256 and Editing a Project Browser Sort Group on page 257 4 Click Apply then click OK Creating a Project Browser Sort Group 1 Click View tab Windows panel User Interface drop down Browser Organization 2 In the Browser ...

Page 299: ... click the Views tab to apply a filter to project views or click the Sheets tab to apply a filter to sheets 3 Select a sort group and click Edit 4 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog click the Filters tab 5 Select the following a The view or sheet property as the filter b The filter operator c The filter operator value For example to show only those project views associated with Level 1 ...

Page 300: ...e the view name or view title that displays on sheets By using a view list in this way you can identify and correct inconsistent view settings from one location Related topic Drawing Lists on page 1066 Creating a View List 1 In a project click View tab Create panel Schedules drop down View List 2 On the Fields tab of the View List Properties dialog select the fields to include in the view list See...

Page 301: ... the following methods In the Project Browser right click the view name and click Properties In the drawing area of the view right click and click View Properties 2 In the Instance Properties dialog for the view under Identity Data for View Name enter a new name for the view 3 Click OK View Properties The following properties are common to most view types Description Name Changes the scale of the ...

Page 302: ...e absolute See Halftone Underlay on page 497 TIP A level that is actually higher than the current level can be the underlay view For example the basement level could have Level 2 as its underlay Controls the display of the underlay in Hidden Line mode If the value is specified as Plan then the underlay displays as if you are viewing it from above like a plan view Underlay Orientation If the value ...

Page 303: ...changes To turn off the boundary and maintain the cropping clear the Crop Region Visible check box See Crop Regions on page 211 Shows or hides the crop region View cropping is not available in sheet and schedule views Crop Region Visible Shows or hides the annotation crop when crop regions are visible in the project view Annotation Crop Within the view properties of any plan view you can set the V...

Page 304: ...262 ...

Page 305: ...rmanent dimensions you can create custom dimension types that override the default unit settings See Creating Custom Dimension Units on page 275 Temporary Dimensions As you create or select geometry Revit Architecture displays temporary dimensions around the component This is useful for placing the component in the proper place Temporary dimensions are created to the nearest perpendicular componen...

Page 306: ... area 2 Click the dimension symbol that appears near the temporary dimension You can then modify the properties of the new dimension and change its type Permanent Dimensions A permanent dimension is a dimension that you specifically place Permanent dimensions can appear in 2 different states modifiable and non modifiable You can modify a permanent dimension when the geometry that it references is ...

Page 307: ...f a wall when you place it over the wall 2 For Pick select Individual References 3 Place the cursor at a reference point on an element such as a wall The reference point highlights if you can place the dimension there TIP You can cycle through the different reference points for walls by pressing Tab Intersections of internal wall layer boundaries provide references for aligned dimensioning A gray ...

Page 308: ...ther walls to add them to the dimension string 7 Move the cursor away from the walls so that a dimension line displays 8 Click to place the dimension Aligned Dimensions with Arc Wall Centers You can place aligned dimensions from the center of arc walls to other walls or lines 1 Click Annotate tab Dimension panel Aligned 2 Move the cursor over the arc wall until the center mark symbol displays You ...

Page 309: ...mension line appears You can continue to select multiple references if desired 5 After selecting a second reference point press Spacebar to align the dimension to the vertical or horizontal axis 6 When you have reached the last reference point move the cursor away from the last element and click The dimension displays Related topics Angular Dimensions on page 267 Radial Dimensions on page 268 Arc ...

Page 310: ...e dimension to appear Wall join with 4 distinct sectors 5 When sized properly click to place Radial Dimensions 1 Click Annotate tab Dimension panel Radial 2 Place the cursor on the arc and click A temporary dimension appears TIP You can switch the reference point for the dimension between a wall face and a wall centerline by pressing Tab 3 Click again to place the permanent dimension Changing Radi...

Page 311: ...tum You can create baseline and ordinate dimensions for linear dimension styles Linear dimension styles include aligned horizontal and vertical dimensions To create a baseline or ordinate dimension for these linear dimension styles you need to edit the Dimension String type parameter Since this is a type parameter you may want to create a new baseline or ordinate linear dimension style so that any...

Page 312: ...ings for the ordinate dimension Description Setting Specify where to align the dimension text with the witness line or the dimension line This setting is dis Text Orientation abled when the Read Convention parameter is Hori zontal Specify the text position at the end of the witness line or next to the witness line Text Position Specify visibility of the origin witness line for the or dinate dimens...

Page 313: ...eference point move the cursor away from the last element and click The baseline dimension displays 6 To customize display of the baseline dimension a In the drawing area select the dimension b Click the flip controls to flip the dimension direction c Press Spacebar to change the baseline dimension stacking You can use the spacebar to change the baseline dimension stacking before or after placemen...

Page 314: ...d unlocked state Once a dimension is locked you must unlock it to change its value TIP You can also switch the locked and unlocked state of the lock by right clicking on it and choosing Toggle Also see Applying Constraints with Dimensions on page 300 Anchoring Elements Referenced in Multi Segmented Dimensions In a multi segmented equality constrained dimension you can use the anchor symbol to desi...

Page 315: ...ns and alignments it can be difficult to distinguish which dimension locks refer to which elements To determine the element that a lock belongs to 1 In the drawing area right click a dimension lock 2 Select Show Related from the shortcut menu The appropriate element highlights and a dialog identifies the element 3 Click the arrow buttons to switch between the elements constrained by the lock Overr...

Page 316: ...y 5 Click OK Related topics Replacing Permanent Dimension Values with Text on page 274 Modifying Dimensions on page 286 Dimension Properties on page 290 Replacing Permanent Dimension Values with Text You can replace a permanent dimension value with text as shown in the following image You can also replace a dimension value with variations within a class of element as shown below 274 Chapter 6 Usin...

Page 317: ... 6 Click Apply 7 Click OK Related topics Overriding Dimension Text on page 273 Modifying Dimensions on page 286 Dimension Properties on page 290 Creating Custom Dimension Units When you create a project by default Revit Architecture assigns specific units and accuracy to dimension styles based on the project units settings See Project Units on page 502 You can create custom dimension types that ov...

Page 318: ...ften want to know the dimensions of unfinished structural openings for the inserts You can dimension a structural opening by choosing references on the outer boundary of the core layer in the wall The structural layer is typically within the core boundary of a wall Inserts can be perpendicular or non perpendicular to the core boundary NOTE If you want to dimension to the structural layer of a wall...

Page 319: ...f the selected point Spot slopes can display the slope at a specific point on a face or an edge of an element Spot Elevations Spot elevations display the actual elevation of a selected point Spot elevations can also display the top and or bottom elevation of elements with a definite thickness Top and bottom elevations are available for elements in plan views You can place spot elevations on non ho...

Page 320: ... option for Relative Base d Select an option for Display Elevations NOTE This option is enabled when you place a spot elevation in a plan view Actual Selected Elevation displays the elevation of the selected point on the element Top Elevation displays the top elevation of the element Bottom Elevation displays the bottom elevation of the element Top Bottom Elevation displays the top and bottom elev...

Page 321: ...n add text for the elevation indicator top indicator and bottom indicator This text can appear as a suffix or a prefix to the spot elevation value In addition you can edit the instance parameters for a spot elevation to add supplementary prefix and or suffix text to the single or upper value and the lower value The following list shows the order of appearance for text relative to the spot elevatio...

Page 322: ...lect this option the arrowhead looks like the filled elevation symbol If you do not select this option the arrowhead is a crosshairs symbol 5 Click OK 6 Place a spot elevation 7 Select the spot elevation right click Element Properties and click Edit Type 8 For Type select Target Leader 9 For Leader Arrowhead select Filled Elevation Target NOTE The Filled Elevation Target type is available for othe...

Page 323: ...in the drawing area 6 If you are placing a spot coordinate without a leader click to place it with a leader move the cursor away from the element and click to place the spot coordinate with a leader and a shoulder move the cursor away from the element Click once to place the leader shoulder Move the cursor again and then click to place the spot coordinate 7 To finish click Modify tab Selection pan...

Page 324: ...fix instance parameter Elevation Indicator when set as Prefix type parameter Elevation spot coordinate value Elevation Indicator when set as Suffix type parameter Elevation Value Suffix instance parameter For more information see Spot Coordinate Type Properties on page 296 and Spot Coordinate Instance Properties on page 298 Spot Slopes A spot slope displays the slope at a specific point on a face ...

Page 325: ...he flip controls to flip the spot slope dimension direction The slope representation has two representations arrow or triangle The same information exists in both representations though it displays differently The triangle is not available for use in plan views The triangle looks similar to the following 7 To finish click Modify tab Selection panel Modify Related topics Spot Dimensions on page 277...

Page 326: ...lue as 8 6 3 Press Enter The sketch line is drawn the specified length Dimension Witness Lines You can move witness lines to new references for temporary and permanent dimensions You can also control the gap between the witness line and the element for permanent dimensions Properties for witness lines are included with the type properties for permanent dimensions See Permanent Dimension Type Prope...

Page 327: ... on page 286 Deleting Witness Lines on page 286 Controlling Witness Line Gaps for Permanent Dimensions By selecting a linear dimension you can control its distance from the element it is referencing and the reference point for the dimension 1 Create a linear dimension between 2 or more elements for example between 2 walls See Aligned Dimensions on page 265 2 Select a dimension line Blue controls a...

Page 328: ...lect Delete Witness Line from the shortcut menu Modifying Dimensions Revit Architecture gives you the capability to customize the look of your dimensions Changing a Dimension Value 1 Select a component that the dimension references 2 Click the dimension value If the dimension is locked the lock control appears next to it Click the lock control to unlock the dimension so you can change it 3 In the ...

Page 329: ... You can turn off the leader by clearing the Leader option from the Options Bar 3 To return the dimension text to its original position drag the handle back toward the dimension line and it snaps to its original position Changing the Dimension Line Tick Mark You can change the tick mark that displays at the ends of the dimension line 1 In the drawing area select a dimension and right click Element...

Page 330: ...rows flip to the exterior of the dimension line when the line is too small to accommodate them In addition multi segment dimension lines recognize when adjacent segments are too small for arrows to fit When this occurs the ends of the short segment string flip and the inner witness lines display the interior tick mark type designated in the dimension properties In the following image the dimension...

Page 331: ...components are those elements placed by defining a start point and an end point such as Structural Walls Walls Beams Braces and Trusses The Rotate with Component parameter must be selected to enable this tool To set spot coordinates and spot elevations to Rotate with Component 1 In the drawing area select the spot dimension coordinate or elevation 2 For a spot coordinate click Modify Spot Coordina...

Page 332: ...u can click Duplicate to create a new permanent or spot dimension type 4 When you are finished click OK Related topics Modifying Dimensions on page 286 Dimension Properties on page 290 Permanent Dimension Type Properties Description Name Graphics Specify the formatting method for a string of dimensions This parameter is available for linear dimension styles NOTE Arc length dimensions are linear di...

Page 333: ...ess lines in the dimensions When you set Witness Line Length this value this is the size at which the witness line plots if you are printing at 100 percent If Witness Line Control is set to Gap to Element this parameter sets the distance between the witness line and element being dimensioned Witness Line Gap to Element Sets the extension of a witness line beyond the tick mark When you set this val...

Page 334: ... Specify the size of the typeface for the dimension Text Size Specify the offset of the text from the dimension line Text Offset Specify the read convention for the dimension text Read Convention Sets the Microsoft True Type fonts for the dimensions Text Font If you set the value to opaque the dimension text is surrounded by a box that overlaps any geometry or text behind it in the view If you set...

Page 335: ... the component Rotate with Component Graphics Sets the appearance of the leader arrowhead The value None removes the arrow head See Specifying Arrowhead Styles on page 500 Leader Arrowhead Sets the weight of the leader line The higher the value the thicker the line Leader Line Weight Sets the arrowhead line weight The higher the value the thicker the arrowhead line Leader Arrowhead Line Weight Cli...

Page 336: ...ntation is relative to the host element Click the button to open the Format dialog Clear the Use Project Settings option and set the appropriate values See Setting Project Units on page 502 Units Format Offsets the text from the symbol Positive or negative values move the text away from the symbol Positive values are offsets that move towards the leader and neg ative values are offsets that move a...

Page 337: ...ions or Top Elevation you can enter text to indicate that this value represents the Top Indicator top elevation of the element This text can be displayed as either a prefix or a suffix to the elevation value When you specify the Display Elevations instance parameter to Top Bottom Elev ations or Bottom Elevation you can enter text to indicate that this value represents Bottom Indicator the bottom e...

Page 338: ...ange the appearance of the spot coordinate Description Name Constraints When selected the spot coordinate rotates with the component Rotate with Component Graphics Sets the appearance of the leader arrowhead The value None removes the arrow head To define an arrowhead see Specifying Arrowhead Styles on page 500 Leader Arrowhead Sets the weight of the leader line The higher the value the thicker th...

Page 339: ... Format dialog Clear the Use Project Settings option and set the appropriate values See Setting Project Units on page 502 Units Format Offsets the text away from the symbol Text Offset from Symbol Positive or negative values move the text away from the symbol Positive values are offsets that move towards the leader and negative values are offsets that move away from the leader Changes the position...

Page 340: ...or instance you might enter Y East West Indicator Displays the spot elevation in addition to the spot coordinates Include Elevation Specifies placement of the North South East West and Elevation indicators Indicator as Prefix Suffix Spot Coordinate Instance Properties Description Name Graphics When Leader is selected you can add a shoulder a bend to the leader line Leader Shoulder If selected the ...

Page 341: ...he spot slope Default setting is Down Slope Direction Sets the leader line length Leader Line Length Text Specify a ratio to define the elongation of the text string A value of 1 0 has no elongation Width Factor Underlines the spot coordinate value and text Underline Applies italic formatting to the spot coordinate value and text Italic Applies bold formatting to the spot coordinate value and text...

Page 342: ...cking them or by creating equality constraints Applying Constraints with Dimensions When you place permanent dimensions you can lock those dimensions When you lock a dimension you create a constraint A constraint dashed blue line appears when you select its references as shown in the following image Constraint from locked dimensions Many dimensions may correspond to the same constraint For example...

Page 343: ...splays when the values for all segments in the dimension are equal or if the values for the first and last segments of the dimension are equal If neither of these conditions is satisfied then the dimension segment cannot display the EQ label and instead displays the value You can change the display of the label from EQ to the dimension value To change the EQ label to the dimension value 1 Select t...

Page 344: ... when the equality constraint is not applied Delete the dimension that corresponds to the constraint A warning appears that you are not deleting the actual constraint Click Unconstrain in the warning dialog to remove the constraint Constraints and Worksets Constraints belong to the worksets of the elements they constrain In order to add a constraint the worksets of all the elements that can be mov...

Page 345: ...ings and extrusions that are typically created using sketch mode There are also elements such as walls that are sketched but do not require the use of sketch mode Sketch mode is an environment in Revit Architecture that allows you to sketch elements whose size or shape cannot be determined automatically for example when you create or edit a sketch of a roof or a floor When you enter sketch mode th...

Page 346: ...not be determined automatically such as a roof extrusion or opening you enter sketch mode In sketch mode only the tools available for that sketch are available for use the tools vary depending on the type of element you are sketching There are also elements such as walls that are sketched but do not require the use of sketch mode Common Options for Sketches to Use this option draw sketches Draw op...

Page 347: ...or sketch so that fewer clicks are re quired to complete it With a preset radius you can create a circle with one click or a fillet with 2 clicks specify a rounding of corners the radius of the fillet when joining lines with or without the chain option when you draw a rectangle or when you fillet using the Fillet Arc sketch option Using Constraints When Sketching You can use constraints while you ...

Page 348: ...aw panel Rectangle 3 On the Options Bar a Optionally select Offset and specify a value b Optionally select Radius and specify a value Specifying a radius creates fillets at the corners of the rectangle The following image shows a rectangle sketched without Radius selected and a rectangle sketched with Radius selected NOTE If you specify a radius the Offset option is overridden 4 Click in the drawi...

Page 349: ...anel Inscribed Polygon 3 On the Options Bar a Enter the number of sides for the polygon b Optionally select Offset and specify a value c Optionally select Radius and specify a value NOTE If you specify a radius the Offset option is overridden 4 Click in the drawing area to specify the start point 5 If you have not already specified a radius move the cursor and click to complete the inscribed polyg...

Page 350: ...n type the value of the radius and press Enter Sketching Arcs There are several options for sketching arcs in Revit Architecture Start End Radius Arc You specify a start end radius arc by drawing the chord that connects the 2 ends of the arc and then you specify the angle or radius with the third point Center ends Arc To create an arc from the center and end points first specify the radius for the...

Page 351: ...b or respective Place Element tab or Create Element tab Draw panel Start End Radius Arc and place the cursor in the drawing area 3 Click in the drawing area to specify the start point for the arc 4 Move the cursor and click to specify the length of the chord NOTE You can also use listening dimensions to specify the length of the chord After you click in the drawing area to specify the start point ...

Page 352: ...he cursor and click to define the arc radius and the start point of the arc NOTE You can also use listening dimensions to specify the radius of the arc Type a value for the radius and press Enter 5 Move the cursor and click to specify the end point of the arc NOTE You can also use listening dimensions to specify the angle of the arc Type a value for the angle and press Enter Sketching a Tangent Ar...

Page 353: ...that allows for an arc for example click Home tab Model panel Model Line 2 Click Place Lines tab or respective Place Element tab or Create Element tab Draw panel Fillet Arc and place the cursor in the drawing area 3 Select the first element to fillet 4 Select the second element to fillet 5 Move the cursor and click to define the fillet arc Sketching Arcs 311 ...

Page 354: ...e NOTE Offset for an ellipse is only available when you select the Pick Lines option When you create a full ellipse with an offset the result is a spline For example if you create a mass element as a full ellipse with an offset and then attempt to create a wall on the face of the mass element the ellipse is not considered contiguous as shown in the following image 4 Click in the drawing area to sp...

Page 355: ...vailable when you select the Pick Lines option 4 Click in the drawing area Snapping is enabled for the partial ellipse and a preview ellipse displays 5 Move the cursor away from the first point to define the direction and extent of the major axis 6 Either click when the desired value displays or type a value and press Enter 7 Move the cursor to get the desired partial ellipse shape and either clic...

Page 356: ...ating Elements on page 379 If you need to snap the axis end to another element you can use the drag controls to rotate the ellipse Using this method may cause you to inadvertently resize the axis Sketching a Spline 1 Select a tool that allows for a spline for example click Home tab Model panel Model Line 2 Click Place Lines tab or respective Place Element tab or Create Element tab Draw panel Splin...

Page 357: ...to a minimum The following image shows a spline that was sketched by choosing many control points blue dots You can create the same spline using fewer control points as shown Closing an Open Loop You can use the Close snap to close valid open loops when sketching If there is more than one option to close the loop you can move the cursor or press Tab to see other snap options To close an open loop ...

Page 358: ...ify Floors tab Edit panel Edit Boundary 3 Modify the element then If you want to select all of its sketch lines and drag it to the desired location If another element is attached it updates accordingly move an entire element select it and either drag the end control or edit the dimension If you are moving the end control of a modify the end of a sketch line straight line segment you can change the...

Page 359: ...ids and named reference planes NOTE The list is active even if you have not selected the Name option If you choose a name from the list Revit Architecture automatically selects the Name option Pick a plane Revit Architecture creates a plane coincident to the selected plane You can select any plane that can be dimensioned including wall faces faces in linked Revit models extrusion faces levels grid...

Page 360: ...lement that is not level based a hosted element it is associated with a work plane Work plane association controls how an element moves when its host moves When an element is created it inherits the work plane of the view subsequent changes to the view work plane do not effect the element It is important to associate geometry to a work plane in order for geometry to move correctly For example you ...

Page 361: ...element is no longer associated with a work plane the value of its Work Plane parameter in the Instance Properties dialog is not associated The element is free to move irrespective of a work plane Creating a Work Plane based Family You can create a family that is hosted by the active work plane This can be very useful both in a project environment and within a nested family where you may need a ne...

Page 362: ...e instance and click Flip Work Plane Creating Solid and Void Geometry The tools you use to create solid and void geometry are available only in the Family Editor For more information see Family Editor on page 416 For detailed information about creating families including tutorials for creating geometry using the Family Editor see The Families Guide on page 418 Creating an Extrusion For information...

Page 363: ...ork Plane panel Set 2 Use the sketching tools to sketch the extrusion profile To create a single solid form sketch a closed loop To create more than one form sketch multiple non intersecting closed loops 3 To extrude the profile from the default start point of 0 on the Options Bar for Depth enter a positive or negative extrusion depth This value changes the endpoint of the extrusion NOTE The extru...

Page 364: ...gain 3 Click Modify Extrusion tab Form panel Edit Extrusion 4 If desired modify the extrusion profile 5 To edit the extrusion properties click Modify Extrusion Edit Extrusion tab Element panel Extrusion Properties and change the visibility material or subcategory of the extrusion 6 To change the extrusion to a solid or a void under Identity Data for Solid Void select Solid or Void 7 Click OK 8 Cli...

Page 365: ...tangle on top of it Revit Architecture blends the 2 shapes together Sample base and top boundaries for a blend Finished blend NOTE If you want to dimension a solid blend after you create it you can dimension from lines at the top of the blend to lines at the base of the blend You cannot dimension from lines at the base of the blend to lines at the top of the blend To create a solid or void blend 1...

Page 366: ...t them and then apply the end point 4 When finished with the base boundary on the Create Blend Base Boundary tab Mode panel click Edit Top 5 On the Create Blend Top Boundary tab sketch a boundary for the top of the blend for example another square 6 If necessary edit the vertex connections to control the amount of twist in the blend On the Create Blend Top Boundary tab click Mode panel Edit Vertic...

Page 367: ... and specify a material To assign a solid blend to a subcategory under Identity Data for Subcategory select a subcategory Click OK 8 On the Blend panel click Finish Blend 9 To view the blend open a 3D view 10 To resize the blend in the 3D view select and use grips to edit it Editing a Blend For information about using blends in families see The Families Guide on page 418 1 In the drawing area sele...

Page 368: ...e Boundary tab click Mode panel Edit Vertices and edit the blend vertices 9 On the Blend panel click Finish Blend Creating a Revolve For information about using revolutions in families see The Families Guide on page 418 A revolve is a form that you create by revolving a shape around an axis You can revolve the shape in a circle or any fraction of a circle If the axis touches the revolve shape the ...

Page 369: ...on intersecting closed loops IMPORTANT If the axis touches the revolve shape the result is a solid If the axis does not touch the revolve shape the revolve will have a hole in it 4 Change the properties of the revolve On the Create Revolve tab Element panel click Revolve Properties To change the start and end points of the geometry to revolve enter a new Start and End Angle To set the visibility o...

Page 370: ...g procedure is a general method for creating a sweep Steps may vary depending on your design intent To create a solid or void sweep 1 In the Family Editor on the Create tab Forms panel do one of the following Click Solid drop down Sweep Click Void drop down Sweep NOTE If necessary set the work plane before you sketch the sweep Click Create tab Work Plane panel Set 2 Specify the sweep path To sketc...

Page 371: ...sketch the profile The profile sketch can be a single closed loop or multiple closed loops that do not intersect Sketch the profile near the intersection of the profile plane and the path c Sketch the profile Profiles must be closed loops d On the Create Profile Sketch tab Profile panel click Finish Profile 5 Specify the sweep properties On the Create Sweep tab Element panel click Sweep Properties...

Page 372: ... Editing a Sweep For information about using sweeps in families see The Families Guide on page 418 1 In the drawing area select the sweep 2 If you are in the project environment a On the Modify Element tab Family panel click Edit Family b Click Yes to open the family for editing c In the Family Editor select the sweep in the drawing area again 3 On the Modify Sweep tab Form panel click Edit Sweep ...

Page 373: ...g itself An error occurs if the geometry intersects If you create a sweep path by using the Pick Path tool you can drag the end points of the path lines as you are sketching it Creating a Swept Blend For information about using swept blends in families see The Families Guide on page 418 The Swept Blend tool allows you to create a blend that has 2 different profiles and then sweep it along a path T...

Page 374: ...ath for the swept blend Click Create tab Work Plane panel Set 3 Sketch or pick the path and then on the Path panel click Finish Path NOTE A swept blend path can only have one segment 4 Load or sketch Profile 1 The end point for Profile 1 on the swept blend path is highlighted To load a profile a Click Modify Profile tab Edit panel and select a profile from the Profile drop down If the profile you ...

Page 375: ...ces b On the Edit Vertices tab Vertex Connect panel select Controls on Base or Controls on Top c In the drawing area click the blue controls to move the vertex connections d On the Vertex Connect panel click the Twist Right and Twist Left tools to twist the swept blend 8 Specify the swept blend properties On the Element panel click Swept Blend Properties To set the visibility of a solid swept blen...

Page 376: ...the Edit panel d Sketch the profile and then click Profile panel Finish Profile 6 To edit other swept blend properties click Swept Blend tab Element panel Swept Blend Properties and change the visibility material or subcategory of the sweep 7 To change the swept blend to a solid or a void under Identity Data for Solid Void select Solid or Void 8 Click OK 9 On the Swept Blend panel click Finish Swe...

Page 377: ...shape and join it to the existing geometry 4 Click Modify tab Edit Geometry panel Cut drop down Cut Geometry and select the void you created Notice the cursor changes shape 5 Select the geometry you created in Step 3 Cut Geometry 335 ...

Page 378: ...mily Editor The Model Line tool on the Create tab Model panel lets you sketch two dimensional geometry for when you do not need to show solid geometry For example you could sketch door panels and hardware as 2D rather than sketch solid extrusions Model lines are always visible in 3D views You can control their visibility in plan and elevation views by selecting the lines and clicking Modify Lines ...

Page 379: ...amily Editor you can add a reference line in any view and use the same drawing tools and techniques used when adding model lines When you sketch a reference line it displays as a single line In a view where the model graphics are set to hidden line or wireframe the sketched line displays as a solid line and the plane extents display with dashed lines To add a reference line 1 In the Family Editor ...

Page 380: ...lign the face of a model element to the reference line and lock it 4 Add a dimension line referring to the reference line and label it as an instance or type parameter 5 Flex the model by changing and applying a new value within the Family Types dialog 338 Chapter 7 Sketching ...

Page 381: ... just below the cursor Wall element before and after highlighting When an element is highlighted click to select it When an element is selected in one view the selection applies to all other views as well TIP If you have difficulty highlighting a particular element because other elements are in close proximity press TAB to cycle through the elements until the desired element is highlighted The sta...

Page 382: ...ement locate the desired element to select click the element select an element CTRL click each element For more ways to select multiple elements see Selecting Multiple Elements on page 340 select multiple elements check the selection count on the status bar See How Many Elements Are Selected on page 341 determine how many elements are cur rently selected select one element of the desired type and ...

Page 383: ...fficult to determine whether you have selected the intended elements To verify this and make any needed adjustments do the following Check the selection count on the status bar Revit Architecture indicates the total number of selected elements using Click the selection count to display the Filter dialog The Filter dialog lists the categories of the selected elements It also indicates the number of...

Page 384: ... To select all categories click Check All To clear all categories click Check None When you select or clear the check boxes Total Elements updates to display the new number of selected elements This total also displays in the selection count on the status bar 4 Click OK The selected elements now include only the categories specified in the filter The selection count on the status bar displays the ...

Page 385: ...lls joined at mid end faces can also be included in a chain selection See Creating Walls with Mid End Faces on page 657 As shown in the following illustration of a selected chain of walls drag controls display at the coincident endpoints You can drag these controls to new locations without unjoining the endpoints See Modifying a Selected Chain on page 345 A selected chain of walls with drag contro...

Page 386: ...e to highlight only the second element 4 Click to select the part of the chain that is highlighted If the chain is a closed loop the elements to be highlighted for partial chain selection are determined by the cursor position when you highlight the last desired element As shown in the following wall layout if you position the cursor near the left endpoint of the upper right wall the partial chain ...

Page 387: ...perform any of the following edits without unjoining elements in the chain To change the layout of the chain drag a control to a new location Editing a selected chain of walls To move the entire chain preserving its layout while pressing SHIFT drag the chain vertically or horizontally to a new location NOTE If the movement is constrained you can release Shift and then move the chain Selecting Chai...

Page 388: ...n to the desired location Copying a wall chain in a 3D view Selecting Walls or Lines Joined at a Point When multiple walls or lines are joined at a common point you can use TAB to select multiple elements as follows Place the cursor on or near one wall or line and click to select it 346 Chapter 8 Editing Elements ...

Page 389: ... For example in the following example the cursor is positioned on the right side of the lower wall If you want to select these 2 walls or lines click to select them Press TAB again to highlight all of the connected walls or lines Then click to select them Selecting Chains of Walls and Lines 347 ...

Page 390: ...nt or a selected mullion If you right click a curtain wall and click Select Mullions the following options are available Select Mullions on Vertical Grid Selects all interior mullions on vertical grids Select Mullions on Horizontal Grid Selects all interior mullions on horizontal grids Select All Mullions Selects all mullions on the host If you right click a curtain system or sloped glazings and c...

Page 391: ...le depend on the type of element selected and the type of view When a control has multiple functions move the cursor over the control and press TAB to toggle between the functions For example press TAB to display shape handles for most basic wall types when they are highlighted in elevation or 3D views In plan views however this only works for curtain walls To display shape handles for a basic wal...

Page 392: ...TIP You can right click the wall end controls and use an option on the shortcut menu to allow or disallow wall joins Flip Controls Click a flip control double arrows to change the orientation of an element For example when you flip a compound wall you reverse the order of its component layers Doors with a swing have 2 flip controls Flip the Instance Facing which controls whether the door swings in...

Page 393: ...The symbol snaps to points and lines of interest such as walls and the intersections of walls and lines You can also drag it onto open space See Rotating Elements on page 379 Rotate control Dimension Text Controls Dimension text controls are blue squares that display on selected dimension elements that you have added to a drawing Drag a control to move dimension text away from the dimension line N...

Page 394: ...ossible positions If elements constrained to flip in only one direction such as windows are selected with elements that can flip in multiple directions such as doors then all elements flip along the common direction Pressing the SPACEBAR does not work in the following cases The selection contains any element that cannot be flipped The selection includes elements that do not share a common flip dir...

Page 395: ...ctions or cancel a current action Undoing an Action Use the Undo tool to cancel the most recent action or a series of recent actions To undo a single action Click Undo on the Quick Access toolbar Revit Architecture cancels the most recent action To undo multiple actions 1 On the Quick Access toolbar click the drop down list adjacent to the Undo tool 2 Scroll down to find the action to cancel Undoi...

Page 396: ...hitecture reinstates the action that you had previously canceled with Undo To redo multiple actions 1 Undo multiple Revit Architecture actions 2 On the Quick Access toolbar click the drop down list adjacent to the Redo tool 3 Scroll down to find the action to redo 4 Select the action Revit Architecture reinstates all actions up to and including the selected action TIP You can also use the keyboard...

Page 397: ...oup This makes modifying your building model much easier because you can change several instances of a group in one operation You can create the following types of groups Model groups which can contain model elements Detail groups which can contain view specific elements such as text and filled regions Attached detail groups which can contain view specific elements that are associated with a speci...

Page 398: ...also grouping the elements that they reference You can group them in an attached detail group for the model group they reference Creating a Group by Selecting Elements 1 In a project view select the desired elements or existing groups you want in the group 2 Click Multi Select tab Create panel Create Group NOTE If you have only selected one element type the respective Modify Element tab displays i...

Page 399: ...Select an existing model group and click Modify Model Groups tab Group panel Edit Group Click Edit Group panel Attach Detail 2 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog enter a name for the model group if necessary and enter a name for the attached detail group 3 Click OK The attached detail group displays in the Project Browser under the model group that it belongs to Related top...

Page 400: ... Browser expand Groups 2 Right click the group to reload and select Reload 3 In the Load File as Group dialog navigate to the file 4 Optionally select whether you want to include attached details levels or grids 5 Click Open If any family types differ between the file you are loading and the host file the Duplicate Types dialog opens to indicate this Placing Groups To place a model group 1 Click H...

Page 401: ...b Select panel Modify 3 Select the model group or multiple instances of the same model group 4 Click Modify Model Groups tab Group panel Attached Detail Groups 5 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog select the detail groups to display or clear the detail groups to hide in the current view 6 Click OK Specifying the Position of a Group by its Origin When you are placing moving rotating or p...

Page 402: ...k Edit Group panel Remove to remove elements from the group 4 Select the elements to add or remove from the group NOTE If you add a view specific element to a model group for example a window tag the view specific element is placed in the project view and not in the model group 5 When you are finished click Finish Excluding Elements from a Group Instance Excluding elements from a group instance ma...

Page 403: ... element to a group 1 In the drawing area place the cursor over the excluded group element 2 Press TAB to highlight the element and then click to select it 3 Click the icon to restore the excluded element or right click and select Restore Excluded Member from the shortcut menu To restore all excluded elements in a group In the drawing area right click the group and click Restore all Excluded Editi...

Page 404: ...n choosing a different group name in the Type Selector Revit Architecture automatically replaces the group When you swap an instance of a group type for an instance of a different group type Revit Architecture attempts to replace any attached detail groups from the old group instance with attached detail groups of the same name from the new group instance For elements in attached detail groups tha...

Page 405: ...ls to groups to make edits This allows you to make edits to linked models in context of the main model When you finish modifying the group you can convert it back to a link You have created a group or linked Revit model and then decide that you need to change the group to a linked model or change the linked model to a group When you convert a group to a linked Revit model any excluded elements are...

Page 406: ...ou are working in a project or a Revit family file RFA if you are working in the Family Editor 1 Click Save As Library Group 2 By default the file name text box displays Same as group name If you accept this name Revit Architecture saves the file with the same name as the group So a group called Group 5 saves as Group 5 rvt or Group 5 rfa If desired you can change this name 3 If your project has m...

Page 407: ...te them simultaneously Array members can belong to a group therefore you can add or remove items from the group For example you can create an array of 7 walls When you group a desk with one of the walls all walls in the array get a desk For more information about grouping see Editing Elements in Groups on page 354 NOTE Arrays are not supported for most annotation symbols An array of windows and co...

Page 408: ...ted Revit Architecture creates the specified number of copies and does not group them Once placed each copy acts independently of the others Number Specifies the total number of copies of the selected elements in the array Move To 2nd Specifies the spacing between each member of the array Additional array members appear after the second member Last Specifies the entire span of the array Array memb...

Page 409: ... Last place array members as follows a Click in the drawing area to indicate a starting point for measuring b Move the cursor to the desired location for the last array member As you move the cursor a box appears to indicate the size of the selected elements The box moves along snap points A dimension appears between the first click location and the current cursor position c Click again to place t...

Page 410: ...fy an Angle value on the Options Bar and press ENTER Skip the remaining steps 7 Click to position the first ray of rotation If the cursor snaps while specifying the first ray the snap line rotates along with the preview box and snaps to angles on the screen while placing the second ray 8 Move the cursor to place the second ray of rotation Another line appears to indicate the ray A temporary angula...

Page 411: ...dial array Specifying the number of elements in the array The completed radial array Copying an Array 1 Select all members of the array 2 While pressing CTRL click and drag an array member to a new location Copying an Array 369 ...

Page 412: ...he modified array member is part of a group the change affects that element and proportionally affects other members of the group depending on the dimension modified If the modified array member is not part of a group the change affects the selected element only See Changing a Dimension Value on page 286 If array members belong to a group you can change the number of members in the array Select th...

Page 413: ... the Options Bar select or clear the Append to End check box If Append to End is selected the spacing between the elements in the array remains the same and any elements you add to or remove from the array are added to or removed from the existing endpoint of the array Array selected Number of elements in the array changed with Append to End selected If Append to End is not selected the endpoints ...

Page 414: ...rag one The spatial relationships among them are preserved TIP When moving elements one at a time select Press Drag on the status bar to drag an element without selecting it first When using this option the element is selected as you drag it Some elements can move only horizontally or vertically by default Revit Architecture provides visual cues about the way that a selected element can move To re...

Page 415: ...isjoin to break the association between the selection and other elements before moving This option is useful for example when you want to move a wall that is joined to another wall You can also use the Disjoin option to move a hosted element from its current host to a new host For example you can move a window from one wall to another wall This feature works best when you clear the Constrain optio...

Page 416: ...ace families You cannot offset elements in a view perpendicular to their move plane For example you cannot offset a wall in an elevation view To offset an element or a copy of an element 1 Click Modify tab Edit panel Offset 2 On the Options Bar select how you want to specify the offset distance Then If you want to select Graphical drag the selected element to the desired distance select Numerical ...

Page 417: ...system You cannot cut an interior elevation arrow without cutting its adjoined elevation symbol You cannot cut some elements in any context For example you cannot cut the Ref Level in the Family Editor To cut and paste elements 1 Select one or more elements in the drawing area 2 Click Modify Element tab Clipboard panel Cut NOTE You can also use the keyboard shortcut CTRL X to cut elements 3 Paste ...

Page 418: ...tions Bar select Moves With Nearby Elements You can also select this option on the Instance Properties dialog for one or more selected elements To display this dialog right click the element and click Element Properties 3 Move the selected elements to the desired position Witness lines show dimensions from walls and other points If desired you can click a dimension to change it Now when you move t...

Page 419: ...with a selected element This tool is generally used to align walls beams and lines but it can be used with other types of elements as well The elements to align can be of the same type or they can be from different families You can align elements in a plan view or elevation view only For example you can use the Align tool to do the following Align the ends of Walls on page 633 or Beams on page 840...

Page 420: ...Grid line with 4 columns Align columns with grid lines Selected point to align to an element Element and point joined To align elements 1 Click Modify tab Edit panel Align 378 Chapter 8 Editing Elements ...

Page 421: ... click it 5 If you want the selected elements to stay aligned with the reference element if you later move it click the padlock to lock the alignment If the padlock symbol has disappeared because you have done something else click Modify and select the reference element to make the symbol reappear 6 To start a new alignment press ESC once 7 To exit the Align tool press ESC twice Rotating Elements ...

Page 422: ...ond ray of rotation Another line displays to indicate the ray A temporary angular dimension displays as you rotate and a preview image shows the selection rotating TIP You can also rotate an element using listening dimensions After you click to specify the first ray of rotation the angular dimension displays in bold Enter a value using the keyboard 7 Click to place the second ray and finish rotati...

Page 423: ...s Or to sketch a temporary mirror axis line select Draw Mirror Axis The mirror cursor appears 3 To move the selected item rather than making a copy of it clear Copy on the Options Bar 4 Select or draw the line to use as a mirror axis You can pick only a line or a reference plane that the cursor can snap to You cannot mirror a component around empty space Revit Architecture moves or copies the sele...

Page 424: ...y panel Pin Revit Architecture displays a pushpin control near the component to indicate that it is pinned in place To move or delete the component you must first unlock it by clicking the pushpin control Click the pushpin again to lock the component Related topics Preventing Elements from Moving on page 382 Unpinning Elements on page 382 Constraints on page 300 Unpinning Elements The Unpin tool u...

Page 425: ...ut not their values If you resize an element that a dimension references the dimension value does change Import symbols have a read only instance parameter called Instance Scale It shows how much the instance size differs from the base symbol You can change it by resizing the import symbol Resizing Elements with Shape Handles When you select and drag the handles of multiple elements Revit Architec...

Page 426: ...s For example suppose you sketch a first vector that is 5 feet and a second vector that is 10 feet This creates a scale factor of 2 As a result the elements become twice their original size To resize elements graphically 1 Select elements to resize Be sure to select only supported elements such as walls and lines The Scale tool is unavailable if your entire selection contains just one non supporte...

Page 427: ...Defining the first scale vector Defining the second scale vector Resizing Graphically 385 ...

Page 428: ...efined scale factor Resizing Elements with Formulas You can use formulas to modify the dimensions of specific elements For example as you sketch a wall you can enter a formula for the temporary dimension of the wall Begin the formula with an equal sign and then use conventional mathematical syntax See Valid Formula Syntax and Abbreviations on page 388 For information about using formulas with fami...

Page 429: ...ameters that depend on other parameters for their values A simple example would be a width parameter set to equal twice the height of an object In practice formulas can be used in many ways both simple and sophisticated Typical uses include embedding design relationships relating a number of instances to a variable length and setting up angular relationships For example formulas can be used to Cal...

Page 430: ...qrt 16 Sine sin Cosine cos Tangent tan Arcsine asin Arccosine acos Arctangent atan e raised to an x power exp Absolute Value abs You can enter integers decimals and fractional values in formulas using normal mathematical syntax as shown in the examples below Length Height Width sqrt Height Width Length Wall 1 11000mm Wall 2 15000mm Area Length 500mm Width 300mm Volume Length 500mm Width 300mm Heig...

Page 431: ...m IF with a text parameter IF Length 35 String1 String2 IF with logical AND IF AND x 1 y 2 8 3 IF with logical OR IF OR A 1 B 3 8 3 Embedded IF statements IF Length 35 2 6 IF Length 45 3 IF Length 55 5 8 IF with Yes No condition Length 40 Note that both the condition and the results are implied Examples of Conditional Statement Usage Typical uses for conditional statements in formulas include calc...

Page 432: ... trim or extend one element to a boundary defined by another element ence to use as a boundary Then select the element to trim or extend If this element crosses the boundary or a projection the part that you click is retained The part on the other side of the boundary is trimmed click Modify tab Edit panel Extend drop down Trim Extend Multiple Elements Select the trim or extend multiple elements t...

Page 433: ... Trim Extend Single Element option with horizontal wall selected as the boundary Result of Trim Extend Single Element operation Preview of Trim Extend Multiple Elements option with horizontal wall selected as boundary Trimming and Extending Elements 391 ...

Page 434: ...with the Copy Tool The Copy tool copies one or more selected elements and allows you to place copies in the drawing immediately It activates the Move tool with the Copy option selected The Copy tool is different from the Copy to Clipboard tool Use the Copy tool when you want to copy a selected element and place it immediately for example in the same view Use the Copy to Clipboard tool for example ...

Page 435: ...ed Elements on page 396 The Copy to Clipboard tool has the following restrictions You cannot copy an interior elevation arrow without copying its adjoined elevation symbol You cannot copy some combinations of elements For example you cannot copy curtain panels and mullions without copying the entire curtain system You cannot copy some elements in any context For example you cannot copy the Ref Lev...

Page 436: ...ab Clipboard panel Paste NOTE You can also use the keyboard shortcut CTRL V to paste elements In Paste mode a preview image of the elements appears in the drawing area similar to the following Temporary dimensions and witness lines display to help position the elements 4 Click to place the preview image in the desired location The pasted elements appear in the drawing area They are selected so tha...

Page 437: ...g Pasted Elements During a paste operation you may need to refine the placement of pasted elements rehost pasted building components or specify new references for pasted elements The Edit Pasted Elements tool allows you to move or modify elements before the paste operation is finalized To edit pasted elements 1 Paste one or more elements from the clipboard See Pasting Elements from the Clipboard o...

Page 438: ...the following options Select Levels If you copy all model elements you can paste them into one or more levels In the dialog that displays choose the levels by name To select more than one press CTRL while selecting the names Select Views If you copy view specific elements such as dimensions or model and view specific elements you can paste them into similar types of views Current View Pastes the e...

Page 439: ...lick Modify Element tab Create panel Create Similar or right click an element in the drawing area and click Create Similar on the shortcut menu 3 Click in the drawing area to place the newly created instance in the desired location Repeat as many times as needed 4 To exit the Create Similar tool press ESC twice Modifying Elements Revit Architecture provides tools to manipulate modify and otherwise...

Page 440: ...to be converted in the drawing area When changing a wall s type the Match Type tool copies Base Offset Unconnected Height Top Extension Distance and Base Extension Distance from the source wall type to the target wall If the target wall is on the same level as the source wall then the values for Top Constraint and Top Offset are also copied Changing the Line Style of Elements Use the Linework tool...

Page 441: ... page 401 NOTE You cannot use the Linework tool to modify the line style of a dimension or any other annotation line Linework and Cut Edges In addition to using the Linework tool for projection edges you can use it to apply other line styles to different types of cut edges of the same model element For example you can apply one line style to the front cut edge of a face and another line style to t...

Page 442: ...nt panel and select the line style to apply to the edge from the Line Style drop down For information about defining and modifying line styles see Line Styles on page 494 5 In the drawing area highlight the edge whose line style you want to change For components with multiple edges press TAB to cycle the highlighting from individual edges to the whole component The tooltip and the status bar ident...

Page 443: ...iew c Click OK 5 Click OK Now you can use the Linework tool to change the line style of edges in the linked model See Using the Linework Tool on page 400 Changing the Line Style of a Projection Edge You can change the line style of only a part of a projection edge When you are changing the line style for a single edge see Using the Linework Tool on page 400 blue controls display at each end of the...

Page 444: ...n and you want to show an outline of this entrance using hidden lines on the north elevation To use hidden lines 1 Open a view where an element is obscuring an element you want to show using hidden lines For example in the sample above you would open the north elevation view 2 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area select the Wireframe model graphics style 3 Click Modify tab Edi...

Page 445: ...3 Move the cursor over an element in the view for example a compound wall Depending on the selected Edit option a valid cut face or a boundary line is highlighted 4 Click the highlighted cut face or boundary to select it and enter Sketch mode 5 Sketch an area to be added to or subtracted from the selection Use a sequence of lines that starts and ends at the same boundary line You cannot sketch a c...

Page 446: ...ight or color of elements in the view right click the element and click Override Graphics in View By Element See Overriding Visibility and Graphic Display of Individual Elements on page 199 Before the Cut Profile tool 404 Chapter 8 Editing Elements ...

Page 447: ...ls or lines that you select in plan views In elevation views you can use this tool to select only the ends of walls running perpendicular to the view direction to display the height of the wall In both plan and elevation views however you can draw a temporary line or a chain of lines connecting points that you specify In either case the dimensions generated by the tool remain on the screen until y...

Page 448: ...tend and enter a value for the length of the line repeating until all lines in the chain are drawn The Total Length box on the Options Bar keeps a running total for the length of the chain Double click to end the chain NOTE Chain is only available when you select Measure Between Two References 3 Press ESC once to exit the current measurement 4 Press ESC twice to exit the Measure tool Measure line ...

Page 449: ...fy tab Edit Geometry panel Join 2 If you want to join the first selected geometry instance to several other instances select Multiple Join on the Options Bar If you do not select this option you must make a first and second selection each time 3 Select the first geometry to join for example a wall face 4 Select the second geometry to join to the first for example an edge of a floor 5 If you select...

Page 450: ...ion selected 4 With the wall or line split you can select pieces of it and perform a function on that piece Splitting Walls Horizontally You can split a wall along a horizontal line in an elevation or a 3D view After you split a wall Revit Architecture treats it as 2 separate walls which means that you can modify one part independently of the other For example in a 2 level building suppose you sna...

Page 451: ...ance The Split Face tool splits the selected face of the element it does not change the structure of the element After splitting the face you can use the Paint tool to apply a different material to this section of face See Applying a Material to the Face of an Element on page 411 A wall with a split face around the window before painting Splitting Faces 409 ...

Page 452: ...the desired face 3 Click to select the face 4 Sketch the face area to split For more information about the sketching tools see Sketching on page 303 NOTE The sketch must be in a closed loop inside the face or an open loop that ends on the boundary of the face In the following example the wall around the window is split so that it can be painted to match the border around the door 410 Chapter 8 Edi...

Page 453: ...ce panel Paint 2 Click Paint tab Element panel and select the material to apply from the Material drop down 3 Place the cursor on the element face to highlight it You may need to press TAB to select the desired face If you highlight a face that has already been painted the status bar indicates the material that is applied to it 4 Click to apply the paint More About Painting Surfaces You cannot app...

Page 454: ...Before painting applying material to stairs 412 Chapter 8 Editing Elements ...

Page 455: ...ed elements from the drawing The Delete tool is available only after selecting elements It does not paste deleted elements to the clipboard To delete elements 1 Select one or more elements in the drawing area 2 Click Modify Element tab Modify panel Delete or press DELETE Deleting Elements 413 ...

Page 456: ...414 ...

Page 457: ...eir parameters but the set of parameters their names and meanings is the same These variations within the family are called family types or types For example the Furniture category includes families and family types that you can use to create different pieces of furniture like desks chairs and cabinets Although these families serve different purposes and are composed of different materials they ha...

Page 458: ...families are the families that you most commonly create and modify in Revit Architecture Unlike system families loadable families are created in external RFA files and imported or loaded in your projects For loadable families that contain many types you can create and use type catalogs which allow you load only the types that you need for a project In Place Families In place elements are unique el...

Page 459: ...able families and in place elements The tabs and panels change depending on the type of family that you are editing You do not use the Family Editor to edit system families Before you edit or create a family you should become familiar with families See The Families Guide on page 418 To edit a family from a project Do one of the following Select an instance of the family in the drawing and click Mo...

Page 460: ...anations procedures and reference information To access the Revit Architecture Families Guide click Help drop down Families Guide Working with Families This topic covers tasks that are commonly performed when working with families For detailed information about families see The Families Guide on page 418 Viewing Families in a Project or Template You can view all the families that are available in ...

Page 461: ...t creating an element from an instance in a project see Copying Elements with the Create Similar Tool on page 396 For detailed information about creating families and family elements see The Families Guide on page 418 To create an element from a family type 1 Do one of the following On the Home tab Build panel click the element that you want to create Select the family type in the Project Browser ...

Page 462: ... the family type that you are modifying If desired in the upper left corner click Rename and enter a new name 3 Click OK to exit all dialogs If you are modifying a family type in a project any instances of elements with the same family type in the project update to reflect your modifications Adding a Type to a Family After loading a family into a project you can create different family types from ...

Page 463: ... type that you want to delete 3 If you want to delete a loadable family type expand the family 4 Select the family or type to delete TIP To select more than one family or type press and hold Ctrl while selecting 5 Do either of the following Right click and click Delete Press Delete The family or type is deleted from the project or template If you are deleting a family or type from a project and th...

Page 464: ...though you cannot load system families into templates and projects you can copy and paste or transfer system family types between projects and templates You can copy and paste any number of individual types or use a tool to transfer all types in the system families that you specify System families can also host other kinds of families usually loadable families For example a wall system family may ...

Page 465: ...s Filters Grids Keynoting Levels Lines Load Types Match Lines Materials Model Text Object Styles Phases Project Browser Organization Project Units Sections Site Settings Spot Dimensions Snaps Structural Settings Sun and Shadow Temporary Dimensions Text Viewports View Tags Callout Elevation and Section Tags View Templates Revit System Families and Settings 423 ...

Page 466: ...stem family types of a selected system family or families from one project to another Copy and paste system family types when you have only have a few system family types that you need to load between projects or templates Transfer system family types when you are creating a new template or project or anytime that you need to transfer all the types of a system family or families NOTE When you tran...

Page 467: ...n the Web Nesting and Sharing Families You can load instances of families in other families to create new families By nesting existing families inside other families you can save yourself modelling time Depending on how you want instances of these families to act when you add them to your projects as a single element or as individual elements you can specify whether the nested families are shared ...

Page 468: ...s Modern Medium Library has been converted into Revit Architecture families and made available on the Web Modern Medium families cannot be altered structurally within Revit Architecture You can however change the appearance of a Modern Medium family type by changing the render appearance of the material linked to its object style NOTE Loading a large number of families from the Modern Medium Libra...

Page 469: ...amilies Guide on page 418 Loading Families When you load families into a project the Revit Architecture imperial or metric family library located in C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Autodesk RAC 2010 Imperial or Metric Library is accessed by default If your office is using a different library of content in another location your system may access that library by default Contact y...

Page 470: ...elete the family and reload it To load families with shared components into a project 1 Open the project into which you want to load the family 2 Click Insert tab Load from Library panel Load Family 3 In the Load Family dialog select the family to load and click Open 4 Add instances of the family to your projects Loading a Family with a Type Catalog When you load a family with many types into a pr...

Page 471: ...on All family types are saved with the family 1 Do either of the following Click Save As Library Family Right click a family in the Project Browser and click Save 2 In the Save Family dialog a If you are using Save As Library Family for Family to save select the family from a list of families loaded in the project b For Save in navigate to the location in which you want to save the family c Specif...

Page 472: ...ching component geometry Add dimensions to specify parametric relationships Label dimensions to create type or instance parameters or 2D representation Test or flex the skeleton 5 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters 6 Add a single level of geometry in solids and voids and constrain the geometry to reference planes 7 Flex the new model types and hosts to verify correct ...

Page 473: ...cel TIP When reloading multiple families you can select Do this for all loading families 8 Close the family file Creating Parameters You can create new instance parameters or type parameters for any family type By adding new parameters you have more control over the information contained in each family instance or type You can create dynamic family types for increased flexibility within the model ...

Page 474: ...mponents after the family is loaded into a project Family Type 8 For Group parameter under select a value After the family is loaded into a project this value determines which group header the parameter displays under in the Instance Properties dialog 9 Select either Instance or Type This defines whether the parameter is an Instance or Type parameter 10 Click OK NOTE To assign a material to a fami...

Page 475: ...th the current parameter and click OK NOTE When you associate 2 parameters an equal sign appears on the button 11 Click OK to close properties dialog 12 Continue creating the host family and save it 13 Load the family into a project and place a few instances of it 14 Select an instance of the family and click Modify Element tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Instance Properties or Type...

Page 476: ...fy the position the size or shape of a nested instance In Place Elements In place elements are custom elements that you create in the context of a project Create an in place element when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one or more relationships to other project geometry You can create multiple in place elements in your projects and ...

Page 477: ...he category under which the family for the in place element will display in the Project Browser in which it will schedule and in which you can control its visibility 3 In the Name dialog type a name and click OK The Family Editor opens 4 Use the Family Editor tools to create the in place element 5 When you finish creating the in place element click Finish Model Connectors Knowing how to add and re...

Page 478: ...ires additional parameters and constraints to be used effectively Connector Orientation Fittings pipe and duct fittings expect the instance origin of the family to be the intersection of the connectors In most cases for fittings there is a point on the fitting where all of the connectors if extended into the fitting will collide Fittings expect this collision to be placed at the original intersect...

Page 479: ...try instead of away from it You can modify the connector arrow direction by selecting the connector and clicking the flip arrows Placing a Connector Place a Connector on a Face 1 In the Project Browser double click Views all 3D Views 3D and spin the model to view the face where you want to place a connector The first connector that you place for a specific type is assigned as the primary connector...

Page 480: ...example an electrical connector is placed on the top work plane of a junction box 4 Select the connector move it and specify instance properties as needed You can enter parameter values or associate them with family parameters for the component Selecting a Primary Connector The first connector that you place for a specific type is assigned as the primary connector However you can change the connec...

Page 481: ...nectors Arrows display between the connectors to indicate the link Unlinking Connectors 1 Open a view containing the connector being unlinked 2 Select either of 2 linked connectors 3 Click Modify Connector Element tab Connector Links panel Remove Link The link is removed Deleting a Connector 1 Open a view containing the connector being deleted 2 Select the connector and press Delete or click Modif...

Page 482: ...Calculated based on Voltage x Current Active only when Balanced Load is True and System Type is Power Apparent Load The voltage specified on the connector Active only when the System Type is Power Voltage Possible values are Data Power Balanced Power Unbalanced Telephone Security Fire Alarm Nurse Call Controls Communication System Type Possible values are HVAC Lighting Power Other Load Classificat...

Page 483: ...nt Specific Loss Loss Method Mechanical Airflow Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss Pressure Drop The amount of air flowing at this connector Flow Dimensions Possible values are Rectangular or Round Shape The height of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular Height The width of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular Width The radius of the connect...

Page 484: ...e Flow Configuration is System Flow Factor Volumetric flow rate of fluid through connector Flow Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss Pressure Drop Possible values are Calculated Preset System Flow Configuration Possible values are In Out Bidirectional Bidirectional is active only when the Flow Configuration is Calculated Flow Direction Possible values are Not Defined K Coefficient fro...

Page 485: ...hedule is derived from the primary connector Primary Connector The index of the linked connector 1 if none read only Link Connector Index A description of the connector Connector Description Indicates whether the connector is exported on a site utility to an an Autodesk Ex change file ADSK See Importing Building Components on page 1398 Utility Connector Properties 443 ...

Page 486: ...444 ...

Page 487: ...e it as a new template RTE file Start with a blank project file define all settings for it and then save it as a template RTE file Start with a blank project file and specify all names for views levels and viewports You can create a set of drawings by creating sheets and adding views to the sheets As you start to draw the geometry in those views the views on the sheets update See Sheets on page 10...

Page 488: ...oject Settings on page 445 Families These include system families and loaded families You can modify or duplicate system families for example walls as necessary for a project You can also load families for example commonly used families custom families and titleblocks See Loading Families on page 427 and Title Blocks on page 1046 Project views Predefine plan views levels schedules legends sheets a...

Page 489: ...eration Specifying Project Information 1 Click Manage tab Project Settings panel Project Information 2 In the Instance Properties dialog specify the following Energy Data specifies parameters that define values that are exported to a gbXML file See Specifying Energy Analysis gbXML Settings on page 447 Project Issue Date Project Status Client Name Project Address Click Edit enter the address in the...

Page 490: ...Postal Code enter a valid postal code For Project Phase select Existing or New Construction For Sliver Space specify a tolerance value for sliver spaces All areas that are within the sliver space tolerance are considered sliver spaces 4 Click OK twice Project Location and Orientation When you create a project specify the project location on the globe using the nearest major city or the latitude an...

Page 491: ...s a Click View tab Graphics panel View Properties b In the Instance Properties dialog for Orientation select True North and click OK This change allows you to see accurate shadows in the plan view See Casting Shadows on page 253 3 Rotate the project to True North as follows a Click Manage tab Project Location panel Position drop down Rotate True North b Rotate the building model using one of the f...

Page 492: ...ory in your project Parameters that you create display in the Instance or Type Properties dialog under the group you define and with the values you define There are 2 types of custom parameters Shared parameters Shared parameters can be shared with other projects or families Use shared parameters when the same piece of information must exist in more than one project or family For example if a para...

Page 493: ... you can then create a schedule with these categories This is called creating a multi category schedule in Revit Architecture Shared parameters are stored in a file independent of any family file or Revit Architecture project this allows you to access the file from different families or projects Categories Allowing Shared Parameters Only certain categories within Revit Architecture allow shared pa...

Page 494: ...lectrical parameters or a hardware group for specific hardware parameters You can create as many groups and parameters as desired Your session of Revit Architecture can reference only one shared parameter file at a time If there are other shared parameters in a different file that you want in the active shared parameter file you need to export the parameters to the active file Creating Shared Para...

Page 495: ... Instance or Type Properties dialog Family Type If you select this option the Select Category dialog opens where you can select the family type NOTE You do not specify the parameter to be instance or type You decide that later when you add the parameter to a family or a project 10 When finished creating parameters click OK Related topics Shared Parameters on page 451 Categories Allowing Shared Par...

Page 496: ...te from the Parameters group box WARNING Use care when deleting shared parameters since they may be used in other projects If you delete a parameter and then create another parameter with the same name Revit Architecture does not consider it to be the same parameter Adding Shared Parameters to Families You add shared parameters to families in the Family Editor 1 Start creating a family or open an ...

Page 497: ...or more information on creating shared parameter files see Setting Up Shared Parameter Files on page 452 2 Select a shared parameter in either a family or a project 3 Click Modify 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog click Export NOTE The Export option is never enabled if the selected shared parameter is already in the current shared parameter file An informational message appears informing you th...

Page 498: ...t and select the shared parameter to add to the label 6 Click OK twice The selected parameter displays in the Category Parameters list 7 Select the shared parameter from the Category Parameters list and click Add parameters to label 8 Select an option for Filter Parameter at the bottom of the dialog With this option set a tag attaches only to a component with that same filter parameter NOTE If you...

Page 499: ...ponents into your project that have shared parameters 2 Click View tab Create panel Schedules drop down Schedule Quantities 3 In the New Schedule dialog select Multi Category from the Category list 4 In the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog you notice that shared parameters are available as schedulable fields Add the appropriate shared parameter to the scheduled fields list 5 Click the ...

Page 500: ...mber A value that is the length of an element or sub component Length A value that is the area of an element or sub component Area A value that is the volume of an element or sub component Volume A value that is the angle of an element or sub component Angle Can be used to create parameters that define slope Slope Can be used to create currency parameters in addition to the default Cost parameter ...

Page 501: ...block family so you can have custom parameters on the titleblock See Adding Custom Fields to a Title Block on page 1054 6 Under Parameter Data select Instance or Type to store the parameter by element instance or family type For more information on instance and type properties see Modifying Type Properties on page 121 7 For Group parameter under select the heading under which the parameter should ...

Page 502: ...certain point the pattern displays as a solid fill This is known as pattern overscaling See Zooming Project Views on page 243 You can place model and drafting patterns on planar and cylindrical surfaces and on families You can also place drafting patterns on cut component surfaces in plan or section views Revit Architecture includes several fill patterns and stores them in the default project temp...

Page 503: ...es affect spacing on the sheet for a model pattern these values affect spacing on the model 4 Click OK Fill Pattern Host Orientation Drafting fill patterns can have different orientations to their host layers Orientation affects how drafting patterns display when used as cut patterns in hosts walls floors roofs ceilings The following examples show the same fill pattern applied with the different o...

Page 504: ...n Host Orientation on page 461 for details 5 In the New Pattern dialog select Custom 6 Click Import 7 Select the desired pattern file PAT and click Open See Custom Pattern Files on page 466 for information on creating a custom pattern PAT file NOTE Default Revit Architecture fill patterns are stored in the revit pat and revit metric pat files in the Revit Architecture program group Data directory ...

Page 505: ...a fill pattern 1 Click Manage tab Project Settings panel Settings drop down Fill Patterns 2 In the Fill Patterns dialog select the pattern to modify and click Edit With a pattern name selected you can also select Custom and import a new pattern from a PAT file the imported custom pattern replaces the existing pattern using the same name 3 Follow the steps in Creating a Simple Fill Pattern on page ...

Page 506: ... toward another pattern line and press TAB to select a different reference point 3 Place the dimension Surface pattern lines used as references for a linear dimension Rotating a Model Pattern 1 Place the cursor on the model pattern and press TAB to highlight a shape handle The status bar indicates if you have selected a shape handle 2 Click to select the handle 3 Click Modify element tab Modify pa...

Page 507: ...e cursor on the element that has the model pattern Check the status bar to confirm that you have highlighted a shape handle If the desired pattern line is not highlighted move the cursor near the line and press TAB again until it highlights 4 Click to select the shape handle as the alignment reference Surface pattern aligning to a window Completed alignment of window to pattern line Working with M...

Page 508: ...n a text editor such as Notepad to begin creating the pattern file 2 On the first line enter the header in this format Concrete Paver 3 On the next line enter the type declaration TYPE MODEL The first value for a pattern descriptor is the angle at which the pen line is drawn For example a 0 angle indicates the line is horizontally straight 90 angle indicates the line is drawn vertically straight 4...

Page 509: ...down 3 3125 Pen up 8 The pattern is as shown Because you changed the origin the lines are drawn above the first set 6 Create the third pattern descriptor using the following values Angle 90 Origin 0 0 Shift 5 656 5 656 Pen down 3 3125 Pen up 8 The pattern is as shown Because of the 90 angle the lines are drawn vertically beginning to create a square pattern 7 Create the fourth pattern descriptor u...

Page 510: ...3125 0 8 8 3 3125 4 6875 The completed pattern For information on using a custom pattern file follow the procedure in Creating a Custom Fill Pattern on page 462 Materials Materials define the appearance of elements in the building model Revit Architecture provides many materials that you can use or you can create your own materials To search for materials to apply to model elements or to change ma...

Page 511: ...You can also apply materials to elements when defining their families Materials define the following The color that displays in a shaded project view The color and pattern that display on the surface of an element The color and fill pattern that display when the element is cut The render appearance that displays in a rendered image Information about the material s description manufacturer cost and...

Page 512: ...used by the render appearance See Best Practice for Storing Image Files on page 519 For information about how render appearances are stored see Render Appearance Library on page 491 Searching for a Material 1 Open the Materials dialog You can access the Materials dialog by clicking Manage tab Project Settings panel Materials or from several other points in the software 2 Optional To specify the ty...

Page 513: ...e door category and then specify a different material for a subcategory of the door such as glass for a door panel By family In the Family Editor when creating or modifying a component you can use family type parameters to apply a different material to each piece of geometry in the component By element parameter In a project you can select a model element in a view and use element properties to ap...

Page 514: ...Finishes locate the parameter for the object c Click in the Value column for the parameter d Click e In the Materials dialog select a material and click OK See Searching for a Material on page 470 f Click OK Applying a Material by Element Parameter 1 In a project open a view that displays the model element to which you want to apply a material 2 Select the model element 3 Click Modify element tab ...

Page 515: ... See Searching for a Material on page 470 2 Click the Graphics tab 3 To change how the material looks in shaded views such as 3D views and elevations under Shading do the following If you want to use the render appearance to represent the material in shaded views select Use Render Appearance for Shading Revit Architecture calculates an average color for the render appearance and uses it to represe...

Page 516: ...ist To change the color that is used to draw the cut pattern click the color swatch In the Color dialog select a color Click OK 6 Click Apply 7 To exit the Materials dialog click OK Aligning the Surface Pattern on a Model Element In a 2D view you can align a surface pattern on a model element For example you can use this technique to align the following ceiling tiles with a corner of a room masonr...

Page 517: ...73 If the surface pattern does not display in the view you may need to change the view s detail level to fine or zoom in on the model element 2 Place the cursor over a line of the surface pattern 3 Press TAB one or more times until the surface pattern line highlights 4 Click to select the surface pattern line 5 Move the selected surface pattern line as desired using one or more of the following te...

Page 518: ...e render ap pearance to the surface pattern of the material In the lower part of the Render Appearance tab change property values The properties vary depending on the type of render appearance See Render Appearance Properties on page 478 for further instructions NOTE The render appearance can affect the amount of time required to render an image See Render Performance and Ma terials on page 1235 c...

Page 519: ...the surface pattern 1 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog click Texture Alignment TIP If the Texture Alignment button is not active click the Graphics tab and specify a surface pattern for the material The Align Render Appearance to Surface Pattern dialog displays The preview area displays the texture specified for the render appearance overlaid with the surface pattern for the ma...

Page 520: ...age 1235 Ceramic Properties You can define the following properties for ceramic materials on the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog Description Property Type of material Ceramic or Porcelain Type Color of the render appearance for the material See Specifying a Render Appearance Color on page 485 TIP To specify a grout color use an image file that shows both the tile color and the grout ...

Page 521: ...rial when other types of rendering shaders do not provide the desired properties or controls Description Property Color of the render appearance for the material This color affects the diffuse reflection as well as the transmittance of light in the material See Specifying a Render Appearance Color on page 485 Color Measurement of the glossy quality of the surface or its roughness which affects bot...

Page 522: ...olness of the light emitted by the material described in terms of degrees Kelvin K This is useful for describing color values that are close to white Select a predefined value or select Custom to enter a value Color Temperature Kelvin Color transmitted through a transparent or semi transparent material such as glass See Specifying a Render Appearance Color on page 485 Filter Color Bump Bump patter...

Page 523: ... 486 Description Property Color of the glazing Transmittance refers to the light that passes through the glazing Select a predefined glazing color or select Custom to specify a color See Specifying a Render Appearance Color on page 485 Color Transmittance Percentage of light striking the glass that bounces off again like a reflection rather than being absorbed or passing through transmittance Ente...

Page 524: ...ght of the relief pattern Enter 0 to make the surface flat Enter a value up to 2 0 to increase the depth of the relief pattern Relief Pattern Height Relative size of the relief pattern Enter a value between 0 smaller and 5 larger or use the slider Relief Pattern Scale Shapes cut into the surface of the metal Select a shape or select Custom to define cut outs using a black and white image leaving h...

Page 525: ...fine its texture It affects the render appearance of the surface only Application for close up views The default value varies Select the desired value Roller Brush or Spray Plastic Vinyl Properties You can define the following properties for plastic or vinyl materials on the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog Description Property Type of material plastic solid plastic transparent or vin...

Page 526: ...r source Type Color of the water available when Type is not Swimming Pool Select a predefined water color or select Custom to specify a color Color Relative height of waves in the water Enter a value between 0 no waves and 5 big waves or use the slider Wave Height Wood Properties You can define the following properties for wood materials on the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog Descrip...

Page 527: ...he Glossiness property Specifying a Render Appearance Color To specify a color for a render appearance property use the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog See Changing the Render Appearance of a Material on page 475 You can specify either a single color or an image file that defines a custom color design or pattern Single color For the Color property select Single Color Click the color ...

Page 528: ... create a render appearance first find an existing material and render appearance that are as close as possible to the new material and render appearance For example the existing render appearance should have the same class as the new render appearance It should also have many properties that are the same as or similar to the new render appearance This strategy reduces the amount of work you must ...

Page 529: ... 1 Translucency 0 Luminance No self illumination Changing Material Identity Data 1 Open the Materials dialog and select the material to change Click Manage tab Project Settings panel Materials See Searching for a Material on page 470 2 Click the Identity tab 3 Edit the parameters as necessary See Material Identity Parameters on page 488 and Adding a Material Class on page 487 4 Click Apply 5 To ex...

Page 530: ... that may be useful when searching for the material and that are not used in the material description comments or other fields For ex Keywords ample you might include the keywords green and blue to ensure that turquoise is included in search results for blue paint or green paint Product Information Name of the manufacturer of the material Manufacturer Model number or code assigned to the material ...

Page 531: ...d This family parameter controls the hidden view display of structural elements If the Structural Material Type of an element is set to Concrete or Precast then it will display as hidden If it is set to Steel or Wood it will be visible when another element is in front of it If it is set to Unassigned the element will not display if hidden by another element Creating a Material To create a material...

Page 532: ...ge 488 8 To exit the Materials dialog click OK See Applying Materials to Elements on page 471 Renaming a Material 1 Click Manage tab Project Settings panel Materials 2 In the Materials dialog select the material to rename See Searching for a Material on page 470 3 At the bottom of the left pane of the Materials dialog click Rename Or you can right click a material in the list and click Rename 4 In...

Page 533: ...y the render appearance Related topics Changing the Render Appearance of a Material on page 475 Transferring Project Standards on page 446 Best Practice for Storing Image Files on page 519 How Materials Are Stored on page 470 Render Appearance Library Location on page 518 Searching for a Render Appearance You can specify render appearances for materials and entourage The following procedure assume...

Page 534: ...tional Type text in the search field See Entering Search Text on page 493 The Render Appearance Library displays matching render appearances sorted in order of relevance TIP To clear the search field click the X that displays at the end of the field after you enter text 4 If necessary use the scroll bar to locate the desired render appearance in the list 5 Click the render appearance to select it ...

Page 535: ... patterns and materials for different categories and subcategories of model objects annotation objects and imported objects in a project You can override project object styles on a view by view basis For more information see Visibility and Graphic Display in Project Views on page 198 Creating Object Style Subcategories 1 Click Manage tab Project Settings panel Settings drop down Object Styles 2 Cl...

Page 536: ...es When you install and run Revit Architecture several line styles are included Each predefined line style has a name that describes either the line for example Dash dot or where Revit Architecture uses the line style for example Sketch lines Revit Architecture stores the line styles in the default template When you are in the Family Editor you cannot create new line styles but you can modify line...

Page 537: ...nes you can specify line weights for modeling components in perspective views You may want to apply different line styles and line weights using the Linework tool For more information see Changing the Line Style of Elements on page 398 For annotation lines you can control the line weight of annotation objects such as section lines and dimension lines The weights of annotation symbols are not depen...

Page 538: ... Because dots are all drawn at 1 5 points they do not require an associated value 6 In the next row select space for Type Revit Architecture requires that you follow a dash or dot with a space 7 Click under Value and enter a value for the space 8 Repeat the procedure until the pattern is complete 9 Click OK In the Line Patterns dialog the new line pattern displays in the list of available patterns...

Page 539: ...lick OK To specify that halftones print as thin lines use Print Setup options See Print Setup on page 1081 Structural Settings For each project you can control the symbolic representation of structural framing components You can specify the symbolic cutback distance of beams and columns see Cutback on page 865 brace symbols in plan moment symbols and analytical model adjustment The values you spec...

Page 540: ...epresentation options 4 Under Brace Symbols select a value for Plan representation Plan Representation options Parallel Line Symbolic representation of braces in a plan view are displayed with a line parallel to and offset from the brace at the value specified in the Structural Settings dialog The line displays below or to the right to vertical brace centerline if the brace is below the level and ...

Page 541: ...icker Brace Show brace above 6 Under Brace Symbols select Show brace above if you want the brace symbols representing the braces above the current view to display Show brace above 7 For Symbol select the symbol that represents braces above the current view NOTE The brace above symbol changes automatically when you change the plan representation from parallel line to angle line Show brace below 8 U...

Page 542: ...cifying Arrowhead Styles 1 Click Manage tab Project Settings panel Settings drop down Arrowheads 2 In the Type Properties dialog select the arrowhead type you want to work with from the Type list 3 If desired click Rename to rename the type or click Duplicate to create a new arrowhead type 4 Specify the properties for the display of leader arrowheads See Leader Arrowhead Properties on page 1092 fo...

Page 543: ...s and any associated tags Depending on the project template some element categories may have default tags loaded 2 Click Load You can load multiple tags for element categories 3 Navigate to the location of the tag and open the tag You can select multiple tag files by holding either SHIFT or CTRL while selecting The tag name displays adjacent to the element category 4 When you are finished loading ...

Page 544: ...rmat dialog displays 4 Specify Units if necessary 5 For Rounding select an appropriate value If you select Custom enter a value in the Rounding increment text box 6 For Unit symbol select an appropriate option from the list 7 Optionally select Suppress trailing 0 s When selected trailing zeros do not display for example 123 400 displays as 123 4 Suppress 0 feet When selected does not display the 0...

Page 545: ... the midpoint of a wall a jump snap might display at the endpoint of the wall Jump snaps occur when you clear the check box for the Nearest object snap in the Snaps dialog Setting Snap Increments When you place an element or component in a project view it snaps to set dimension increments For example when you are sketching a wall and move the cursor from left to right in the drawing area you see t...

Page 546: ...d as a snap option After you make a pick snapping returns to the settings specified in the Snaps dialog To temporarily override snap settings 1 Choose the component or element you want to place For components or elements that require more than one pick for example a wall select the component and make the first pick 2 Do one of the following Type the shortcut key combination Right click click Snap ...

Page 547: ... Snapping Only Horizontal or Vertical snap When sketching a straight line Revit Architecture snaps the line to be perfectly horizontal or vertical when the cursor approaches horizontal or vertical Horizontal snap Vertical snap Snap Parallel to Existing Line Snaps a line parallel to existing geometry Snap Perpendicular to Existing Line Snaps a line perpendicular to existing geometry Snap Points 505...

Page 548: ...cture allows jump SN Nearest snaps to endpoints midpoints and centers A jump snap is a snap point that is more than 2 mm away from the cursor on the screen Snaps to a work plane grid SW Work Plane Grid Snaps to quadrant points For arcs jump snaps are enabled SQ Quadrants Snaps to intersections SI Intersections Snaps to the center of an arc SC Centers Snaps to perpendicular elements or components S...

Page 549: ...t you can create a view template that has the view properties you require for this type of plan view If you create other plan views that require the same properties as the furniture plan you can apply the same view template Standardize the look of your project views before you print or export a view or a project To do this you define a default view template that you can then apply to multiple view...

Page 550: ...create a view template from a project view 1 In the Project Browser select the view from which you want to create the view template 2 Click View tab Graphics panel View Templates drop down Create template from current view or right click and select Create View Template From View 3 In the New View Template dialog enter a name for the template and click OK The View Templates dialog displays 4 Modify...

Page 551: ...information on applying the default view template for all views on a sheet see Applying a View Template to All Views on a Sheet on page 509 Applying a View Template 1 In the Project Browser select the view or views you want to apply a view template to NOTE Use the CTRL key to select multiple views in the Project Browser 2 Click View tab Graphics panel View Templates drop down Apply new template to...

Page 552: ... you select Custom you can edit the Scale Value property View Scale A ratio derived from the view scale For example if the view scale is 1 100 the scale value is the ratio of 100 1 or 100 You can edit this value when you select Custom for the View Scale property Scale Value 1 Hides the model in detail view The Normal setting displays all elements normally It is intended for all non detail views Th...

Page 553: ...w depth are drawn using the Beyond line style The level at which the plan is cut is determined by the Cut plane offset from the current level value Applicable only to plan and RCP views For more details see View Range Properties on page 250 Orients the project to project north or true north For more information see Rotat ing a View to True North on page 449 Orientation Applies the phase properties...

Page 554: ...and the display of structural components see Detail Levels and Display of Structural Components on page 244 Setting Detail Level Scale Values 1 Click Manage tab Project Settings panel Settings drop down Detail Level 2 Click to move scale values to the right or click to move detail levels to the left You cannot select scales individually they move in sequential order only 3 To return to the origina...

Page 555: ...mines the visibility of elements at different levels of detail For example you might create a door with certain embellishments You then may decide that the embellishments should only appear at a certain detail level You control the detail level in a project view with the Detail Level option on the View Control Bar You can set the visibility and detail level of any 2D and 3D geometry in the family ...

Page 556: ...nd void geometry tools blends sweeps swept blends revolves and extrusions This lets you create one family type with optionally visible geometry on it For example you might create a door and have a coat hook or kick plate on that door be optional Note that the family geometry still exists in the project it is just invisible For example it may still be involved when you join geometry in the project ...

Page 557: ...dels Not Applicable Roofs Yes Site Yes Structural Columns Yes Structural Foundations Yes Structural Framing No Topography Not Applicable Walls Yes Windows Non Cuttable Families The following families are not cuttable and are always shown in projection in views Balusters Detail Items Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixtures Entourage Furniture Furniture Systems Lighting Fixtures Mechanical Equipmen...

Page 558: ...n specify options at all times including when the drawing area is blank Setting Options 1 Click Options 2 Specify general graphics file location rendering spelling SteeringWheels and ViewCube options 3 Click OK General Options Click the General tab of the Options dialog to set notifications user names and journal file cleanup Notifications Specify a time value for the Save Reminder interval Specif...

Page 559: ...Mode Use hardware acceleration Some of the benefits of using hardware acceleration are Faster display of large models upon refresh Switching between windows of views occurs faster with 3D graphics acceleration Creation and modification of annotations is faster Colors Select Invert background color to change the display of the background of the view and the elements in the view For example if you a...

Page 560: ...earances and decals and to specify the location of the ArchVision Content Manager ACM if needed Render Appearance Library Location If you move the Render Appearance Library from its default location use the Rendering tab of the Options dialog to specify its new location The Render Appearance Library is a read only library that stores all render appearances for materials the default RPC content pro...

Page 561: ...Location If your organization has licensed additional RPC content from ArchVision specify the location of the ArchVision Content Manager ACM on the Rendering tab of the Options dialog This RPC content is licensed separately from the RPC content that is provided with Revit Architecture You may also need to download and install the ACM See Using the ArchVision Content Manager on page 1212 Complete t...

Page 562: ...n Option Steering Wheel Visibility Show or hide tool messages Show Tool Messages Tool messages always display for Basic Wheels View Object Wheel and Tour Building Wheel regardless of this setting Show or hide tooltips Show Tooltips Tooltips always display for Basic Wheels View Object Wheel and Tour Building Wheel regardless of this setting Shows or hides the cursor text when the tool is active Cur...

Page 563: ...alk Tool on page 239 As you use the Walk tool to walk or fly through a model you can control the movement speed The speed of move Speed Factor ment is controlled by the distance that the cursor is moved from the Center Circle icon Set the movement speed here See Walk Tool on page 239 Zoom Tool Allows you to zoom the view with a single click See Zoom Tool on page 240 Zoom in one increment with each...

Page 564: ...n animated action when you switch view orientation Use animated transition when switching views Keeps the sides of the ViewCube and the view perpendicular to the ground plane If you deselect this option you can orbit the model in full 360 degree motion which may be useful when you are editing a family Keep scene upright See Orbit Tool on page 234 Compass Shows or hides the ViewCube compass Show th...

Page 565: ...ck For example in the following command line AL launches the Align tool Modify tab Edit panel Align AL ribbon Modify Edit Align Function key F2 F12 command syntax does not require the shortcut key in quotes For example in the following command line the shortcut key F6 has no quotes In this example F6 launches the Align tool Modify tab Edit panel Align F6 ribbon Modify Edit Align 2 Insert a new lin...

Page 566: ...nents or moving or pasting elements TAB Reverse the order in which TAB cycles through different snaps Pressing SHIFT TAB once suppresses all snap points SHIFT TAB File Management Action Key Open a project CTRL O Print a page CTRL P Save a project CTRL S Editing Action Key Make a copy of the element Press and hold down CTRL while dragging an ele ment Copy a selected element CTRL C Paste an element ...

Page 567: ...ovement of a wall or line Press and hold SHIFT Screen Refresh Action Key Refresh the screen F5 Colors You set colors for many elements in Revit Architecture such as objects lines annotation symbols materials rooms and phasing When you select colors the standard Windows color dialog opens If you click PANTONE from the Windows color picker the PANTONE color dialog opens You can specify No Color in t...

Page 568: ...ares or by choosing a PANTONE color When you have finished mixing the color click Add Custom 3 When you have specified the desired color click OK Using the PANTONE Color Picker 1 From the appropriate Revit Architecture dialog access the Windows Color dialog For example in the Materials dialog on the Graphics tab or the Render Appearance tab click a color swatch See Materials on page 468 2 In the C...

Page 569: ...nment to directly manipulate a design s points edges and surfaces into buildable forms The designs created in the conceptual design environment are massing families that can be used in the Revit project environment as the basis from which you create more detailed architecture by applying walls roofs floors and curtain systems You can also use the project environment to schedule floor areas and to ...

Page 570: ... through the In Place Mass tool the conceptual design environment does not have 3D reference planes and 3D levels NOTE The Revit conceptual design environment creates new masses Masses created using a previous release of Revit Architecture use the same massing tools originally used to create them and remain dedicated to these tools throughout the duration of the project Exploring Conceptual Design...

Page 571: ...at have the intelligence to adapt to a divided surface See Rationalizing Surfaces on page 569 The following table shows a parametric component that is added to a divided surface Divided surface with paramet ric component Parametric compon ent Conceptual Design Environment Interface The tools for developing conceptual designs are all accessed from the ribbon which changes depending on what is requi...

Page 572: ...tual design environment when forms or lines are selected the Options Bar displays useful options The Options Bar displays options for selecting the work plane See 3D Work Planes on page 536 making a surface from the lines See Surface Forms on page 556 enabling 3D snapping See 3D Snapping on page 533 creating a chain of lines setting the offset value setting the radius Switching between Conceptual ...

Page 573: ... version and its parameter values 2 Analyze the mass See Analyzing a Conceptual Design on page 594 If necessary return to the conceptual design environment and make adjustments to the mass as explained in the following procedure See Conceptual Design Environment Overview on page 528 Editing Loadable Massing Families Use the following procedure to edit a massing family that has been loaded into the...

Page 574: ...as been moved to the conceptual design environment from a project See Conceptual Design Environment Overview on page 528 1 Open a project file 2 Click Massing Site tab Conceptual Mass panel Show Mass 3 Select the mass NOTE 2D shape handles are available to modify the mass 4 Click Modify Mass tab Model panel Edit In Place The conceptual design environment opens NOTE 3D controls are available to mod...

Page 575: ...nt 1 Click Create tab Draw panel Line NOTE If you want to draw a reference based form click Create tab Draw panel Reference before selecting a drawing tool See Unconstrained and Referenced Based Forms on page 554 Several options become available on the Options Bar You can set the placement plane create a surface by drawing closed profiles draw a chain of lines and set an offset or radius value See...

Page 576: ...m Drawing on a Planar Surface You can draw on a planar surface to create unconstrained or reference based forms See Unconstrained and Referenced Based Forms on page 554 1 Click Create tab Draw panel Line 2 Click Create tab Draw panel Face to indicate that you want to draw on a surface 3 Click on a surface and draw the lines 4 Click Create tab Selection panel Modify Related topics Creating Solid Fo...

Page 577: ...parameters and adding new ones Sets the 3D views for the View Specific Display and sets the Detail Levels to Coarse Medium or Fine Visibility Graphics Overrides Dimensions The actual line length Length Identity Data Sets the line subcategory to Form projec tion or Void Subcategory Changes the unconstrained reference line to a reference line Displays the Associate Is Reference Line Family Parameter...

Page 578: ... set an active work plane and to display or hide the work plane See Setting the Work Plane on page 317 When the work plane is not automatically detected use the Options Bar to explicitly set a work plane To set and show a work plane 1 Click Create tab Work Plane panel Set 2 Move the cursor over the drawing area to highlight available work planes 3 Click to select the work plane when it highlights ...

Page 579: ...change the height between levels drag it a level the desired height or explicitly set the height by typing in a new height value When you move a middle level the top and bottom levels remain in place and the heights of the other levels adjust between them 1 Click a 3D level The level highlights and displays the dimension length value 2 Click the value 3 Enter a new dimension in the text box The 3D...

Page 580: ...ys 2 Click 3D View on the Quick Access toolbar The 3D view displays 3D Level Graphics You can set the 3D levels to display a level head symbol by setting parameters through the Type Properties dialog See Level Properties on page 1104 To display a level head symbol 1 Select a level 2 Click Modify Levels Element panel Element Properties drop down Type Properties 3 Select Symbol at End 1 Default 4 Se...

Page 581: ...vel and click Modify Levels tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Instance Properties Description Name Constraints Sets the elevation for the level Elevation Identity Data Sets the level name Name 3D Reference Planes Reference planes are displayed in the conceptual design environment in the 3D view These reference planes can be edited as 3D elements For example you can pin the 3D referenc...

Page 582: ...nts Unlike driving points and hosted points free points are reference points that are placed on a work plane Free points display 3D controls when selected are moveable anywhere within the 3D work space and maintain their reference to the plane on which it was placed To place points on a work plane 1 Open a 3D view to work in if you are drawing in the Z axis otherwise open a floor plan view 2 If yo...

Page 583: ... surface They are smaller than driving points and each one provides its own work plane for adding further geometry perpendicular to its host The hosted point will move with and can move along the host element Hosted points are placed along any of the following elements Model lines and reference lines such as lines arcs ellipses and splines Bezier and Hermite Form element edges and surfaces includi...

Page 584: ...ted point can be repositioned along the spline if needed Placing Hosted Points along an Edge or Surface Surfaces and edges of forms can be used as an alternative work plane for placing hosted points 1 Open a 3D view to work in if you are drawing in the Z axis otherwise open a floor plan view 2 Click Create tab Datum panel Reference Point 3 Click Place Reference Point tab Placement panel Place on a...

Page 585: ...wing tools which allow you to freehand splines into the design If a more coordinate driven model is required plotting splines from points may be preferable because it provides the parametric relationships required to build forms Creating a Line from Reference Points 1 Select Create tab Selection panel Modify 2 Select 2 points These points can be free hosted or driving 3 Click Modify Reference Poin...

Page 586: ...splines reference planes edges and surfaces 1 Select the point to be rehosted 2 Click Modify Reference Points tab Rehost Point panel Rehost Point 3 Select Modify Reference Points tab Placement panel Place on Face or Place on Work Plane If you are rehosting to a work plane select a work plane from the Placement Plane list 4 Click to specify the location on a new host in the drawing area Rehosting H...

Page 587: ...t will adjust accordingly If the new host is a spline the driving point will become a hosted point along that spline The spline that originally hosted the point will remain modifiable and adjust to the new host position When rehosting to a different plane the point remains driving and it only changes position and work plane orientation Reference Points 545 ...

Page 588: ...ence Planes Click Edit to display the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog for the reference point Visibility Graphics Overrides See Visibility and Graphic Display in Project Views on page 198 For hosted and driving reference points specifies whether only the reference plane Show Normal Reference Plane Only perpendicular to the geometry of the host will be visible When selected the reference point...

Page 589: ...he point The name will appear in a tooltip when the point is highlighted by the cursor Name X Ray Mode X Ray mode displays the underlying geometric skeleton of a selected form In this mode surfaces become transparent allowing you to more directly interact with the individual elements that comprise the form This mode is useful when you need to understand how a form is constructed or when you need t...

Page 590: ... The closed loops you drew to define the shape of extrusions lofts revolves and sweeps Explicit paths The line you drew to define a sweep Implicit paths The line that the system creates to construct extrusions and lofts Axis The line you created to define the rotation of a revolve Control node The points that the system creates on the path that hosts individual profiles 548 Chapter 11 Conceptual D...

Page 591: ...lete profiles edges and vertices in X Ray mode Profiles A profile is a single line chain of connected lines or closed loop that can be used to generate a form Profiles can be manipulated to change the geometry of a form Profiles can be added to the following forms types extrusions lofts sweeps See Adding a Profile to a Form on page 562 Related topics Locked Profiles on page 550 Locking and Unlocki...

Page 592: ... that locks to the selected bottom square profile Resulting locked form Unconstrained form Click Modify Form tab Modify Form Element panel Lock Profiles to make the form type unconstrained See Unconstrained and Referenced Based Forms on page 554 With unconstrained profiles the profile edge or vertex can be manipulated Resulting uncon strained form Lower right vertex modified Initial unconstrained ...

Page 593: ...s Forms are always created by drawing lines selecting them and clicking Create Form Use this tool to develop any surface 3D solid or void form and then directly manipulate it using the 3D form manipulation controls Line types that can be used to make a form include the following Lines Reference lines Line by points Imported lines Edges of other form Lines or edges from loaded families Solid and Vo...

Page 594: ...from the middle of the solid form to a surface and cutting the surface geometry Related topics Profiles on page 549 X Ray Mode on page 547 Creating Solid Forms 1 Click Create tab Draw panel and select one of the drawing tools See Drawing Overview on page 533 2 Click in the drawing area and draw a closed loop 3 Click Modify 4 Select the lines The Create Form tool becomes available 552 Chapter 11 Co...

Page 595: ...ern based family template Curtain Panel Pattern Based rft and through the In Place Mass tool in a project See Creating an In Place Mass on page 591 The access to the Create Form tool varies depending on whether the conceptual design environment is accessed through the family mass template RFT or a project file RVT To access Create Form from a mass family template RFT 1 Click Create tab Draw panel ...

Page 596: ...reate Tab Draw panel Reference Created using any line in the Draw panel Click Create tab Draw panel Line Dependent on its references When its de pendent reference changes the reference based form changes Not dependent on other objects Profiles are locked by default for extrusions and sweeps Profiles are unlocked by default Edited by directly editing the reference element For example select a refer...

Page 597: ... press Tab to highlight all the form s elements and then click to select the entire form Pressing Tab repeatedly cycles through the selectable elements and you can click to select the desired one when it highlights The following graphics display what can be selected on a form Selected Form Element Form Element Edge Surface Vertex Entire form Related topics Manipulating Forms on page 566 Manipulati...

Page 598: ...Click Create tab Draw panel Line 3 Draw a line on the work plane 4 Select another work plane 5 Draw a line on this work plane 6 Select the lines 7 Click Create Form To create a surface using the Options Bar 1 Click Create tab Draw panel Line 2 On the Options Bar select Make surface from closed loops 3 Optional On the Options Bar select Chain to create a chain of lines 4 Draw a closed profile The s...

Page 599: ...d topics Creating Solid Forms on page 552 Creating Void Forms on page 553 Revolves In the conceptual design environment a revolve is created from a line and a 2D shape that are drawn on the same work plane The line defines the axis around which the shape is revolved to create a 3D form NOTE In Step 2 you can create a surface revolve using lines that do not form a closed loop 1 Draw a line on a wor...

Page 600: ...e consists of linework drawn perpendicular to the line or series of lines that define the path You create a sweep by selecting the profile and the path and then clicking Create Form Multi segmented paths can be used to create a sweep if the profile is formed from closed loops If the profile is not closed it does not sweep along a multi segment path If the path is a single line segment use an open ...

Page 601: ...Select the reference point The work plane displays 5 Draw a closed profile on the work plane 6 Select the line and profiles 7 Click Multi Select tab Form panel Create Form See Accessing Create Form Tool on page 553 Related topics Creating Solid Forms on page 552 Creating Void Forms on page 553 Form Types 559 ...

Page 602: ... Draw a closed profile on the third reference plane 6 Select all 3 profiles 7 Click Create Form See Accessing Create Form Tool on page 553 Related topics Creating Solid Forms on page 552 Creating Void Forms on page 553 Modifying Forms Forms can be modified directly by using the 3D control arrows and by adding and deleting edges and profiles When a form is selected in the conceptual design environm...

Page 603: ...a X Ray form making it easier to select form elements See X Ray Mode on page 547 Adds edges to a form See Adding an Edge to a Form on page 562 Add Edge Adds profiles to a form See Adding a Profile to a Form on page 562 Add Profile Changes a solid form to a void Convert to Solid Changes a void form to a solid Convert to Void Keeps the form locked to the top and bottom pro Lock Profiles files See Pr...

Page 604: ...9 Adding an Edge to a Form 1 Select a form 2 Click Modify Form tab Modify Form panel Add Edge 3 Move the cursor over the form to display a preview image of the edge and click to add the edge The edge displays on the form 4 Select the edge The 3D controls become available 5 Click a 3D control arrow to manipulate the edge The form geometry changes Adding a Profile to a Form 1 Select a form TIP Using...

Page 605: ...y Form tab Modify Form Element panel Rehost Form 3 Select a host from the Placement Plane list on the Options Bar The host highlights in the drawing area and the cursor is a purple circle shape 4 Click to rehost the form to the work plane you selected Related topic 3D Work Planes on page 536 Dimensioning Forms The dimensions for a form can be set in a number of ways Use 3D direct manipulation cont...

Page 606: ...s half of the value of parameter A If the value of B changes to 8 the value of A changes to 16 You can see the parameter values change in the drawing area when you directly manipulate these lines The formulas assigned to a parameter display in the Label drop down list on the Options Bar These can be selected and applied to the labeled dimensions When applied to a dimension the formula displays as ...

Page 607: ...nstrained and the dimension value is preserved NOTE Locked dimensions and their associated parameters cannot be changed in the drawing area Use the Lock column in the Family Types dialog to change them When a loose labeled dimension is unlocked all of the referenced geometry unlocks and is unconstrained To lock a loose labeled dimension from the Family Types dialog 1 On the Family Properties panel...

Page 608: ...e form to a solid or a void Solid Void Manipulating Forms Every reference point surface edge vertex or point in an unconstrained form has a 3D control that displays when it is selected Use this control to directly manipulate a form by dragging it along the axes or planes defined by the local or global coordinate systems 3D controls let you switch between local and global coordinates directly manip...

Page 609: ...d by dragging the control arrows to change its shape Second Manipulated Sweep First Manipulated Sweep Original Sweep When forms are defined by the local coordinate system the 3D form controls display in orange color Only the coordinates that change to the local coordinate system display in orange color For example if you rotate a cube by 15 degrees the X and Y arrows display in orange but the Z ar...

Page 610: ...ee Joining Geometry on page 406 To manipulate joined forms 1 Click a joined surface edge or vertex The 3D control arrows display 2 Drag a 3D control arrow in any direction The joined form remains as one unit Related topics Manipulating Forms on page 566 Selecting Forms on page 555 568 Chapter 11 Conceptual Design Environment ...

Page 611: ...urface 1 Select the surface 2 Click Modify Form tab Divide panel Divide Surface 3 Adjust the spacing of the divided surface on the Options Bar See Modifying the Spacing of UV Grids on Divided Surfaces on page 571 NOTE When dividing the surface remember that applied patterns have footprint requirements that may affect how many divisions a surface needs in the conceptual design See Patterning Surfac...

Page 612: ...arily planar the UVW coordinate system is used to plot location This maps a grid adjusting for the contours of a non planar surface or form UV grids as used in the conceptual design environment are comparable to XY grids The default division of the surface is by number 12x12 for imperial units and 10x10 for metric units Enabling and Disabling UV Grids The UV grids are independent of one another an...

Page 613: ...UV Grids with the Face Manager on page 571 Spacing grids by a defined distance Select Distance and enter the distance between grids along the divided surface The Distance drop down list also allows for a minimum or maximum distance rather than an absolute distance NOTE Spacing can also be set in the Instance Properties dialog or the Face Manager See Pattern Element Instance Properties on page 585 ...

Page 614: ...y seen on the Options Bar See Modifying the Spacing of UV Grids on Divided Surfaces on page 571 To change these click on them and type new parameters Rotating UV Grids You can rotate the direction of each or both UV grids Rotation angle controls are located at the ends of their respective belts Changing the values of these parameters will rotate the grids To change the rotation of a grid click on ...

Page 615: ...tween grids is measured The distance is measured by chords not curve lengths You can move the belts along their respective grids to adjust where the distance is measured Click and drag the belt handles to reposition them NOTE Clicking a belt handle will slightly nudge the belt position in the respective direction of the handle The following image shows repositioning of one belt along the U grid Ad...

Page 616: ...s top and bottom resulting in the following 9 possible locations for grid justification Top Right Top Center Top Left Right Center Center Left Center Bottom Right Bottom Center Bottom Left The Grid Justification tool will snap to any of these locations on a surface In the following illustration notice how the positioning of the Grid Justification tool adjusts the location of the UV grids 574 Chapt...

Page 617: ...ided surface Applied Octagon Pattern Divided Surface Patterns are family based and can be graphically previewed in the Type Selector before being applied To pattern a surface 1 Select a divided surface 2 Click Modify Divided Surface tab Element panel Type Selector drop down and select the desired pattern shape Note that the divided surface is hidden when a pattern is applied To display it again cl...

Page 618: ...s and patterns for component design See Pattern Component Families on page 578 The patterns available are as follows Pattern layout Required number of surface cells Pattern name Pattern is removed from the divided surface 0 No Pattern 2 1 x 2 1 2 Step 3 1 x 3 1 3 Step 12 3 x 4 Arrows 6 2 x 3 Hexagon 9 3 x 3 Octagon 9 3 x 3 Octagon Rotate 576 Chapter 11 Conceptual Design Environment ...

Page 619: ...x 2 Rhomboid 4 2 x 2 Rhomboid Checker board 2 1 x 2 Triangle 2 1 x 2 Triangle Checkerboard 2 1 x 2 Triangle Step 2 1 x 2 Zig Zag Editing the Patterned Surface Modify the patterned surface by changing patterns adjusting properties with the Face Manager and changing its border tiling Editing the Patterned Surface 577 ...

Page 620: ...ce Properties 3 In the Instance Properties dialog under Constraints select Empty Partial or Overhanging 4 Click OK When components are later applied to a surface the border components inherit the condition of the border tile set when the surface was patterned Pattern Component Families You can use the Curtain Panel by Pattern family template Curtain Panel Pattern Based rft to create flexible param...

Page 621: ...ponent Families You create pattern component families from a provided family template file The family can then be saved and edited as needed 1 Click New Family 2 In the New Family dialog navigate to the family templates directory 3 Select Curtain Panel Pattern Based rft and click Open 4 Click Save As 5 In the Save As dialog navigate to the directory where you want to save your pattern component fa...

Page 622: ...erboard patterns While they are designed similarly they are configured differently when applied to the conceptual design mass 4 Click Save You can now design the pattern component family See Drawing Component Families on page 580 Drawing Component Families Designing the pattern component is very similar to sketching the conceptual design mass You use the same modeling tools that are used to design...

Page 623: ...hat will seamlessly interlock Work with multiple windows to facilitate your pattern component family design workflow To design a pattern component 1 Open the pattern component family 2 Open the conceptual design mass 3D view floor plan view or both 3 Click View tab Windows panel Tile Designing in this manner allows you to work in the pattern component family and see how it displays in your concept...

Page 624: ...tern component family The component is applied to the patterned surface NOTE The pattern component may take a few moments to load Modifying the Pattern Component Family Pattern component families can be edited using the following tools Change pattern component layout by adjusting the patterned surface See Editing the Patterned Surface on page 577 582 Chapter 11 Conceptual Design Environment ...

Page 625: ... Each surface element has a subset of display properties for Surface Representation To access these properties click Modify Divided Surface tab Surface Representation panel The Surface Representation dialog opens with tabs for Surface Pattern and Component Each tab has check boxes for surface element specific items Clicking a check box shows the change in the drawing area Click OK to confirm any c...

Page 626: ...t type properties click Edit Type Type properties affect all instances individual elements of that family in the project and any future instances that you place in the project Edit type parameters and click OK 5 Click OK Pattern Element Type Properties Description Name Construction The type of construction for the compon ent Construction Type Material and Finishes Texture of the finished surface o...

Page 627: ...lass Construction Classification System that best categorizes the family type OmniClass Number The name from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System that best categorizes the family type OmniClass Title Pattern Element Instance Properties Description Name Constraints Determines how a pattern intersects a sur face border empty partial or over Border Tile hanging See Editing the...

Page 628: ... fixed distance of divisions of the V grid See Adjusting UV Grids with the Face Manager on page 571 Distance The position from which the V grid is measured Beginning Center or End See Justification Adjusting UV Grids with the Face Manager on page 571 The rotation of the V grid See Adjusting UV Grids with the Face Manager on page 571 Grid Rotation Pattern Application The number of U grid divisions ...

Page 629: ...erence for level hosted forms and points 3D levels display in the conceptual design environment as the cursor moves over them in the drawing area These can be set as work planes 3D reference plane A 3D plane used to draw lines that create a form 3D reference planes display in the conceptual design environment These can be set as work planes 3D work plane A planar surface on which to draw lines for...

Page 630: ...n of end connected curves which are used singly or in combination to construct form element geometry using the supported geometry construction techniques extrude loft sweep revolve and surface 588 Chapter 11 Conceptual Design Environment ...

Page 631: ...e following image shows a sample massing study Typical Uses of Massing Studies Create in place or family based mass instances that are specific to individual options worksets and phases Create mass families that represent the forms associated with often used building volumes Vary materials forms and relations between masses that represent major components of a building or development using design ...

Page 632: ... of each mass family or in place mass Mass Form A study of one or more building forms made from one or more mass instances Massing Study A surface on a mass instance that can be used to create a building element such as a wall or roof Mass Face A horizontal slice through a mass at a defined level Mass floors provide geometric information about the dimensions of the mass above the slice up to the n...

Page 633: ...try in Mass or Generic Model Families on page 626 Creating an In Place Mass 1 Click Massing Site tab Conceptual Mass panel In Place Mass In order to create a mass Show Mass mode must be activated If Show Mass mode is not activated when you click In Place Mass Revit Architecture activates it for you 2 Enter a name for the in place mass family and click OK 3 Create the desired shapes using the tools...

Page 634: ...ass floors Gross Volume Gross Surface Area and Gross Floor Area are all parameters that can be scheduled Placing a Mass Instance from a Mass Family 1 Click Insert tab Load from Library panel Load Family 2 Navigate to the mass family file and click Open 3 Click Massing Site tab Conceptual Mass panel Place Mass 4 In the Type Selector select the desired mass type 5 Click in the drawing area to place ...

Page 635: ...r The perimeter of a mass floor however includes the entire perimeter even when it overlaps the perimeter of a mass floor in an adjacent joined mass Mass Instances in Design Options Phases and Worksets You can assign mass instances to any workset range of phases and design options Consider the following limitations If you want to join geometry of 2 masses and then vary the relationships in differe...

Page 636: ...ulates the floor area exterior surface area volume and perimeter This information is stored in the instance properties for mass floors You can include these values in schedules and tags Mass Floors Overview In Revit Architecture you use mass floors to divide a mass You can create a mass floor at each level defined in the project Mass floors display graphically as a slice through the mass at a defi...

Page 637: ...r any level that coincides with a top face of the mass For example suppose you create a mass that starts at level 1 and ends at level 4 In the Mass Floors dialog you select levels 1 2 3 and 4 As a result Revit Architecture creates mass floors at levels 1 2 and 3 The software does not create a mass floor at level 4 because level 4 coincides with the top of the mass It does not have exterior surface...

Page 638: ...s an alternative you can examine the Gross Surface Area and Gross Volume parameters for the mass NOTE The Gross Surface Area includes the bottom surface of a mass However the combined exterior surface areas of mass floors include the sides and top of the mass but not its bottom surface Creating Mass Floors 1 If you have not already done so add levels to the project Mass floors are based on levels ...

Page 639: ...g Mass Floors on page 599 Create building floors from mass floors See Creating Floors Using the Floor by Face Tool on page 618 Selecting Mass Floors After creating mass floors you can select each mass floor individually When you move the cursor over a mass floor the tooltip and status bar display the following Mass Floor Mass Floor for mass name level If the status bar displays the name of the mas...

Page 640: ...3 In the Schedule Properties dialog do the following a On the Fields tab select the desired fields See Selecting Fields for a Schedule on page 176 b Use other tabs to specify filtering sorting and formatting of the schedule See Specifying Schedule Properties on page 176 c Click OK The schedule displays in the drawing area If you included the Usage field in the schedule you can assign a usage to ea...

Page 641: ... They provide information about the usage and square units per mass floor To display other parameter values in a mass floor tag create your own or use the example provided in the Training folder Mass Floor Tag Complex rfa or M_Mass Floor Tag Complex rfa If you use the default installation location for tutorial content these files reside in the following location C Documents and Settings All Users ...

Page 642: ...n a usage to a mass floor using any of the following methods Schedule Include the Usage field in a mass floor schedule Then assign usages within the schedule Open the schedule click the Usage column for a row and enter text If you have already entered usage values for other mass floors you can click in the field and select a value from a list See Creating a Mass Floor Schedule on page 597 Tag To t...

Page 643: ... want to analyze the most cost effective or profitable mix of uses for each floor of the building To perform this analysis you must do the following Assign a usage to each mass floor Calculate the area of each mass floor Calculate the percentage of floor space devoted to each usage Use this information to determine the best mix of uses for the design Examples of Conceptual Design Analysis 601 ...

Page 644: ... Create mass floors See Creating Mass Floors on page 596 2 Click View tab Create panel Schedules drop down Schedule Quantities 3 In the New Schedule dialog do the following a For Category click Mass Floor If Mass Floor does not display by default select Show categories from all disciplines b For Name specify the schedule name c Select Schedule building components d Click OK 4 On the Fields tab of ...

Page 645: ...d to select values from a list Next sort and subtotal the schedule by usage as follows 6 Open the view properties for the schedule Right click in the drawing area for the schedule and click View Properties 7 For Sorting Grouping click Edit 8 On the Sorting Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog do the following a For Sort by select the following Usage Ascending Footer Title count and total...

Page 646: ...nment select Center 10 Click OK twice The schedule updates to sort and subtotal the rows accordingly It shows the percentage of floor area planned for each usage as well as square units Analysis Example for Exterior Surface Area In a sample scenario you have designed masses to explore a conceptual design for a building See Examples of Conceptual Design Analysis on page 600 You want to determine ex...

Page 647: ...tab Create panel Schedules drop down Schedule Quantities 3 In the New Schedule dialog do the following a For Category click Mass Floor If Mass Floor does not display by default select Show categories from all disciplines b For Name specify the schedule name c Select Schedule building components d Click OK 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog do the following a For Scheduled fields...

Page 648: ...dule Properties dialog do the following a For Sort by select the following Comments Ascending Footer Title count and totals Blank line b For Then by select both Usage and Ascending c At the bottom of the dialog select the following Grand totals Title and totals Itemize every instance 9 Click the Formatting tab and do the following a Under Fields select Exterior Surface Area b For Alignment select ...

Page 649: ...the Top of a Mass on page 595 Also where the masses are joined the inner surfaces between masses are deducted from the exterior surface area See Overlapping Mass Faces on page 593 Perimeter Analysis Example In a sample scenario you have designed masses to explore a conceptual design for a building See Examples of Conceptual Design Analysis on page 600 The design contains many angles and it may be ...

Page 650: ...Floor does not display by default select Show categories from all disciplines b For Name specify the schedule name c Select Schedule building components d Click OK 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog for Scheduled fields in order add the following fields Mass Type Level Floor Perimeter 5 Click the Sorting Grouping tab and do the following a For Sort by select the following Mass T...

Page 651: ...ss floor even when the mass floors in adjacent joined masses overlap See Overlapping Mass Faces on page 593 Volume Analysis Example In a sample scenario you have designed masses to explore a conceptual design for a building See Examples of Conceptual Design Analysis on page 600 You want to do the following Determine which floors of the building require air conditioning For example parking levels a...

Page 652: ...edule dialog do the following a For Category click Mass Floor If Mass Floor does not display by default select Show categories from all disciplines b For Name specify the schedule name c Select Schedule building components d Click OK 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog for Scheduled fields in order add the following fields Usage Level Mass Type Floor Volume 5 Click OK twice 6 In ...

Page 653: ...rand totals Title and totals Itemize every instance 10 Click the Formatting tab and do the following a Under Fields select Floor Volume b For Alignment select Right c Select Calculate totals d Optional Specify formatting for Usage Level and Mass Type under Fields select a field name Then for Alignment select Center 11 Click OK twice The schedule shows the volume of each mass floor volume subtotals...

Page 654: ...xterior Surface Area floor the Exterior Surface Area includes the area of the horizontal surface roof above it See Mass Floors at the Top of a Mass on page 595 This value is read only The combined exterior surface area of all mass floors in a mass includes the top and sides of the mass However it does not include the bottom of the mass When you join masses the area of the inner wall shared by the ...

Page 655: ...rs and Conceptual Design Analysis When using mass floors to analyze a conceptual design you may encounter the following issues Cannot See the Mass in a View Symptom You opened a view but you cannot see the mass Issue The Show Mass tool is not active or the view is zoomed in too close to the mass Solution Try the following Click Massing Site tab Conceptual Mass panel Show Mass Type ZF to Zoom to Fi...

Page 656: ...large as you expect it to be Issue The mass is joined to another mass The area of the inner wall shared by the masses is deducted from the exterior surface area for each mass floor It is also deducted from the gross surface area for the mass See Overlapping Mass Faces on page 593 Solution None required Gross Floor Area Is Not Available for a Mass Floor Schedule Symptom You want to create a mass fl...

Page 657: ...lymeshes For more information about Revit Architecture import capabilities see Importing Massing Studies from Other Applications on page 626 and Suitability of Imported Geometry on page 1387 TIP You can import AutoCAD Architecture mass elements into Revit Architecture after they are exploded in AutoCAD Architecture As Revit Architecture import symbols they are polymesh objects Optionally you can c...

Page 658: ...vertical face Cursor highlighting non vertical face 5 Click to place the wall TIP To create a non rectangular wall on a vertical cylindrical face use openings and in place cuts to adjust its profile 616 Chapter 12 Massing Studies ...

Page 659: ... from Mass Floors To create floors from a mass instance use the Floor by Face tool or the Floor tool To use the Floor by Face tool you first create mass floors Mass floors calculate floor areas in a mass instance For more information on the Floor tool see Floors on page 709 Creating Floors from Mass Floors 617 ...

Page 660: ... mass floor Cursor highlighting mass floor 7 Click to select the mass floor If you cleared the Select Multiple option a floor is placed on the face immediately 8 If Select Multiple is checked do the following Continue selecting mass floors You can add or remove mass floors from the selection by clicking them The cursor indicates whether you are adding or removing a face To clear the selection of a...

Page 661: ...ms from Mass Instances You can create curtain systems on any mass faces or generic model faces using the Curtain System by Face tool Curtain systems do not have editable sketches Use curtain walls if you require an editable sketch on a vertical mass face See Curtain Walls Curtain Grids and Mullions on page 766 Creating Curtain Systems by Face NOTE You cannot edit the profile of a curtain system If...

Page 662: ... do the following Continue selecting faces You can add or remove faces from the selection by clicking them The cursor indicates whether you are adding or removing a face To clear the selection of all faces and start selecting again click Place Curtain System by Face tab Multiple Selection panel Clear Selection When finished selecting faces click Multiple Selection panel Create System Revit Archite...

Page 663: ... families or mass families When creating a generic model or mass family you can import a DWG or SAT file containing NURB surfaces See Importing Massing Studies from Other Applications on page 626 After saving the family use the Curtain System by Face tool to place a curtain system on the NURB surfaces See Creating Curtain Systems by Face on page 619 Curtain system created on NURB surface Creating ...

Page 664: ...vertical faces of a mass You cannot select faces from different masses for the same roof You can also create roofs or edit the roof sketch using the Roof by Footprint or Roof by Extrusion tools For more information about Roof by Footprint and Roof by Extrusion see Roofs on page 675 Creating Roofs Using the Roof by Face Tool 1 Click Massing Site tab Conceptual Mass panel Model by Face drop down Roo...

Page 665: ...itecture warns you that it is placing a roof on the upward pointing faces only If you want to make roof panels that cover both upward and downward faces split the mass into 2 faces so that each face is either completely upward or downward Then create one or more roofs from the downward faces and one or more from the upward faces When you are finished selecting faces click Create Roof TIP You can c...

Page 666: ... not available for surfaces created by openings placed in roof faces 2 Drag the shape handles to extend the roof face These extensions remain in effect after an update Extending roof face using shape handles Roofs on NURB Surfaces You can create roofs on NURB Non Uniform Rational B spline surfaces in generic model or mass families When you are creating a generic model or mass family you can import...

Page 667: ...urtain system on a mass or generic model you can add faces to or subtract faces from it 1 In the drawing area select the roof or curtain system 2 Click Modify Element tab Model by Face panel Edit Face Selection 3 Select the faces to add or remove 4 Click Recreate Roof or Recreate System Updating Face Based Host Shapes Building elements created by face do not update when you change the mass face To...

Page 668: ...he mass faces In order for Revit Architecture to understand the exported geometry as a mass object use the design software to create a design export the design to a supported file format such as DWG or SAT and import the file into a mass family in Revit Architecture Revit Architecture then treats the geometry as a mass allowing the faces of the mass component to be selected and associated to Revit...

Page 669: ...all faces that will fail to produce meaningful host elements and may produce errors This is a consideration for both mass families and generic model families Best Practices When Importing Masses Complete the design Before importing a mass to Revit Architecture complete as much of the design as required in the design software If you make changes to the design after importing it to Revit Architectur...

Page 670: ...en To see the massing study you may need to do the following Switch to a 3D view Type ZF Zoom to Fit to adjust the drawing area to show the entire mass Click Massing Site tab Conceptual Mass panel Show Mass To improve visibility on the View Control Bar for Model Graphics Style select Shading with Edges 6 Save the mass family 7 Load the mass family into the Revit project and place the component as ...

Page 671: ... a name for the mass and click OK 6 Import the file containing the design as follows a Click Insert tab Import panel Import CAD For more information see Importing or Linking CAD Files Using the Import CAD and Link CAD Tools on page 1388 b In the Import CAD Formats dialog navigate to the folder that contains the file to import c For Files of type select the appropriate file type such as DWG SAT or ...

Page 672: ...rate the process of importing a massing study created using design software SketchUp into Revit Architecture and converting mass faces to building elements Building mass created in SketchUp SketchUp file imported into Revit Architecture 630 Chapter 12 Massing Studies ...

Page 673: ...ements To print mass elements be sure that mass category visibility is turned on Mass elements will not print or export if category visibility is turned off even if Show Mass is turned on See Controlling Visibility of Mass Instances on page 626 Printing Mass Elements 631 ...

Page 674: ...632 ...

Page 675: ...pe properties can be specified to define the appearance of the wall You create a wall by drawing the location line of the wall in a plan view ceiling plan view or 3D view Revit Architecture applies the thickness height and other properties of the wall around the location line of the wall The location line is a plane in the wall that does not change even if the wall type changes For example if you ...

Page 676: ... level See Levels on page 1101 Height Set the height of a wall to go up to a level The default value is Unconnected which allows you to specify a value for Height NOTE When you draw a foundation wall type the option name is displayed as Depth Location Line Specify the location line of the wall as Wall Centerline Core Centerline Finish Face Exterior Finish Face Interior Core Face Exterior or Core F...

Page 677: ...Unconnected Height as the height of the wall on the next level This ensures that the wall is high enough to add windows and doors To flip the orientation of the wall between exterior and interior select the wall and click the blue flip controls that are displayed near it The flip controls always are displayed on the side that Revit Architecture interprets as the exterior side Walls do not automati...

Page 678: ...d wall type from the Type Selector drop down 3 Click Place Wall tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Type Properties 4 In the Type Properties dialog select Retaining for the Function parameter 5 Click OK NOTE A retaining wall is automatically set to be non room bounding See Rooms on page 977 6 Sketch the retaining wall For more information about the sketching tools see Sketching on page ...

Page 679: ...elect the arc wall 2 Drag the end controls to change the arc length 3 On the Options Bar select Keep Concentric to change the radius of the arc while keeping the radius concentric or clear Keep Concentric to retain existing end conditions such as end point location or tangency to a straight wall 4 Drag the middle control Cutting Openings in Arc Walls You can cut square or rectangular openings into...

Page 680: ... are within 6 inches of each other Walls can be embedded into other walls using the Cut Geometry tool Some curtain wall types automatically embed into a wall To determine whether the curtain wall type automatically embeds into another wall check the type properties of the wall Select the Automatically Embed parameter if it is not already selected You can embed a wall into a curtain panel and then ...

Page 681: ... Edit Geometry panel Cut drop down Uncut Geometry 2 Highlight the host wall and click to select it 3 Highlight the embedded wall and click to select it Vertically Compound Walls The structure of vertically compound walls is defined using either layers or regions The following image shows the Edit Assembly dialog NOTE To access the Edit Assembly dialog select a wall and click Modify Walls tab Eleme...

Page 682: ...the core thickness at the bottom of the wall For example if the wall core is thicker at the top than at the bottom and you specify the location line as Core Centerline the centerline of the core is measured between the core boundaries at the bottom You can add wall sweeps or reveals to vertically compound walls See Wall Sweeps on page 664 and Wall Reveals on page 669 You can use various tools to m...

Page 683: ... If you change the value of the temporary dimension the thickness of the layer or region immediately adjacent to the boundary changes If you select a vertical border between regions 2 temporary dimensions appear which control the thickness of the regions to the left and right of the border Allowing Layer Extension If you select the horizontal outer boundary at the top or bottom of a layer you can ...

Page 684: ...nce from the top or bottom of a wall click the horizontal border between 2 regions A blue control arrow displays Clicking the arrow alternates the constraint from the top to the bottom and displays a temporary dimension that you can edit When a region is constrained to the bottom of a wall the region is always the same distance from the bottom regardless of how high the wall becomes Likewise when ...

Page 685: ...bottom of the wall See Modify Tool on page 641 Blue control arrow displayed when border is selected To split a layer or region vertically highlight and select a horizontal boundary That boundary can be the outside boundary or an inside boundary created if you previously split horizontally Vertical split preview TIP It is helpful to zoom in on the outer horizontal boundary to split it vertically Me...

Page 686: ... in the preview pane and its thickness is 0 2 Click Assign Layers 3 Highlight a region boundary 4 Click the boundary to assign the row to that region 5 Continue clicking other regions to continue assigning or click Assign Layers to exit Layer Assignment Rules When assigning layers in walls consider the following guidelines Rows of the sample wall in the preview pane must remain in a sequential ord...

Page 687: ...n priorities cannot ascend from the core boundary to the finish face For example you cannot have a finish layer in the core boundary and then a structure layer at the exterior side Sweeps and Reveals Tools When editing vertically compound walls the Sweeps and Reveals tools control placement and display of sweeps or reveals on the wall To add a sweep to the wall structure 1 In the Edit Assembly dia...

Page 688: ...below see how the sweep is cut by the windows Wall sweep with Cuttable option selected 12 Click OK To add a reveal to the wall structure 1 In the Edit Assembly dialog click Reveals 2 In the Reveals dialog click Add 3 Select a profile from the list NOTE There is no material choice for reveals The material for the reveal is the same as the material it is cutting 4 For Distance specify the distance f...

Page 689: ...stacked wall That is when you specify the height offset top and base of the stacked wall you are also specifying Unconnected Height Location Line Offset Top Extension Distance and Base Extension Distance respectively of the subwalls The only instance parameters you can directly specify for subwalls are Room Bounding and Structural Usage values for the remainder are inherited from the stacked wall ...

Page 690: ...l is required to have a variable height Its height changes relative to the heights of the other subwalls You cannot edit the Height field when the subwall is variable To change the height of the variable subwall change another subwall to variable by selecting its row and clicking Variable 9 For Offset for the selected subwall specify the distance to offset the horizontal location line of the subwa...

Page 691: ...o reassemble tool to restack such a wall When you break up a stacked wall the base constraint and base offset of each subwall is the same as that of the stacked wall You can then edit instance properties for any of the walls Vertically Stacked Wall Notes When using vertically stacked walls consider the following guidelines All subwalls use the same base constraint and base offset as the stacked wa...

Page 692: ...t be in different phases worksets or design options from that of the stacked wall To place inserts in a vertically stacked wall you may need to use the Pick Primary Host tool to switch between the vertically stacked wall and one of the walls that compose it For example the door panel in the following illustration is outside the upper wall because the main host of the door is the bottom subwall To ...

Page 693: ...g component and Revit Architecture returns to Modify mode Repeat this procedure as many times as needed to attach the walls Detaching Walls from Other Components The Detach Top Base tool detaches walls from other modelling components or reference planes This tool is most effective if you are in a view where you can select walls and the components to which they are attached Detaching Walls 1 In the...

Page 694: ...off the join of one wall that is joined with the interior of another wall because there is only one configuration for the join You can change the visibility of the line separating the 2 walls by cleaning the wall join Interior wall join Related topics Design Options and Wall Joins on page 1325 652 Chapter 13 Architectural Design ...

Page 695: ...age 654 1 Click Modify tab Edit Geometry panel Wall Joins 2 Move the cursor over the wall join and click A square encloses the wall join 3 On the Options Bar select a join type Butt Creates a butt join between the walls This is the default join type Butt join Miter Creates a miter join between the walls All wall joins less than 20 are mitered Miter join Square off Squares a wall end to 90 This opt...

Page 696: ...e wall ends back into the join using the snapping feedback to create the desired configuration 4 Prevent walls from joining For more information see Preventing Wall Ends from Joining on page 659 Changing the Order of a Wall Join Changing wall order affects the display of a wall join by changing which wall butts up against another To change wall join order 1 In a plan view click Modify tab Edit Geo...

Page 697: ...ging order note difference in the imaginary lines depicting the wall ends Cleaning Wall Joins Cleaning up wall joins affects display in a plan view only If multiple plan views of the same join are open the tool only affects the plan view in which you issued the clean up Wall Joins 655 ...

Page 698: ...ting up against one another Don t Clean Join Use View Setting cleans wall joins depending on how the property Wall Join Display is set See View Properties on page 259 4 When you finish making wall join edits click Modify or press Esc to exit the tool Joining Parallel Walls that Contain Inserts If you join 2 parallel walls and one of them has an insert such as a window the insert cuts through the j...

Page 699: ...ollowing image shows the walls after they are joined using the Join Geometry tool Creating Walls with Mid End Faces You can join walls to mid end faces To create mid end faces you edit the wall s elevation profile To create mid end faces 1 Draw a wall with several levels 2 Select the wall and click Modify Walls tab Modify Wall panel Edit Profile 3 Add vertical lines in between the wall ends Sample...

Page 700: ...orner join Joining Walls to Mid End Faces You can join a wall to a mid end face As you drag one of the attached walls the sketch updates and maintains the join Adding wall to mid end face 2 walls join with cleaned join Drag one of the joined walls and the wall join moves with it 658 Chapter 13 Architectural Design ...

Page 701: ...table walls are already joined You can delete an editable wall that is joined to a non editable wall except as noted below You cannot join or unjoin an editable wall to a non editable wall if that would change the shape of the non editable wall You cannot join an editable wall to the end of a non editable wall Revit Architecture keeps the walls close together but does not join them and issues a wa...

Page 702: ...all end 1 Select the wall 2 Right click the wall end control where you want to disallow the join 3 Click Disallow Join from the shortcut menu The end of the wall cannot join to the end of another wall If you want to allow the join you can select the wall right click the wall end control and click Allow Join from the shortcut menu or right click Allow Join above the end of the wall Preventing a Joi...

Page 703: ...ut menu Notice changes to The mid end wall cannot join to the end of another wall Selected mid end wall with join disallowed If you want to allow the join click above the mid end wall face or right click and click Allow Join from the shortcut menu Selected mid end wall with join allowed You can switch between the allow join or disallow join states by clicking the join icons Wall Joins 661 ...

Page 704: ... Modifying Wall Elevations 1 After drawing a wall click Modify Then click the wall to select it 2 Click Modify Walls tab Modify Wall panel Edit Profile If necessary select the elevation view in which you want to see the wall By default Revit Architecture allows you to see the center plane in the appropriate elevation For example if you select the north wall Revit Architecture allows you to switch ...

Page 705: ... View to open that view You cannot edit the elevation profile of an arc wall While you edit the elevation profile of a wall attached to another element the wall temporarily reverts to its shape and height prior to attaching it For example if you edit the profile of a wall attached to a roof the wall assumes its unconnected height prior to attaching to the roof As a result you may find the wall is ...

Page 706: ...uild panel Wall drop down Wall Sweep 3 Click Place Wall Sweep tab Element panel and select the desired type of wall sweep from the Type Selector drop down 4 Select the orientation of the wall sweep Horizontal or Vertical 5 Place the cursor over the wall to highlight the wall sweep location Click to place the wall sweep 6 Add the wall sweep to adjacent walls if needed Revit Architecture preselects ...

Page 707: ... toward the wall NOTE This procedure is also available for wall reveals 1 In a 3D or elevation view select the wall sweep segment Be sure it is not already joined to another segment 2 Click Modify Wall Sweeps tab Wall Sweep panel Modify Returns The Straight Cut and Return options appear on the Options Bar The Straight Cut is a perfectly squared off edge This option is not available if the sweep en...

Page 708: ...l and select the desired wall sweep from the Type Selector drop down If the desired wall sweep type is not listed in the Type Selector you can load additional profile families Click Insert tab Load from Library panel Load Family Adding or Removing Segments from a Wall Sweep You can continue an existing sweep onto new walls or remove segments from existing wall sweeps 1 Open a 3D view and select th...

Page 709: ... Move it up or down horizontal wall sweeps or side to side vertical wall sweeps To move a multi segmented wall sweep 1 Place the cursor over the wall sweep and press TAB to select the shape handle of the wall sweep Watch the status bar to know when you are highlighting the shape handle 2 Click to select the shape handle 3 Move the wall sweep up or down horizontal wall sweeps or side to side vertic...

Page 710: ...Tools on page 645 Cut by Inserts This value specifies the distance the sweep is set back from each intersecting wall insert Default Setback Construction Specifies the profile family used to create the wall sweep Profile Materials and Finishes Sets the material of the wall sweep Material Identity Data By default wall sweeps are set to the Wall Sweep subcategory of walls In the Object Styles dialog ...

Page 711: ...wall sweep This property only appears for horizontal wall sweeps Level The wall sweep s offset from the level This property only appears for horizontal wall sweeps Offset From Level Dimensions The length of the wall sweep This is a read only parameter Length Identity Data Enter comments for the wall sweep Comments A value to designate the particular wall sweep This value must be unique for each wa...

Page 712: ...ursor over the wall to highlight the wall reveal location Click to place the reveal 6 Add the reveal to adjacent walls if needed Revit Architecture preselects the reveal location on each adjacent wall 7 To finish placing wall reveals click in the view away from the wall Related topics Changing the Wall Reveal Profile on page 671 Moving Wall Reveals Away from or Towards the Wall on page 671 Changin...

Page 713: ... is the same as moving wall sweeps back to the wall See Returning Wall Sweeps Back to the Wall on page 665 Changing the Wall Reveal Type 1 In the drawing area select a wall reveal 2 Click Modify Reveals tab Element panel and select the desired wall reveal from the Type Selector drop down If the desired wall reveal type is not listed in the Type Selector you can load additional profile families Cli...

Page 714: ...vel This property only appears with horizontal reveals Offset from level Dimensions The length of the reveal Length Modifying Walls After creating a wall you can modify it by changing the wall type or resizing the wall Changing Wall Types When you activate the Wall tool to place walls you can use the Type Selector drop down to select different types of walls Wall Properties Walls have properties b...

Page 715: ...porting Graphics Sets a fill pattern for a wall in a coarse scale view See View Properties on page 259 Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Applies a color to the fill pattern for a wall in a coarse scale view Coarse Scale Fill Color Identity Data Generally this is not an applicable property for walls Model Generally this is not an applicable property for walls Manufacturer A field for placing general commen...

Page 716: ... Unconnected Height The offset of the wall from the top level This parameter is enabled only when the Top Constraint is set to a level Top Offset Indicates whether the wall top is attached to another model component such as a roof or ceiling This is a read only value Top is Attached The distance you have moved the top of the layers in a wall See Compound Structure on page 813 This parameter is ena...

Page 717: ... the wall was created Phase Created The phase when the wall was demolished Phase Demolished Roofs Roofs are components that define different types of roofs for the building design Various types of roofs can be made in Revit Architecture Adding a Roof Roofs can be made from the building footprint as extrusions or from mass instances For information on adding a roof from a mass instance see Creating...

Page 718: ...awing lines or by selecting walls to define the roof profile The footprint sketch is created at the level of the plan view where it is sketched You can control the height of the start of the sloping roof plane using the Base Height Offset property for the roof The sketch must contain a closed loop representing the outside or perimeter of the roof The roof sketch may also contain other closed loops...

Page 719: ... if you want the overhang to be measured from the core of the wall and then specify a value for Overhang 4 Sketch or pick a closed loop for the roof 5 Set slope defining lines To change the slope definition of a line select the line and on the Options Bar click the Defines slope check box For lines that are slope defining you can change the slope value by clicking the line and editing the value Wh...

Page 720: ...lel to one another and then sketch a horizontal reference plane that intersects all 3 vertical planes The Roof by Extrusion tool lets you create a roof with simple slopes To create a roof with complex slopes you can use massing See Creating Roofs from Mass Instances on page 622 After you create a roof by extrusion you can rehost the roof or edit the work plane of the roof For more information see ...

Page 721: ... Rehosting Work Plane based and Face based Elements and Components on page 812 and Changing the Work Plane of an Element on page 318 Cutting Openings in an Extruded Roof 1 Select the extruded roof and click Modify Roofs tab Modify Roof panel Vertical Opening 2 If the Go to View dialog is displayed choose the appropriate plan view in which to edit the profile A plan view representation of the roof ...

Page 722: ...n join to curtain walls and basic wall types Sketching Sloped Glazing 1 Click Home tab Build panel Roof drop down Roof By Footprint or Roof By Extrusion NOTE If you try to create a roof on the lowest level a dialog prompts you to move it to a different level ensuring that the roof is higher than any walls joining to it If you choose not to move the roof to a different level Revit Architecture noti...

Page 723: ...the minor roof to be slope defining except the roof line that will be coincident with the major roof or the wall See Roof Slope on page 685 4 If a 3D view of your sketch has not been created already click View tab Create panel 3D View 5 On the View Control Bar select Shading for Model Graphics Style 6 If necessary spin the design to facilitate selecting the edges of the wall or the major roof and ...

Page 724: ...e roof add cutouts or holes to a roof or change the height of the roof You can also make some modifications to roofs from a project view such as resizing the roof or roof ridges After completing the roof you can change its position by moving its base level either graphically or by editing properties If you are in sketch mode and click Properties you can edit the Base Level and Offset properties to...

Page 725: ...or 3D views To resize a footprint roof using shape handles 1 In an elevation or 3D view move your cursor over the roof and press Tab to highlight the shape handle Watch the status bar which will indicate when you have the shape handle highlighted 2 Click to select the shape handle then drag it as desired Resizing a roof with shape handle Roof Ridges You can align roof ridges in 3D and elevation vi...

Page 726: ...tab Work Plane panel Set 5 In the Work Plane dialog select the work plane name you just created in Step 2 and click OK 6 Use the Align tool to align roof ridges See Aligning Elements on page 377 Unaligned roof ridges Result of aligned roof ridges Roof Slope You can change the slope of any slope defining lines in a roof without editing the roof Select the roof and access its properties to view the ...

Page 727: ... the surface of the roof Slope Arrow Use the Slope Arrow tool to create elements that include slopes You can use the Slope Arrow tool for floors ceilings soffits and roofs For example to create a flat sloping roof when no footprint boundary lines are specified as slope defining lines sketch a slope arrow from the corners of the roof sketch What is the Slope Arrow A slope arrow is an alternative wa...

Page 728: ...fs 1 Click Home tab Build panel Roof If you have already created your roof select the roof in the drawing area and click Modify Roofs tab Edit panel Edit Footprint 2 Click Create Roof Footprint tab or Modify Roofs Edit Footprint tab Draw panel Slope Arrow Eaves When you sketch a roof you create eaves by setting an overhang value Once you complete the sketch of the roof you can align eaves and chan...

Page 729: ... in a project view 2 Click Modify Roofs tab Element panel Element Properties 3 In the Instance Properties dialog for Rafter Cut select Plumb Cut Two Cut Plumb or Two Cut Square 4 For Two Cut Plumb and Two Cut Square specify a value for Fascia Depth between zero and the thickness of the roof 5 Click OK Eaves 687 ...

Page 730: ...Offset from roof base value The Adjust Overhang option changes the eave height by adjusting the Overhang value See Roof Properties on page 703 5 Click Finish Roof The results of adjusting the overhang are visible after you finish the roof Dormers Creating a Dormer Using Slope Arrows 1 Sketch a roof footprint including slope defining lines See Adding a Roof by Footprint on page 676 2 While in sketc...

Page 731: ...slope arrow from the other end of the dormer segment to its midpoint Properly sketched slope arrows 7 Click Finish Roof and open a 3D view to see the results Hip roof with dormer Creating a Dormer Opening in a Roof 1 Start with a building model in which a dormer has been created Dormers 689 ...

Page 732: ...at compose the dormer opening 5 Place the cursor in the drawing area Valid boundaries are highlighted Valid boundaries are a joined roof or its bottom face a side face of a wall a bottom face of a floor an edge of the roof to be cut or a model line on the face of the roof to be cut In this example side faces of walls and joined faces of the roof were selected Note that you do not need to trim the ...

Page 733: ... If the fascia segments meet at corners they miter NOTE Watch the status bar It will indicate valid references or points where you can place fascia For example if you are placing fascia on a roof a valid reference might be Roofs Basic Roof Reference When you place fascia in a section view place the cursor near the corners of the element to highlight the reference or press Tab 3 Click Place Fascia ...

Page 734: ...ng area select the fascia 2 If you are in a 3D view click the flip controls that appear to flip the fascia around the vertical or horizontal axis If you are in a 2D view right click the fascia and select Flip About Horizontal Axis or Flip About Vertical Axis Adding or Removing Segments of the Fascia 1 In the drawing area select the fascia If there are many elements near the fascia that make select...

Page 735: ...ick box and click Multi Select tab Filter panel Filter Select only Fascias and click OK 2 Click Modify Fascias tab Roof Fascia panel Modify Mitering 3 Select a mitering option Vertical Horizontal Perpendicular 4 Click on the end face of the fascia to change the miter option Vertical miter Horizontal miter Perpendicular miter 5 Press Esc to exit the Modify Mitering tool Roof fascias can miter betwe...

Page 736: ...ascia 1 Place the cursor over the fascia and press Tab to highlight the shape handle The status bar indicates when you are highlighting the shape handle 2 Click to select the shape handle 3 Move the cursor left or right to change the horizontal offset This affects the horizontal offset of all segments of the fascia so the segments are symmetrical Changing Vertical Offset of Roof Fascia Select the ...

Page 737: ...soffits use the Lines tool while in sketch mode 1 Click Home tab Build panel Roof drop down Roof Soffit 2 Click Create Roof Soffit Boundary tab Draw panel Pick Roof Edges This tool creates a locked sketch line 3 Highlight the roof and click Roof selected with Pick Roof Edges tool 4 Click Create Roof Soffit Boundary tab Draw panel Pick Walls highlight the outside faces of the wall beneath the roof ...

Page 738: ...h lines and close the sketch loop See Trimming and Extending Elements on page 390 6 Click Finish Soffit To see the soffit better create a section view through the plan view that shows the wall meeting the roof See Creating a Section View on page 138 Roof soffit and wall in section view 696 Chapter 13 Architectural Design ...

Page 739: ... roof See Joining Geometry on page 406 You can use the Slope Arrow tool to create a sloping soffit See Slope Arrow on page 685 Related topic Roof Soffit Examples on page 697 Roof Soffit Examples Soffit selected in elevation view Soffits selected on model with gambrel roof Roof Gutters You can add gutters to edges of roofs soffits and fascia You can also add gutters to model lines Roof Gutters 697 ...

Page 740: ...For example if you are placing a gutter on a roof a valid reference might be Roofs Basic Roof Reference When you place gutters in a section view place the cursor near the corners of the element to highlight the reference or press TAB 3 Click Place Gutter tab Profile panel Finish Current to finish the current gutter and start a different gutter 4 Move the cursor to a new edge and click to place 5 T...

Page 741: ... pick box and click Multi Select tab Filter panel Filter Select only Gutters and click OK 2 Click Modify Gutters tab Profile panel Add Remove Segments 3 Click a reference edge to add a gutter or remove a gutter NOTE Watch the status bar It will indicate valid references or points where you can add or remove gutters For example if you are adding gutters to a roof a valid reference might be Roofs Ba...

Page 742: ...reate a roof with slope defined lines at different elevations by joining 2 separate roofs TIP This procedure works best with a multi level building 1 Create a footprint roof sketch similar to the following 2 Click Create Roof Footprint tab Element panel Roof Properties 3 In the Instance Properties dialog specify a cutoff level for the roof For example if you are sketching the roof on level 2 you m...

Page 743: ... View the 2 roofs in a plan view You now have a single roof with different eave heights Here is the finished house with that roof style Four Sided Gable Roof A common building scenario is a 4 sided gable roof The following is a quick procedure to create this look Roof Examples 701 ...

Page 744: ...l sketch lines to be non slope defining 2 Click Create Roof Footprint tab Draw panel Slope Arrow 3 Click Properties 4 For the Specify parameter select Slope 5 For the Slope parameter enter 9 or the metric equivalent 6 Sketch slope arrows as shown 7 Click Finish Roof 8 Open the roof in 3D 702 Chapter 13 Architectural Design ...

Page 745: ... tab or Create Extrusion Roof Profile tab Element panel Roof Properties 2 In the Instance Properties dialog edit roof instance parameters as desired See Roof Instance Properties on page 704 3 To edit roof type parameters click Edit Type Change the roof type parameters as desired and click OK See Roof Type Properties on page 704 NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all roofs of this type in ...

Page 746: ...ion of the roof Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection Assembly description Uniformat assembly code selected from hierarchical list Assembly code A value to designate the particular roof This value must be unique for each roof in a project Revit Architecture issues a warning if the number is already used but allows Type Mark you to continue using it You can se...

Page 747: ...ject This parameter is only enabled for extruded roofs Reference Level Raises or lowers the roof from the reference level This parameter is only enabled for extruded roofs Level Offset Construction The length of the lines defining the fascia Fascia Depth Defines the rafter cut on an eave See Creating a Plumb Cut Two Cut Plumb or Two Cut Square Eave on page 687 Rafter Cut This property is a switch ...

Page 748: ...es Description Name Constraints For footprint roofs sets a roof line to be a slope defining line Defines roof slope Adjusts the horizontal offset of the line from its associated wall Available only when picking walls Overhang The height above the base level at which the wall and the roof meet This height is relative to the base level of the roof The default value is 0 This parameter is enabled Pla...

Page 749: ...s on page 1117 Keynote The model type for the fascia or gutter Model The manufacturer of the fascia or gutter material Manufacturer Comments about the fascia or gutter type Type Comments Link for a manufacturer web page URL Description of the fascia or gutter Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection Assembly description Uniformat assembly code selected from hier...

Page 750: ...can see the warning using the Review Warnings tool See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1415 Roof Slope Arrow Properties Description Name Constraints Choose between Slope or Height at Tail If you select Slope you can enter a value for Slope If you select Height at Tail Level at Head and Height Offset at Head are enabled Specify Specifies the level for the tail relative to the base level of the r...

Page 751: ...nel Floor 2 Draw the floor boundaries using one of the following methods Pick walls By default Pick Walls is active If it is not active click Create Floor Boundary tab Draw panel Pick Walls Select walls in the drawing area to use as floor boundaries Sketch boundaries To sketch the profile of the floor click Create Floor Boundary tab Draw panel and select a sketching tool See Sketching on page 303 ...

Page 752: ... you select the floor not another element If desired you can use a filter to select the floor See Selecting Elements Using a Filter on page 341 2 Click Modify Floors tab Edit panel Edit Boundary 3 Make any necessary changes See Sketching on page 303 4 Click Finish Floor Sloped Floors Revit Architecture provides multiple ways to create a sloped floor You can do any of the following Draw a slope arr...

Page 753: ...example the floor sketch is on Level 1 You could choose to start the slope arrow on Level 2 b For Height Offset at Tail specify how high above the level the slope arrow begins c For Slope set a slope value 8 Click OK Creating a Sloped Floor by Setting Parallel Sketch Line Properties 1 If you are not already in sketch mode select the floor in plan view and click Modify Floors tab Edit panel Edit Bo...

Page 754: ...Select panel Modify Slab added to floor Tips You can place slab edges in 2D views such as plan or section views or in 3D views Watch the status bar to look for valid references For example if you are placing a slab edge on a floor the status bar might display Floors Basic Floor Reference When placing a slab edge in section place the cursor near the corners of the floor to highlight the reference A...

Page 755: ...dge on the right Vertical Move Select the slab edge and drag it up or down If the slab edge is multi segmented all segments move up or down the same distance Slab edge moving vertically in section Floor Slab Edge Properties Parameter names values and descriptions for floor slab edges Floor slab edges are classified under host sweeps Values are modifiable Floor Slab Edge Type Properties Description...

Page 756: ...for floors including the slope and the level You can also modify properties for an individual floor sketch line and the floor slope arrow Modifying Floor Properties 1 If you are in sketch mode click Create Floor Boundary tab Element panel Floor Properties If you are in a plan view select the floor and click Modify Floors tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Instance Properties 2 In the I...

Page 757: ...e 1117 Keynote The model type for the floor Model The manufacturer of the flooring material Manufacturer Comments about the floor type Type Comments Link for a manufacturer web page URL Provides a description of the floor Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection Assembly Description Uniformat assembly code selected from hierarchical list Assembly Dode A value to...

Page 758: ...s a read only value Volume Indicates the thickness of the floor This is typically a read only value unless a shape edit has been applied and its type contains a variable layer When the value is writable it can be used to set a uniform Thickness thickness of the structural floor The entry can be blank if the thickness varies See Variable Layer Thickness for Roofs and Structural Floors on page 950 I...

Page 759: ...le line to be at a constant height slope defining and then set its slope See Sloped Floors on page 710 Sets the height of the floor line above the level on which it is sketched The default value is 0 This parameter is enabled when the Defines Constant Height parameter is turned on Offset from Base Determines whether the offset is measured from the wall core Extend into wall to core Graphics If the...

Page 760: ... read only parameter Length Identity Data If design options have been created this property indicates the design option in which the element exists For more information on design options see Design Op tions on page 1305 Design Option Ceilings You can create ceilings automatically in a project view or by sketching Ceilings should be created in the reflected ceiling plan RCP view or in sketch mode C...

Page 761: ...rm the boundary of the ceiling NOTE To select a chain of walls highlight a line press Tab until chain of walls displays in the status bar and click 4 Click Ceiling Properties 5 In the Instance Properties dialog designate the type of ceiling and its properties and click OK 6 Click Finish Ceiling To sketch a ceiling by drawing 1 Click Create Ceiling Boundary tab Draw Panel Line 2 Use the sketching t...

Page 762: ...ve the level the slope arrow begins 6 For Level at Tail specify the level at which to start the slope arrow For example the ceiling sketch is on Level 2 You could choose to start the slope arrow on Level 3 7 For Height Offset at Head specify how high above the level the slope arrow ends 8 For Level at Head specify the level at which to end the slope arrow For example the ceiling sketch is on Level...

Page 763: ...g you can select different types of ceilings in the Type Selector Creating a New Ceiling Type 1 Click Home tab Build panel Ceiling 2 Click Place Ceiling tab Element panel and select a ceiling type from the Type Selector drop down 3 Click Element Properties drop down Type Properties 4 In the Type Properties dialog click Duplicate and type the ceiling name 5 Click OK 6 Modify the ceiling properties ...

Page 764: ...it Type to edit ceiling type parameters NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all ceilings of this type in the project You can click Duplicate to create a new ceiling type 4 Click OK Ceiling Type Properties Description Name Construction Creates the composition of a compound ceiling See Compound Structure on page 813 Structure The total thickness of the ceiling Thickness Graphics The fill pat...

Page 765: ...iption Name Constraints The level at which the ceiling resides Level Sets an offset for the ceiling relative to the specified level Height Offset From Level Dimensions Changes the value of the slope defining line to the specified value without the need to edit the sketch The parameter initially displays a value if there is a slope defining line If there is no slope defining line the parameter is b...

Page 766: ...s enabled when Defines Constant Height is turned on Offset from Base Dimensions Sets the slope angle for the selected ceiling line This property is enabled when Defines Slope is turned on Slope The length of the sketch line This is a read only parameter Length Ceiling Slope Arrow Properties Description Name Indicates the method for determining slope Specify Starts the slope arrow at the designated...

Page 767: ...s see Openings in a Structural Beam Brace or Structural Column on page 904 You can also cut openings in structural floors and decks For more information see Cutting Openings in Structural Floors on page 934 When creating a family you can sketch an opening in family geometry See The Families Guide on page 418 Examples of a roof opening a dormer cut and a stairway opening through the floor and ceili...

Page 768: ...ing 2 Click Modify tab Edit Geometry panel Openings drop down Wall Opening 3 Select the wall that will host the opening 4 Sketch a rectangular opening Wall elevation view with opening being sketched After you specify the final point of the opening the opening displays 5 To modify an opening click Modify and select the opening 726 Chapter 13 Architectural Design ...

Page 769: ...t the entire element to make a vertical cut 1 Click Modify tab Edit Geometry panel Openings drop down Opening on Face or Vertical Opening Use Opening on Face when you want the opening to be perpendicular to the selected face Use Vertical Opening when you want the opening to be perpendicular to a level 2 If you chose Opening on Face select a face in the floor ceiling or roof If you chose Vertical O...

Page 770: ...erties 6 For Base Constraint specify a level for the start point of the shaft 7 For Top Constraint specify a level for the end point of the shaft The shaft cuts through and is visible on all intermediate levels 8 Click OK to close the Instance Properties dialog If you move the shaft on any level it moves on all levels The symbolic lines are visible on all levels too Stairs You create stairs in a p...

Page 771: ...f Risers Run and Width See Creating a Schedule or Quantity on page 173 You can also tag stairs with the stair tag family The stair tag is available from the Annotations folder of the Revit Architecture family library For more information see Tags on page 1123 Creating Stairs by Sketching Runs Click start point on left side Click endpoint on right end To create Stairs on page 728 with landings clic...

Page 772: ...on Creating Stairs by Sketching Boundary and Riser Lines You can define your stairs by sketching boundaries and risers While in stair sketch mode you can sketch Stairs on page 728 boundaries and risers instead of having Revit Architecture calculate the stair run automatically 1 Click Home tab Circulation panel Stairs 2 Click Create Stairs Sketch tab Draw panel Boundary Sketch the boundary 3 Click ...

Page 773: ...tairs Sketch tab Edit panel Split 2 Split the boundary lines where they meet the landing Tips Do not connect left and right boundary lines to each other You can sketch them as single lines or multi segmented lines for example straight lines and arcs connected Connect riser lines between the left and right boundaries See the online tutorials for practical exercises on creating stairs The top riser ...

Page 774: ... 9 To change the properties of the stairs click Create Stairs Sketch tab Element panel Stairs Properties Edit the instance parameters and click Edit Type to edit type parameters For a description of stair properties and their values see Stair Properties on page 738 10 Click Finish Stairs Revit Architecture generates a staircase with automatic railings Completed stairs in 3D with default railings a...

Page 775: ...s are not placed accurately TIP To create a spiral staircase to multiple levels create one helix for the stairs and then copy that helix to the appropriate levels Creating Arced Landings You can create arced landings if you sketch arced runs that share a center and a radius value Spiral arcs with same radius and center Creating Arced Landings 733 ...

Page 776: ...pe and then restart the Stairs tool You can also create the stairs with any railing type and change the type after you have created the desired railings For more information see Railings on page 746 4 Click OK NOTE The default railing type when creating stairs is the railing type specified when you are in Railing sketch mode and click Railing Properties You can change the default railing by select...

Page 777: ...rs as specified in the Architectural Graphic Standards Riser Tread 17 5 inches 7 5 inches for the riser height 10 inches for the tread depth Riser Tread 75 inches 2 Riser Tread is greater than or equal to 24 inches minimum threshold or less than or equal to 25 inches maximum threshold Modifying Stairs Boundaries and Riser and Run Lines Stair boundaries as well as riser and run lines can be modifie...

Page 778: ... on page 349 and Splitting Walls and Lines on page 408 You can move the railing line to a new location such as the center of the staircase You cannot draw multiple railings in the same session Modified stairs with center railing Extending Stair Railings If you extend stair railings for example to extend onto a floor you need to split the railing line so that the railing changes its slope and meets...

Page 779: ...atus bar as you press Tab until it indicates that the shape handle is highlighted 2 Drag the label to a new position Changing the Stair Direction You can change the direction of stairs after you have completed the stair sketch 1 Select the stairs in a project view 2 Click the blue flip control arrows Zero Tread Thickness for Monolithic Stairs You can set the tread thickness of monolithic stairs to...

Page 780: ...rs affect all stairs of this type in the project You can click Duplicate to create a new stair type 4 Click OK Stair Type Properties Description Name Construction Click Edit to set the stair calculation rules See Stair Calculator on page 734 Calculation Rules Extends stringers below the base level of the stair This is useful for cases where the stringer attaches to the face of a floor opening rath...

Page 781: ...ckness Specifies the amount of the tread depth that overhangs the next tread Nosing Length The profile for a sweep added to the front of the tread See The Families Guide on page 418 Also see Creating a Sweep on page 328 Revit Architecture has predefined profiles to use for the sweep Nosing Profile Specifies 1 sided 2 sided or 3 sided tread nosing Apply Nosing Profile Risers Sets the maximum height...

Page 782: ...e an open stringer Moves an open stringer from side to side For example if you offset an open right stringer it moves toward the left stringer Open Stringer Offset Allows you to control the relationship between side stringers and treads If you in crease the number the stringer moves down from the treads Treads do not move Stringer Carriage Height Railings do not change height relative to treads bu...

Page 783: ...his parameter as opposed to sketching individual runs is that if you change the railing Multistory Top Level on one run that railing is changed on all the runs Also if you use this parameter the Revit Architecture project file size does not change as significantly as it would if you sketched individual runs NOTE The levels in the multi story building should be a uniform distance apart For example ...

Page 784: ...Data Specific comments on the staircase Comments A label created for the stairs This value must be unique for each stairway in a project Revit Architecture warns you if the number is already used but allows you to continue Mark using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings tool See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1415 Phasing The phase when the stairs were created Phase Created The...

Page 785: ...fault Revit Architecture uses the railing type that displays when you activate the Railing tool and then select Railing Properties You can change the default railing by selecting a new type in the Type Properties dialog For more information see Railings on page 746 NOTE If the desired railing type is not listed in the Railings Type dialog you can quit the Ramp tool create the railing type and then...

Page 786: ... Type Properties Description Name Construction Sets the thickness of the ramp This property is enabled only when the Shape property is set to thick Thickness Indicates whether a ramp is interior default value or exterior Function is used in scheduling and to create filters that simplify a model when exporting Function Graphics The size of the font for the ramp s up text and down text Text Size The...

Page 787: ...for display purposes Shape Ramp Instance Properties Description Name Constraints Sets the base of the ramp Base Level Sets the ramp s height from its base level Base Offset Sets the top of the ramp Top Level Sets the ramp s offset from the top level Top Offset Sets the top of the ramp in a multi story building Multistory Top Level Graphics Specifies the up text Up text Specifies the down text Down...

Page 788: ...and post placement see Controlling Placement of Balusters and Posts on page 749 The shape of rails and balusters are determined by profile families loaded in the project See Railing Properties on page 754 Adding a Railing 1 Click Home tab Circulation panel Railing 2 If you are not in a view where you can sketch a railing you are prompted to pick a view Select a view from the list and click Open Vi...

Page 789: ...r drop down To change the railing type from a project view 1 Select the railing in the project view 2 Click Modify Railings tab Element panel and select a different railing type from the Type Selector drop down Modifying Railing Structure You can change the height offset profile material and number of rails within a railing type 1 Select the railing and click Modify Railings tab Element panel Elem...

Page 790: ...ure on page 747 Modifying Railing Height and Slope on page 748 Controlling Placement of Balusters and Posts on page 749 Railings on page 746 Modifying Railing Height and Slope You can control the height and slope of individual rail sketch lines For example on a set of U shaped stairs you may want to set the inner railing to a different height than the outer railing With slope adjustment you can co...

Page 791: ...Balusters and Posts You can control how balusters and posts are arranged along a railing A simple baluster pattern is provided with the default project template You can use this pattern modify it or create a more complex pattern NOTE If you start a new project using a template when you sketch a railing balusters and posts are added by default If you start a project without a template balusters and...

Page 792: ...perties dialog a rail structure that is not defined in your drawing 6 For Base Offset enter a value 7 Select the Top Refer to the previous table 8 Enter a value for Top offset 9 Enter a value for Dist from previous 10 Enter a value for Offset 11 For Break Pattern do the following Then If you want the baluster pattern select Each Segment End spread along the length of each railing segment select An...

Page 793: ...il or top of the host A host can be a level floor stair or ramp Base The negative or positive vertical distance between the bottom of the baluster and the base Base offset Specifies where the top of the baluster is placed usually a rail Values are the same as Base Top The negative or positive vertical distance between the top of the baluster and the Top Top offset The distance between the start of...

Page 794: ...fill the excess length or you can specify none so that the excess space remains open This property is available if Justify is set to Beginning End or Center The distance between balusters that fill any excess length along the railing segment This property is available if a baluster or post family is selected for the Excess Length Fill property Spacing Specifying Start Corner and End Posts 1 In a p...

Page 795: ...l or top of the host A host can be a level floor stair or ramp Base The negative or positive vertical distance between the bottom of the post and the base Base offset Specifies where the top of the post is placed usually a rail Values are the same as Base Top The negative or positive vertical distance between the top of the post and the top Top offset The amount of space you need to move the post ...

Page 796: ... In the Instance Properties dialog edit railing instance parameters 3 Click Edit Type to edit railing type parameters NOTE Changes made to type properties affect all railings of this type in the project You can click Duplicate to create a new railing type 4 Click OK Railing Type Properties Description Name Construction The height of the top most rail in the railing structure Railing Height Opens a...

Page 797: ...p This can be used to create a smooth junction when the railing height is modified at a landing or the railing turns out at the bottom of a stair Join methods can be overridden on a connection by connection basis See Modifying Railing Joins on page 748 When connections are made between railing segments Revit Architecture tries to create mitered joins If it cannot make a mitered join then segments ...

Page 798: ...rs in a multi category tag with the railing For complete information about multi category tagging and setting up shared parameters see Shared Parameters on page 451 Mark Phasing The phase when the railing was created See Creating Phases on page 1332 Phase Created The phase when the railing was demolished See Demolishing Elements on page 1338 Phase Demolished Architectural Columns This topic descri...

Page 799: ...You can also change the room bounding property of a column after placement See Architectural Column Properties on page 764 3 Click in the drawing area to place the column TIP Typically you align columns when placing them by selecting a grid line or wall If you randomly placed them and you want to align them click Modify tab Edit panel Align and select the columns to align In the middle of the colu...

Page 800: ... properties and reset the values for the Attachment Justification at Top and Offset from Attachment at Top instance parameters Specify Offset from Attachment Offset from Attachment sets a value to be offset from the target NOTE If the column and target are both structural concrete they will be cleaned instead of cut If the column is structural and the target is non structural a warning message app...

Page 801: ... Attachment Style Cut Column Attachment Justification Maximum Intersection Attachment Style Cut Column Attachment Justification Minimum Intersection Offset from Attachment 0 6 Attaching Columns 759 ...

Page 802: ... Attachment Style Cut Column Attachment Justification Intersect Column Midline 760 Chapter 13 Architectural Design ...

Page 803: ...get attachment style with different attachment justifications and offsets from attachment Attachment Style Cut Target Attachment Justification Minimum Intersection Attachment Style Cut Target Attachment Justification Maximum Intersection Attaching Columns 761 ...

Page 804: ...hment Style Cut Target Attachment Justification Minimum Intersection Offset from Attachment On Attachment Style Cut Target Attachment Justification Intersect Column Midline 762 Chapter 13 Architectural Design ...

Page 805: ...and bottom of the column from the target Coarse Scale Cut Patterns If you join a wall and a column and the wall has a coarse scale fill pattern defined the joined column assumes that pattern See Curtain Wall Properties on page 786 This behavior is evident in coarse scale plan and section views The section view plane must cut through the joined face of the 2 elements Wall and column joined column a...

Page 806: ... parameters See Architectural Column Instance Properties on page 765 3 Click Edit Type to edit architectural column type parameters See Architectural Column Type Properties on page 764 NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all architectural columns of this type in the project You can click Duplicate to create a new architectural column type 4 Click OK Architectural Column Type Properties Des...

Page 807: ...e number is already used but Type Mark allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings tool See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1415 Cost of the materials for constructing the column This information can be included in a schedule Cost The number from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System that best categorizes the family type OmniClass Num...

Page 808: ...t value for cut tar get column conditions Offset From Attachment At Base Identity Data Specific comments for the column instance Comments Applies a tag to any column for reference purposes This value must be unique for each column in a project Revit Architecture warns you if the number is already used Mark but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings tool S...

Page 809: ...Curtain wall Curtain Grid Curtain Walls Curtain Grids and Mullions 767 ...

Page 810: ...ou make them independent To do this select a curtain grid and click Modify Curtain Wall Grids tab Element panel Element Properties In the Instance Properties dialog under Other select Independent for Type Association Alternatively you can select the grid and click the pin that is displayed When an automatic grid is independent its position remains fixed if you resize the wall or change the grid la...

Page 811: ... simultaneously on each highlighted face To exit the Wall tool press Esc twice 5 To change a panel type do the following a Open an elevation or a view where you can see the panels of the curtain wall b Select a panel Move the cursor over a panel edge and press Tab several times until the panel is selected Watch the status bar for information and then click to select it c Click Modify Curtain Panel...

Page 812: ...ng Mullions on page 775 Adding Curtain Grids If you sketched a curtain wall without automatic grids Type Driven Curtain Element Layout on page 772 you can add grids manually 1 Open a 3D view or an elevation view 2 Click Home tab Build panel Curtain Grid 3 Click Place Curtain Grid tab Placement panel and select a placement type See Selectively Placing Curtain Grids on page 771 4 Place the cursor al...

Page 813: ...all panels where the preview appears One Segment places one grid segment on one panel where the preview appears All Except Picked places a grid segment on all panels except those you select to exclude Excluding Grids from Panels 1 Click Home tab Build panel Curtain Grid 2 Click Place Curtain Grid tab Placement panel All Except Picked 3 Place the cursor on a curtain wall so that a preview of the cu...

Page 814: ...a curtain element Fixed Distance indicates that the curtain grids are placed at the exact value specified for the Spacing parameter If the spacing is not an even factor of the length a space is inserted at one or both ends of the face depending on the justification parameter Fixed Number indicates that you can specify different numbers of curtain grids for different curtain instances See the Numbe...

Page 815: ... changes or changes to the size of the face Beginning adds space to the end of the face before placing the first grid Center adds an even amount of space at both the beginning and end of the face End adds space from the beginning of the face before placing the first grid Rotates the curtain grids to the specified angle If you specify this value for individual faces no value is displayed in this fi...

Page 816: ... can set by face for a curtain element Number Justification Offset Angle For a description of these properties see Type Driven Curtain Element Layout on page 772 Locking the Position of Mullions and Curtain Grids Mullions and curtain grids can be pinned locked on a curtain element only if that element has a type driven curtain grid layout If the mullion or curtain grid is locked on a curtain eleme...

Page 817: ... to a curtain wall or curtain system See Adding Curtain Grids on page 770 2 Click Home tab Build panel Mullion 3 Click Place Mullion tab Element panel Type Selector drop down and select the desired mullion type 4 On the Place Mullion tab Placement tab select one of the following tools Grid Line When you click a grid line in the drawing area this tool places a mullion across the entire grid line Gr...

Page 818: ...component to display at fine and medium detail levels When you load the mullion into the project and place it in a plan view with a coarse detail level the plan view might show only the profile sketch You could then create a section detail of the mullion and specify its detail level as fine The detail components would be displayed in this view offering greater detail of the construction of the mul...

Page 819: ...s at a join so that they display as one continuous mullion Use Break at Join to trim the ends of mullions at a join so that they display as separate mullions Corner Mullions Corner mullions are single mullions that you can place between the end points of 2 curtain walls between the ridges of sloped glazings or on any internal mullion on a curved curtain element such as an arc curtain wall Arc curt...

Page 820: ...n the type properties of the mullion V corner mullion between 2 curtain walls Trapezoid Corner Mullion Panels of curtain walls or sloped glazing meet at the sides of the mullion You can specify the center width and length along the sides that meet the panels in the type properties of the mullion Trapezoid mullion between 2 curtain walls Quad Corner Mullion Panels of curtain walls or sloped glazing...

Page 821: ...an view control arrows are displayed Click the arrows to flip the interior and exterior surfaces of the wall Curtain wall before flipping Curtain wall after flipping the black surface line is now on top Wall Panels in Curtain Walls You can change a curtain wall panel to any type of wall Select a panel and then select a wall type in the Type Selector You cannot explicitly control the size of a pane...

Page 822: ...ndows into wall panels the position of inserts is relative to the entire curtain wall If you resize a wall panel by moving curtain grids the insert does not move with the panel Its position remains fixed with respect to the curtain wall Inserts in masonry wall panels Split Wall Panels with Curtain Grids You can split wall panels by adding curtain grids to the curtain wall You can also add Mullions...

Page 823: ...ll and click Modify Walls tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Instance Properties or Type Properties Click Home tab Build panel Wall select a curtain wall type from the Type Selector drop down and click Element Properties drop down Instance Properties or Type Properties See Element Properties on page 120 Changing Curtain Wall Panel Type You can change the panel type applied to a curtain...

Page 824: ...adjoining walls Use the shape handle to separate a curtain wall join from other curtain walls or exterior and interior walls This allows more control over curtain wall joins and mullion placement to ensure proper design intent Default curtain wall installation to face of joined wall To separate the join select the curtain wall join shape handle press Tab and watch the status bar to be sure you hav...

Page 825: ...u cannot select Edit In Place in the drawing area click Prevent or allow change of element position for the panel The selected panel is the only geometry available for editing 2 Select the panel 3 To edit the shape of the panel click Modify Glass tab Form panel Edit Extrusion 4 In sketch mode reshape the panel as desired For example you could add a door like opening to the panel 5 Click Finish Ext...

Page 826: ... Also merging panels allows you to include a door or other large insert in a curtain wall Curtain wall with merged panels Joining Curtain Wall Panels 1 Create the curtain wall panels See Curtain Walls Curtain Grids and Mullions on page 766 2 Add curtain grids See Creating Rectangular Curtain Walls on page 768 3 Select a curtain grid 4 Click Modify Curtain Wall Grids tab Curtain Grid panel Add Remo...

Page 827: ...h the system panel type only If you join panels of different types the resulting panel is of the type you first selected Use hidden line view to clearly see which panels are joined See Hidden Line Model Graphics Style on page 252 Curtain Systems A curtain system is a component that comprises panels curtain grids and mullions It usually does not have a rectangular shape You can create a curtain sys...

Page 828: ...erence plane Revit Architecture automatically fills in each section of the grid design unit with a separate curtain wall panel Adding Mullions to a Curtain System Add mullions to a grid if needed for the design 1 Click Home tab Build panel Mullion 2 Highlight the grid line to which to add the mullions and click to select it TIP Hold Shift to place a mullion only on the selected segment Or hold Ctr...

Page 829: ...e adds 1 foot from the beginning of the wall before placing the first grid See the Vertical Horizontal Justification instance property description for more in formation on justification Fixed Number indicates that you can set different numbers of curtain grids for different curtain wall instances See the Vertical Ho rizontal Number instance property description for more information Maximum Spacing...

Page 830: ...you need to identify more than one curtain wall This value must be unique for each curtain wall in Type Mark a project Revit Architecture warns you if the number is already used but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings tool See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1415 The fire rating of the curtain wall Fire Rating Material cost Cost Curtain Wall Instanc...

Page 831: ...ds an even amount of space at both the begin ning and end of the face End adds space from the beginning of the face before placing the first grid Rotates the curtain grids to the specified angle You can also specify this value for individual faces If you specify this parameter for a face then no value dis plays in this field Valid values are between 89 and 89 Angle Starts grid placement at the spe...

Page 832: ...ain element Offset Construction Sets a profile for the mullion You can create a custom profile family See The Families Guide on page 418 Profile not available for corner mul lions Rotates the mullion profile Normal to Face is the usual condition Parallel to Ground is appropriate for sloped curtain panels such as in a sloped glazing or a sloped curtain system Position not available for corner mul l...

Page 833: ...ets the width of side 1 If you have a loaded a custom profile this value is calculated from the mullion profile Width on side 1 Identity Data Add or edit the mullion keynote Click in the value box to open the Keynotes dialog See Keynotes on page 1117 Keynote Definition of the mullion Model Definition of the mullion manufacturer Manufacturer Mullion comments Type Comments Sets applicable URL URL Mu...

Page 834: ...ckness Trapezoid Corner Mullions Description Name Sets the mullion to corner mullion This is a read only value Corner Mullion Width of mullion at the center Center Width Length of the sides of the mullion that meet the panels Depth Sets the offset from the panels Offset Sets the thickness Thickness Quad Corner Mullions Description Name Sets the mullion to corner mullion This is a read only value C...

Page 835: ...rs on a wall You can add model text in a project view and in the Family Editor for families that can be represented in 3D such as walls doors windows and furniture Model text is not available for families that can only be represented as 2D such as annotations detail components and profiles You can specify many properties for model text including font size and material Model Text Shown Cut Model te...

Page 836: ...oaded into a project is not editable in the project view 1 In the drawing area select the model text 2 Click Modify Generic Models tab Text panel Edit 3 In the Edit Text dialog make your changes 4 Click OK Moving Model Text 1 In the drawing area select the model text Move model text to a new location in the same work plane 2 Drag the model text to a new location Change the work plane 3 Click Modif...

Page 837: ...ype Properties Description Name Text Sets the model text font Text Font Sets the text size Text Size Sets the typeface to bold Bold Sets the typeface to italic Italic Identity Data Add or edit the model text keynote Click in the value box to open the Keynotes dialog See Keynotes on page 1117 Keynote Definition of the model text model Model Definition of the model text manufacturer Manufacturer Mod...

Page 838: ...anel Settings drop down Object Styles specify a subcategory for Subcategory the model text When defining object styles for the subcategory you can define its color line weight and other properties You can then control the display of the model text by turning visibility of the subcategory on or off using View tab Graphics panel Visibility Graphics See Object Styles on page 493 and Vis ibility and G...

Page 839: ...tomatically cuts the opening and places the door in the wall To add a door to a curtain wall select a panel of the curtain wall and use the Type Selector to change it to a wall Then insert the door in the wall See Wall Panels in Curtain Walls on page 779 After placement you can move doors from their current host to another host For more information see Rehosting on page 811 Door layout in plan Doo...

Page 840: ...rsor over a wall When placing the door in plan view press the space bar to flip the door swing 5 Click to place the door in the desired spot in the wall Finished door in elevation Related topics Changing the Door Type on page 798 Modifying the Door Position on page 799 Door Properties on page 799 Doors on page 797 Door Tags Door tags are displayed only if the entire door is visible If the door is ...

Page 841: ... contains information on common door properties However properties can vary among the different door types families Modifying Door Properties 1 From a plan view select the door and click Modify Doors tab Element panel Element Properties 2 In the Instance Properties dialog edit door instance parameters See Door Instance Properties on page 801 3 Click Edit Type to edit door type parameters See Door ...

Page 842: ...ame of the door manufacturer Manufacturer Comments about the door type Information can appear in a schedule Type Comments Sets a link to a manufacturer web page URL Provides a description for the door Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection Assembly Description Uniformat assembly code selected from hierarchical list Assembly Code A value to designate the partic...

Page 843: ...t change the door size Sill Height Construction The type of frame around the door Frame Type Materials and Finishes The material used for the frame Frame Material The finish applied to the frame and door Finish Identity Data Specific comments related to the door that are not already covered in the description or type comments Comments Applies a door number to any door for reference purposes This v...

Page 844: ...panel Window 2 Click Place Window tab Element panel and select a window type from the Type Selector drop down NOTE At this point you can load additional window types if necessary Click Place Window tab Model panel Load Family and navigate to the family file 3 On the Options Bar select Tag on Placement to tag the window automatically To include a tag leader select Leader and specify the length To l...

Page 845: ...ter names values and descriptions for windows Values are modifiable NOTE This topic contains information on the common window properties However properties can vary among the different window types families Modifying Window Properties 1 From a plan view select the window and click Modify Windows tab Element panel Element Properties 2 In the Instance Properties dialog edit window instance parameter...

Page 846: ... of the window Manufacturer Specific comments about the window type Type Comments A link to a manufacturer s web page URL A specific description of the window type Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection Assembly Description A specific value to designate the particular window This value must be unique for each window in a project Revit Architecture warns you if...

Page 847: ...window usually a numeric value This value must be unique for each window in a project Revit Architecture warns you if the number is already Mark used but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings tool Phasing The phase when the window was created Phase Created The phase when the window was demolished Phase Demolished Other The height above the level for the ...

Page 848: ...hoices include Beyond Centerline Demolished Hidden Overhead Hidden Lines Lines Medium Lines Thin Lines and Wide Lines If desired you can create additional line types using the Line Styles tool Line Styles are not available for model lines created in sketch mode For more information see Line Styles on page 494 4 Click Place Lines tab Draw panel and select a sketching option or Pick Lines to create ...

Page 849: ...tched lines in any view For example you might want to use one line style for grids and one for reference planes 1 After sketching lines select them and click Modify Lines tab Element panel Instance Properties The Instance Properties dialog appears 2 In the Instance box for Line Style select the desired line style 3 Click OK to exit the Instance Properties dialog NOTE You can change the look of the...

Page 850: ...the next control point select the end control press Tab then drag the end control point Model Line Properties You can modify properties for straight lines arc lines circles tangent lines and fillet lines Modifying Line Properties 1 From a plan view select the line and click Modify Lines tab Element panel Instance Properties 2 In the Instance Properties dialog edit line instance parameters 3 When y...

Page 851: ...arby Elements Graphics Sets the line style for the shape Line Style Switches whether the center mark for the arc appears You can dimension to the center mark of an arc Center mark visible Detail Line Dimensions The actual length of the line Length Identity Data If design options have been created this property indicates the design option the element exists in For more information on design options...

Page 852: ... Plane from the Placement panel See Work Plane based and Face based Component Placement Options on page 810 for descriptions of these options 6 Press Spacebar to rotate the component through its different snap points to other elements 7 Click to place the component NOTE After you place a component you can select it and then select the Moves With Nearby Elements option For example if you place a be...

Page 853: ... Plane To use this option an active work plane must be defined in the view You can place the component anywhere on the work plane For more information see The Families Guide on page 418 Rehosting You can move a hosted component or element from the current host to another host using the Rehost or Pick Host tools depending on the context Rehosting Doors and Windows 1 Select a door or window 2 Click ...

Page 854: ...n page 810 for descriptions of these options 4 Move the cursor to an appropriate host and click to place the element or component Rehosting Level based Components Level based components include furniture site components plumbing supplies and so on When you place a level based component on a host it remains on the host s infinite plane For example when you place a desk on a floor and then drag the ...

Page 855: ...ials tool See Materials on page 468 Layer Pattern Display The material on layers displays with fill patterns To see the fill pattern in a coarse scale view set the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern and Coarse Scale Fill Color properties of the compound structure To see the fill pattern in a medium or fine detail level change the Detail Level parameter of the View Properties to medium or fine See View Prop...

Page 856: ... the 2 layers have the same material If the 2 layers have different materials a line appears at the join Each layer must have a function assigned to it for Revit Architecture to match layers accurately Layers inside the core of one wall pass through layers of higher priority that are outside the core of the joined wall The layers in the core extend to the core of a joined wall even if the core lay...

Page 857: ...New and entering a name for the type 3 Click Insert to insert layers 4 For Function select a function for a layer 5 For Material select a material for a layer NOTE If you wish to create a new material for the list see the Materials tool Among other settings the Materials tool includes options for specifying cut patterns For more information about materials see Materials on page 468 For more inform...

Page 858: ...idual layers to wrap select the Wraps check box at the end of each layer NOTE Windows and doors have a type property called Wall Closure This property overrides the wrapping settings in the Edit Assembly dialog To set layer wrapping by editing the structure 1 For Structure click Edit 2 If you want wrapping at inserts for Wrapping at Inserts select Exterior Interior or Both 3 If you want end cap la...

Page 859: ...roperty The Edit Structure dialog opens inside the Type Properties dialog You can also preview the effects of edits to the layers by clicking Preview Flipping Orientation of Compound Walls As you are placing a compound wall in a plan view you can press the Spacebar to flip its orientation You can also select an existing wall in a plan view and control arrows appear If you click on the arrows the f...

Page 860: ...n you select a code and click OK the code appears in the Assembly code property and the corresponding description appears in the Assembly description property Assembly Code and Assembly Description are schedulable fields As a result you can create a schedule that groups components by Uniformat code for example To add a Uniformat assembly code to a type property 1 Select the model element and click...

Page 861: ...fied specifically to take this into account RELATED See View Range on page 247 Starting a Project with the Structural Template 1 Click New Project 2 In the New Project dialog under Template File click Browse 3 In the Choose Template dialog select the structural template and click Open NOTE The name and location of the structural template will vary depending on your install options and system setti...

Page 862: ... Properties dialog See Element Properties on page 120 After creating a family type open the dialog and click Load Dragging from Windows Explorer 1 Select the family or families in Windows Explorer and drag them onto either a project view or the Project Browser See Project Browser on page 93 2 When the Drop Files dialog appears select the option to Load dropped families into current project and cli...

Page 863: ... a grid before adding structural columns as they snap to grid lines see Adding Grids on page 1093 Sample grid for placing structural elements The grid lines also provide vertical planes for braces Click Home tab Datum panel Grid Structural Columns 821 ...

Page 864: ...nt to add an overall width and depth dimension to the plan view and label it This is useful if you are going to have a list of different size columns When you create a column Revit Architecture automatically adds a rotation control symbol to the lower left corner of the geometry in the plan view You notice it when you add the column to a project You can rotate the column in the plan view by clicki...

Page 865: ...When loaded into a project if you want the column to display in plan view clear the parameter Show family pre cut in plan views based on the cut plane of the project s plan view select the parameter Show family pre cut in plan views The column displays using the cut plane specified within the Family Editor plan view consistently regardless of the cut plane of the project s plan view 4 Click OK 5 S...

Page 866: ...the cut plane of the project s plan view has no affect on the display of the column Structural Column Family Parameters To access the Structural Column Family Parameters in the family editor click Create tab Family Properties panel Category and Parameters Verify that Structural Columns is selected as the Family Category The Family Parameters display at the bottom of the dialog Value Parameter Cont...

Page 867: ...n family as a shared family See Loading Families with Shared Shared Components into a Project on page 428 Displays the structural column family in a plan view using the cut plane specified in Show family pre cut in plan views the plan view of the family See Specifying How a Structural Column Displays in Plan View on page 823 Placing a Vertical Structural Column 1 Click Home tab Build panel Column ...

Page 868: ...ons Bar is shown in the following illustration You may pre select the Height top or Depth base of a structural column on the Options Bar 7 On the Options Bar select either Height or Depth from the list 8 In the Constraint list to the right of the Height Depth selection specify the constraint of the top or base of the column by Level or select Unconnected If you select Unconnected enter the Height ...

Page 869: ...ntersecting grids at the selected location In the absence of any grids press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column 90 degrees Rotating a column Placing Multiple Columns by Grid 1 Click Home tab Build panel Column drop down Structural Column 2 Click Place Structural Column tab Multiple panel On Grids 3 Select multiple grid intersections For more information see Selecting Elements on page 339 Placing Mu...

Page 870: ...ns Locking Columns to a Grid You can constrain the current position of vertical columns or the tops and bases of slanted columns to a grid This state allows you to move the grid and keep columns or ends in their respective orientation to their grid placement To lock vertical columns to a grid 1 Valid columns must be within a grid and have a valid column location mark To enable this state Select th...

Page 871: ...lumn is locked will move only that end of the column The column will lengthen or shorten to meet the new location of the grid Adding Structural Columns Inside Architectural Columns 1 Click Home tab Build panel Column drop down Structural Column 2 Click Place Structural Column tab Element panel and select a column type from the Type Selector drop down 3 Click Place Structural Column tab Multiple pa...

Page 872: ... 392 Modifying Elements on page 397 Locking Columns to a Grid on page 828 Structural Column Properties on page 834 Modifying Slanted Structural Columns on page 830 Modifying the Slant of Placed Structural Columns on page 832 Modifying Slanted Structural Columns Slanted columns incorporate a unique implementation of dragging tools The following controls are available when the slanted column is sele...

Page 873: ...elevation to reposition the associated top or base The column end will only move vertically Text controls are disabled when a column is attached to a structural floor floor roof reference plane or midjoined to or driven by a beam The behavior of text controls is dependent on the Column Style instance parameter see Structural Column Instance Properties on page 836 and is consistent with changing th...

Page 874: ...w of your project 2 Select the column to be modified 3 Click Modify Structural Columns tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Instance Properties 4 In the Instance Properties dialog under Constraints select a slanted column style Slanted End Point Driven or Slanted Angle Driven to define how the slant angle can be adjusted NOTE Other slanted column properties are available See Structural C...

Page 875: ...olumn is set to Slanted End Point Driven you adjust the elevation of the base of the column using the vertical arrow or text controls Endpoint Driven Editing The column adjusts its length and slant based on your parameter settings and endpoint adjustments Modifying the Slant of Placed Structural Columns 833 ...

Page 876: ...ructural Columns tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Type Properties To modify instance properties click Modify Structural Columns tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Instance Properties 3 In the resulting dialog edit structural column parameters as required NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all structural columns of this type in the project Click Duplicate to creat...

Page 877: ...nformation URL User can enter a description of the column here Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection a read only parameter Assembly Description A value that designates the particular beam possibly the shop mark This value must be unique for each element in a project Revit Architecture warns you if the number Type Mark is already used but allows you to continu...

Page 878: ...Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection a read only parameter Assembly Description A value that designates the particular beam possibly the shop mark This value must be unique for each element in a project Revit Architecture warns you if the number Type Mark is already used but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings to...

Page 879: ...raint to the grid See Locking Columns to a Grid on page 828 Moves With Grids The coordinate location of a vertical column on the project grid Column Location Mark Read only parameter specifying that the top of the column is midjoined to a beam or attached to a structural floor or roof Top is Attached Either Minimum Intersection Intersect Column Midline or Maximum Intersection Specifies the degree ...

Page 880: ...ies the end of the top attached beam from which to cal culate distance or ratio Top Attachment Reference End Either Distance or Ratio Determines if the base join of a slanted column is measured as a distance or a ratio of the length of the beam Base Attachment Type Distance from the referenced end of the base attached beam to the join location on the slanted column Base Attachment Distance The rat...

Page 881: ...at the top end of the column along the y axis Top Fy Translational release at the top end of the column along the z axis Top Fz Rotational release at the top end of the column along the x axis Top Mx Rotational release at the top end of the column along the y axis Top My Rotational release at the top end of the column along the z axis Top Mz Either fixed Pinned Bending Moment or User Defined User ...

Page 882: ...Top Vertical Projection The plane of the column used for analysis and design Bottom Vertical Projection Beams Beams are structural elements used for load bearing applications Elements of each beam are defined through the type properties of the specific beam family In addition various instance properties can be modified to define the functionality of the beam Sample beams You can attach beams to an...

Page 883: ...ck to specify the endpoint You can use the grid tool to add multiple beams to selected grids when columns are also present at the working level Beam between points To draw a beam to a specified length 1 Click Home tab Build panel Beam drop down Beam 2 Click in the drawing area to specify the start point 3 Use the mouse to sketch the beam moving the cursor toward the endpoint 4 Type a length A text...

Page 884: ...tyle of the beam in a coarse scale view Structural usage can be changed before or after the beam is placed Use the Object Styles dialog to change the structural usage For more information see Object Styles on page 493 The structural usage parameter can be included in a structural framing schedule allowing quantity calculation of girders joists purlins and horizontal bracing For more information se...

Page 885: ...agged beam For information about loading a family see Loading Families on page 427 Creating Beams You should add grids and columns before creating beams When adding a beam to a plan view you must set the bottom clip plane below the current level otherwise the beam is not visible in the view Add beams using one of the following methods Sketch individual beams Create a chain of beams Select grid lin...

Page 886: ...e cursor is snapping Beam start point snap to column Using the Grid Tool to Place Beams You can use the Grid tool to select grid lines to place beams automatically between other structural elements columns structural walls and other beams For example you might have 2 structural columns located on a grid line Beams are also added between columns and structural walls To place beams using the Grid to...

Page 887: ...the Grid tool 1 Click Home tab Build panel Beam drop down Beam 2 Click Place Beam tab Element panel and select a beam type from the Type Selector drop down 3 Click Place Beam tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Instance Properties to modify beam parameters 4 On the Options Bar select a value from the Structural Usage drop down list 5 Click Place Beam tab Multiple panel On Grids Creating...

Page 888: ...ple grids In the image shown below grids have been selected and beams have been added automatically between all columns walls and beams 7 Click Place Beam On Grid Lines Multiple Selection panel Finish Selection TIP You can also draw a pick box to select multiple grid lines In the image below notice how the beams were added between all columns walls and other supporting beams The pre existing beam ...

Page 889: ...eam supports new beams created on the grid line If a beam intersects but does not cross the grid line this beam is supported by a new beam created on the grid line For more information about beam structural usage based on which elements are being created see Structural Usage of Beams on page 842 Related topics Creating Beams on page 843 Structural Usage of Beams on page 842 Beam Properties on page...

Page 890: ...Properties dialog enter a value for the Start Level Offset instance parameter of the beam 4 Enter a value for the End Level Offset instance parameter of the beam and click OK 5 Verify that you have entered the correct offset values Example of sloped beam modelling NOTE A beam that has adjusted offset values will become disassociated or free from the current work plane Similarly any structural elem...

Page 891: ... extended or reshaped using graphical controls For more information see Editing Elements on page 339 To move a beam 1 In a project view select the beam 2 Drag the beam to a new location in the drawing area or use the arrow keys on your keyboard For more information see Moving Elements on page 372 To rotate a beam 1 Select the beam in a plan view 2 Click Modify Structural Framing tab Modify panel R...

Page 892: ...ope length Beam and column in plan with a beam handle at the column center Columns have an invisible bounding box that controls the beam handle location The following illustration presents a section view of a beam that is attached to a wall The beam handle is visible at the top center of the wall The beam is constrained by level As a result beam attachment can be changed in a horizontal direction ...

Page 893: ...small filled back to back triangles at each beam end when the beam is selected in the drawing area Beam and column in a plan with the shape handles displayed You can adjust the endpoint location of a beam using shape handles This lengthens or shortens the beam The other end of the beam remains fixed Beam Graphical Controls 851 ...

Page 894: ...tback settings See also Cutback on page 865 Moment Symbols The moment parameters of a beam Connection Start or Connection End enable the display of moment frame or cantilever connection symbols These parameters refer to the applicable beam endpoint The available options for these parameters are None Moment Frame or Cantilever Moment To display a moment symbol 1 Right click on a beam and select Ele...

Page 895: ...ted the tag rotates with its beam When deselected the tag orients itself with respect to the view frame Attachment Point Defines the initial location of the tag along a beam start middle or end and is the point the tag tracks as the beam is lengthened and shortened When enabled a tag leader extends from this point None Locates the tag in the middle of the beam by default Beam Annotations Tool The ...

Page 896: ...ions from beams The Horizontal End Offset and Vertical Offset settings adjust the distance of tags and spot elevations from their attachment points see Structural Framing Tag Families on page 853 by the entered measurement This measurement is representative of the drawing scale and its default is 0 horizontally and 3 8 vertically Annotation Location and Type The lower section of the Beam Annotatio...

Page 897: ...age 856 Structural Framing Tags This selection enables a pull down menu of available structural family tags specific to the selected location along the beam Specific family parameters determine which tags display Qualifying framing tags must have the following parameters see Structural Framing Tag Families on page 853 to be a viable annotations type Rotate with Component is selected The Attachment...

Page 898: ...ter Beam Elevation Project calculates elevation from the lowest level of the project Create modify types gives you the option of creating a custom spot elevation When selected the Family Type Properties dialog opens to edit the spot elevation tag Beam Elevation Relative enables the Relative Base drop down list which allows selection of the base relative level for elevation calculation NOTE Only on...

Page 899: ...ation Type dialog for spot elevations is a filter for defined elevations This option enables a filter that prevents spot elevations from being created if it equals the entered value The default setting is 0 units as defined by the project Beam Properties Several properties for beams including work plane materials and angle are accessible in the Instance Properties dialog Beam Properties 857 ...

Page 900: ...pe Beam Type Properties Steel Properties vary depending on the specified beam families during the installation process The following type properties apply to the steel beam families that load during a typical installation Description Name Structural Section area A Nominal weight W Dimensions Flange width bf Actual depth of section d k distance k k2 distance This is a read only value k2 Flange thic...

Page 901: ... categorizes the family type OmniClass Number The name from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System that best categorizes the family type OmniClass title Beam Type Properties Concrete Properties will vary depending on the beam families that are specified during the installation process The following type properties apply to the concrete beam families that load during a typical...

Page 902: ... level This is a read only value that is dependent on the work plane on which the beam was placed Reference Level The current plane on which elements are placed This is a read only value Work Plane The distance of the beam start point from the reference level Values entered here are reset when the member is pinned Read only when pinned Start Level Offset The distance of the beam endpoint from the ...

Page 903: ...nly The rebar cover distance from the beam top face Rebar Cover Top Face Applies to concrete beams only The rebar cover distance from the beam bottom face Rebar Cover Bottom Face Applies to concrete beams only The rebar cover distance from the beam to adjacent element faces Rebar Cover Other Faces Specifies the estimated reinforcement volume of the selected element This is a read only parameter th...

Page 904: ...f the beam along the y axis Start My Rotational release at the start end of the beam along the z axis Start Mz End release conditions Either Fixed Pinned Bending Moment or User Defined User Defined allows you to enable disable each of the end release conditions End Release Translational release at the end of the beam along the x axis End Fx Translational release at the end of the beam along the y ...

Page 905: ...nts Related topics Structural Columns on page 820 Beams on page 840 Braces on page 893 Bounding Boxes Before describing how structural framing elements join attach and cut back from one another it is important to understand how component families are perceived in a Revit Structure project Each element instance is enclosed in a bounding box Overview The bounding box is an invisible 3D rectangular s...

Page 906: ...tback of structural framing elements Curved Beams Curved beams present a unique instance of the bounding box The bounding box bends to meet the needs of the beam This provides accurate joining and cutback with the beam Beam to Column Joins The following illustration shows an example of a beam that is not centered on a column The beam handle of the beam in the illustration remains within a bounding...

Page 907: ...in relationships Fabricated materials require spatial and placement considerations for which they will be cut to fit This gap is evident when comparing the conceptual coarse symbolic view to the medium fine view of non concrete beams Revit Architecture adjusts the setback and cutback for non concrete beams based on default cutback settings Concrete beams take precedence in mixed material joins for...

Page 908: ...y Coarse level of detail symbolic KEY Cutback E Beam into which others are framed A Beam end if cutback F Cutback beam B Setback G Common endpoint in join C Cutback D Bounding Box Considerations Cutback is affected by the bounding box of an element Notice how the beams framed into the L beam adjust based on its rotation An L beam framed into by 2 beams 866 Chapter 14 Structural Modeling ...

Page 909: ...ng Beam Geometry Using Shape Handles on page 851 to manually configure cutback Beam to Beam Cutback Setback and cutback apply when connecting beams Beams connect at their endpoints and multiple beams can connect to one endpoint An end join connection is achieved when 2 or more endpoints snap together or when the endpoint of a beam is an origin point when you draw another beam Structural beams draw...

Page 910: ...e common column and will cut back from the column accordingly The column including its bounding box must have overlapping geometry with the beams of the join for the beams to cut back Beams joined to columns always adjust for setback and cutback yet vertical columns cannot manually be adjusted with the Beam Column Join Editor 868 Chapter 14 Structural Modeling ...

Page 911: ...ickness Column Cutback Columns can be set back and cut back using the Beam Column Editor With the exception of the following rules columns act as beams in the default setback and cutback settings Currently columns cut back from beams but not from one another Beams will frame into a column when joined at the column top Mitering between beams and columns is not currently implemented When multiple cu...

Page 912: ...endicular to the centerline of the element The beam into which others frame does not cut back while its connecting beams cut back as warranted This beam will cut back from a neighboring beam When cut back a beam will adjust in a way that prevents it from being closer to any other beam participating in the join by a distance equalling the cutback The following examples detail both coarse and medium...

Page 913: ...e family type Any other beams that share the join will cut back accordingly Beams in a co planar join share the same plane and have unadjusted cross sectional rotation parameters Beams that share the same vertical plane must have the same cross sectional rotation to have a miter join The vertical plane is a plane perpendicular to the work plane A miter join will be created by default for beams tha...

Page 914: ...applicable see Column Cutback on page 869 3 On the Options Bar filter the visible join controls based on Steel Wood Precast Concrete and Other materials if necessary 4 Click the cutback arrow controls to change the cutback in the direction the arrow is pointing If a beam is cut back the arrow points toward the join If a beam is not cut back the arrow points away from the join 872 Chapter 14 Struct...

Page 915: ...re created by removing the cutback from 2 end joined beams 1 Open a project to a plan or 3D view 2 Click Modify tab Edit Geometry panel Beam Column Joins The editing mode activates showing cutback arrow controls at the end join of beams 3 On the Options Bar filter the visible join controls based on Steel Wood Precast Concrete and Other materials if necessary 4 Click the appropriate arrow controls ...

Page 916: ... to create a beam system using either the one click method or by sketching The one click beam system method is active by default See Creating a One Click Beam System on page 875 You can also sketch beam systems into a model See Creating a Structural Beam System on page 876 The Option Bar provides the beam system parameters for both creation methods such as beam type justification and layout requir...

Page 917: ...terns on page 884 WARNING Curved walls and beams can be used to create a loop but cannot be the direction defining members in the Beam System To create a beam system using one click 1 Click Home tab Build panel Beam drop down Beam System 2 On the Options Bar select a beam type NOTE If you would like to sketch the beam system by hand click the Sketch button located on the Options Bar to open the Cr...

Page 918: ... specify the beam direction and beam system properties such as spacing justification and beam type For more information see Beam System Layout Rules and Patterns on page 884 To create a structural beam system 1 Click Home tab Build panel Beam drop down Beam System 2 Click Place Beam System tab Sketch panel Create Sketch 3 Define the beam system boundary For more information see Defining the Bounda...

Page 919: ...tch a beam system in a 3D view it is recommended that you create the beam system in a plan view to achieve greater accuracy and to ensure that the lines are on a parallel plane After the beam system boundary is defined the beams are placed inside the specified area according to the pattern specified in the beam system properties For more information see Modifying Beam System Properties on page 891...

Page 920: ...rt member picked 5 Pick the remaining lines that define the beam system boundary NOTE The lines must result in a closed loop Use the editing tools Trim Extend and so on on the Options Bar as necessary to create a closed loop of sketch lines For more information see Editing Elements on page 339 Beam system with entire boundary selected After specifying the beam system boundary you can Modify the Be...

Page 921: ...use the sketching tools to define the perimeter of a beam system You can also use these tools to modify a beam system boundary created using the Pick Supports method 1 Click Home tab Build panel Beam drop down Beam System 2 Click Place Beam System tab Sketch panel Create Sketch 3 Click Create Beam System Boundaries tab Draw panel Line to sketch or click Create Beam System Boundaries tab Draw panel...

Page 922: ...formation see Specifying Beam Direction in a Beam System on page 883 Modify the beam system Use either the Pick Support or Lines tool to sketch an opening in the beam system For more information see Cutting an Opening in a Beam System on page 881 5 Click Create Beam System Boundary tab Beam System panel Finish Beam System Floor plan and 3D view of completed structural beam system 880 Chapter 14 St...

Page 923: ...rea and support structure is identical However make sure the pasted copy attaches to all supports You may need to modify the pasted beam system Add a beam system to Quadrants 1 and 3 and mirror it to Quadrants 2 and 4 by selecting Grid 2 as the mirror axis This process has the same limitations as copying and pasting You may need to modify the system and re pick the supports to ensure that the syst...

Page 924: ... Draw panel Line Define the boundary of the opening 3 Using the additional sketching tools available on the Draw panel and Options Bar sketch a complete loop within the beam system boundary Beam system boundary with sketched opening 4 Click Modify Structural Beam Systems Edit Boundary tab Beam System panel Finish Beam System Beam system with opening 882 Chapter 14 Structural Modeling ...

Page 925: ...hile either sketching or modifying a beam system boundary 3 Click Modify Structural Beam Systems Edit Boundary Draw panel Line or Pick Lines If you select Line sketch a line or pick a model line to define beam direction that is independent of the sketched boundary lines This line has no other function than to define the direction of the beams in a beam system and therefore cannot be used to close ...

Page 926: ...ing layout rule value adjacent beams move to maintain the distance between them Specify number of beams 3 Enter a value for the number of beams that you want in the beam system This option is active only when you select the Fixed Number layout rule Specify spacing 4 Enter a value representing the distance between each beam This option is active only when you select the Fixed Distance Maximum Spaci...

Page 927: ...al and cantilevered The following example provides a method for creating a cantilevered beam system Begin with a bay that is similar to the one shown in the following illustration of a partial plan view Partial Plan View 1 Click Home tab Build panel Beam drop down Beam System 2 Click Create Beam System Boundary tab Draw panel Pick Supports to select the beam system boundary or Pick Lines to sketch...

Page 928: ...ined by its sketch lines 3D beam system Note that sketched beam lines Can only define slope when they are created using the Pick Supports tool That have a beam as their support always define slope That have a wall as their support have a Defines slope property that you can edit The default value is true 886 Chapter 14 Structural Modeling ...

Page 929: ...o a plane defined by the endpoints of the 2 nearest sketch lines that do define slope Beam system elevated by nearest sketch lines If there are no lines in the sketch that define slope the beam system behaves like a 2D beam system To add a 3D beam system 1 Click Home tab Build panel Beam drop down Beam System 2 Click Create Beam System Boundary tab Element panel Beam System Properties 3 In the Ins...

Page 930: ...e cursor on a beam system in the view to highlight it 6 After highlighting the beam system click to place the tag If you selected Auto place the tag is placed at the center of the beam system If you did not select Auto place move the cursor to the desired location on the beam system and click to place it NOTE The Structural Beam System Tag rfa family includes a label that changes the beam spacing ...

Page 931: ...Structural Beam Systems The Reset Structural Beam System tool recreates a beam system using the original beam system parameters This tool can be used to undo changes to properties of individual beams in the system After the beam system is reset all beams in the system will have uniform parameters and be in the default locations Specifically the tool has the following reset effects Beams that have ...

Page 932: ...ystem will remain attached to their original supports until the beam system is reset Original beam system Beam system with changes Using the Reset Structural Beam System tool 1 In the drawing area click on the beam system you want to reset 2 Click Modify Structural Beam Systems tab Edit panel Edit Boundary 3 Click Modify Structural Beam Systems Edit Boundary tab Adjust panel Reset System 890 Chapt...

Page 933: ...y 3 Make any necessary changes with the available sketch tools and click Modify Structural Beam Systems Edit Boundary tab Beam System panel Finish Beam System Modifying Beam System Properties You can modify many of the properties for beam systems To modify beam system properties 1 If you are currently sketching click Modify Structural Beam Systems Edit Boundary tab Element panel Beam System Proper...

Page 934: ... Enter a description Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code se lection This is a read only value Assembly description A value that designates the particular beam possibly the shop mark This value must be unique for each element in a project Type Mark Revit Architecture warns you if the number is already used but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning us...

Page 935: ...ng the Review Warnings tool See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1415 Phasing Indicates in which phase the beam system was created See Project Phasing on page 1331 Phase Created Indicates in which phase the beam system was demolished See Project Phasing on page 1331 Phase Demolished Braces Braces are diagonal members connected to beams and columns Like beams you create braces by snapping the poi...

Page 936: ... metric library and open the Structural Framing folder 4 Select a brace type folder either Steel Light Gauge Steel Concrete or Wood and click Open NOTE When you open a framing family you can select multiple brace sizes In the Specify Types dialog that displays after you click Open press and hold the Ctrl key when selecting brace sizes If necessary you can filter the Catalog by clicking the arrow a...

Page 937: ...ation see Loading Structural Braces on page 894 3 Click Home tab Structure panel Brace 4 Click Place Brace tab Element panel and select the appropriate brace from the Type Selector drop down 5 To edit the properties of the brace before adding the brace to your model click Place Brace tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Instance Properties 6 In the drawing area highlight the snapping poi...

Page 938: ...race in the project Modifying Braces Controlling Brace Attachments After adding a brace element you can modify the brace properties to control how the brace maintains position along a beam Each brace endpoint can be maintained positionally with a beam by either a distance or a length ratio from the beam endpoints If you modify the position or length of the attached beam the brace adapts to the cha...

Page 939: ...her option enter a value for Start Attachment Ratio Property Also if the brace start point is placed on a column this option is not available To specify the end of referenced element 4 Select a value for End of Referenced Element Property This specifies at which end of the Referenced Element the beam the Distance or Ratio is measured from NOTE If the brace end is attached to a column or a wall you...

Page 940: ...ype parameters NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all braces of this type in the project You can click Duplicate to create a new brace type Steel Brace Type Properties The following table lists the beam type properties for a typical steel brace Description Name Structural The section area A Defines the shape of the selected type Applies to HSS family type only Shape The nominal weight W D...

Page 941: ...ady used but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings tool See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1415 The pricing of the brace Cost The number from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System that best categorizes the family type OmniClass Number The name from Table 23 of the OmniClass Construction Classification System that best categoriz...

Page 942: ... brace end attached to the beam End Attachment Type Ratio percentage of separation of brace finish end to a designated beam end Ap plies to the brace end attached to the beam End Attachment Ratio Designated end start or finish of Referenced Element beam to which start end of brace is attached Applies to the brace end attached to the beam End of Referenced Element Dimensions The distance between th...

Page 943: ...Release The translational release at the end of the brace along the local x axis End Fx The translational release at the end of the brace along the local y axis End Fy The translational release at the end of the brace along the local z axis End Fz The rotational release at the end of the brace along the local x axis End Mx The rotational release at the end of the brace along the local y axis End M...

Page 944: ...chment Level Reference The elevation of the start end referenced from the start attachment level ref erence Start Attachment Elevation The constraining level of the finish end of the brace End Attachment Level Reference The elevation of the finish end referenced from the end attachment level ref erence End Attachment Elevation Applies to concrete beams only The rebar cover distance from the column...

Page 945: ...ranslational release at the start end of the brace along the local z axis Start Fz The rotational release at the start end of the brace along the local x axis Start Mx The rotational release at the start end of the brace along the local y axis Start My The rotational release at the start end of the brace along the local z axis Start Mz Specifies the end release condition either Fixed Pinned Bendin...

Page 946: ...elements A beam opening is applied to a face that is vertical or horizontal through the major or minor axis typically vertical or horizontal of the beam A beam opening cuts through the entire element for example it cannot cut only one flange of a wide flange beam Two perpendicular planes for openings are provided by each beam brace or column These planes align with the major and minor axis of the ...

Page 947: ...beam brace or structural column using the rectangle option you can specify a radius which allows you to sketch rectangles with fillets This helps to avoid sharp corners on the opening that can concentrate stresses Beam opening with radius For more information see Sketching on page 303 4 Click Finish Sketch Openings in a Structural Beam Brace or Structural Column 905 ...

Page 948: ...e bottom of wall derives from the Base Offset value A structural wall differs from non structural walls by its Structural Usage instance parameter When adding a structural wall by default Revit Architecture sets the wall instance parameter Structural Usage to Bearing You can change this parameter at any time by modifying the instance parameters of the Wall Family Type The Structural Usage options ...

Page 949: ...ural wall from the Options Bar Select either Height or Depth from the list box then use the Constraint list to the right of Height Depth selection to set the constraint of the top or base of the wall either by Level or as Unconnected If you select Unconnected specify the height or depth by entering the value to the right of the constraint list The Unconnected Height Depth measurement is relative t...

Page 950: ...odify Wall tab Element panel Type Selector drop down Interior and Exterior Structural Wall Properties The properties of a wall vary depending on whether it is an interior or an exterior wall In addition when you modify type properties all walls of that type are modified When you modify instance properties the properties of a single instance of a wall are modified NOTE When you modify parameters th...

Page 951: ...fy Wall panel Edit Profile If you select a wall in a plan view the Go To View dialog displays Select an elevation view and click Open View Wall displayed as model lines 3 Edit the wall as desired Delete the lines and then sketch a completely different shape Split the existing lines and add arcs Draw openings or holes Wall modified Modifying Structural Walls 909 ...

Page 952: ...hen you define a wall shape on a wall that is not horizontal or vertical in a plan view you should draw a section parallel to the wall before sketching in the elevation The Go To View dialog displays Revit Architecture suggests the section view as the optimal view for editing the sketch When you edit the elevation profile of a wall attached to another element the wall temporarily reverts to its or...

Page 953: ...g Arc Walls You can resize arc walls using middle and end controls 1 Select an arc wall 2 Drag the end controls to change the arc length 3 To change the arc radius while keeping it concentric select Keep Concentric on the Options Bar Leave this option deselected to retain existing end conditions such as endpoint location or tangency to a straight wall 4 Drag the middle control Modifying Structural...

Page 954: ...ll has a top constraint that is explicit dimensions appear from the base constraint only Structural Wall Properties You can modify many properties for structural walls as shown in the following 2 sections Structural Wall Type Properties Description Name Construction Specifies a wall layer Select the Edit button to add change or delete a wall layer Structure Specifies the layer wrapping of walls at...

Page 955: ...te Click in the value box to open the Keynotes dialog See Keynotes on page 1117 Keynote The manufacturer internal number Model The wall manufacturer Manufacturer A field for entering general comments about the wall type This information can be included in a schedule Type Comments A link to a web page that may contain type specific information URL A description of the wall Description A description...

Page 956: ...nstraint enabled only when the top constraint is set to a level Top Offset Indicates whether the top of the wall is attached to another component such as a structural floor This is a read only value Top is Attached Indicates the distance you have moved the top of the layers in a wall See Compound Structure on page 813 This parameter is enabled when the layers of a wall are set to extendable Top Ex...

Page 957: ...hase Demolished Analytical Model Changes the visibility of the wall analytical model Enable Analytical Model The horizontal plane of the wall used for analysis and design Horizontal Projection The top vertical plane of the wall used for analysis and design Top Vertical Projection The bottom vertical plane of the wall used for analysis and design Bottom Vertical Projection Wall Foundations Wall fou...

Page 958: ...or with other wall foundations For more information about the Join Geometry tool see Joining Geometry on page 406 4 Optionally select a foundation and access its type properties You can specify Structural Usage either Retaining or Bearing If you select Retaining you can specify values for Toe Length Heel Length and Foundation Thickness Toe and heel length define the width of the foundation For mor...

Page 959: ...at Bottom You can then display this value in a view by tagging the foundation with the Structural Foundation Tag with Elevation tag It is available from the family library under Structural Annotations NOTE The wall foundation is created at the bottom of the selected wall If the created wall foundation is beyond the view range of the active view you will be prompted with a warning To see the founda...

Page 960: ...s small filled circles that indicate where the end of the selected wall foundation is attached End controls will snap to other visible references You can also use the end controls to resize the footing beyond its wall when necessary Select the wall foundation to be resized and the end controls will appear 918 Chapter 14 Structural Modeling ...

Page 961: ...g a footing to accommodate a run of stairs Default End Extensions You can set the default extension length of wall foundations in your project This is set in the Wall Foundation Type Properties See Wall Foundation Type Properties Retaining on page 921 and Wall Foundation Type Properties Bearing on page 922 Modifying Wall Foundations 919 ...

Page 962: ...roperties Retaining on page 921 and Wall Foundation Type Properties Bearing on page 922 Under the Dimensions section clear Do Not Break at Inserts The value will be set for the entire project Wall Foundation Properties There are 2 types of wall foundations for structural use bearing and retaining You can modify the properties for both types including heel length toe length foundation thickness and...

Page 963: ...stance the foundation will extend beyond the end of the wall Default End Extension Length Selecting this parameter forces the foundation to be continuous Do Not Break At Inserts Identity Data The manufacturer internal number Model The foundation manufacturer Manufacturer A field for placing general comments about the foundation type This information can be included in a schedule Type Comments A li...

Page 964: ... Inserts Identity Data The manufacturer internal number Model The foundation manufacturer Manufacturer A field for entering general comments about the foundation type This information can be included in a schedule Type Comments A link to a web page that may contain type specific information URL Enter an optional description of the wall foundation Description Describes the assembly based on the ass...

Page 965: ...y the family parameter Cap see Family Category and Parameters on page 433 The following image shows the difference between the Cap parameter enabled in red and disabled in green The Elevation at Bottom measurement is taken from this setting This is a read only parameter Identity Data A field for placing general comments about the foundation type Comments A label created for the foundation This val...

Page 966: ...y parameter Volume Indicates the elevation used for tagging the Bottom of Foundation Elevation at Bottom This parameter is affected by the family parameter Cap see Family Category and Parameters on page 433 The following image shows the difference between the Cap parameter enabled in red and disabled in green The Elevation at Bottom measurement is taken from this setting This is a read only parame...

Page 967: ...d Foundations Isolated foundations are standalone families that are part of the structural foundation category Several types of isolated foundations can be loaded from the family library including pile caps with multiple piles rectangular piles and single piles Pile caps with multiple piles Rectangular and triangular pile caps Isolated Foundations 925 ...

Page 968: ...2 Click Place Isolated Foundation tab Element panel and select an isolated foundation type from the Type Selector drop down 3 Place the isolated foundation in either a plan or 3D view Rectangular isolated foundation The Bottom Elevation of structural foundations footings is reported in a read only instance parameter called Elevation at Bottom You can then display this value in a view by tagging th...

Page 969: ...anges made to type parameters affect all isolated foundations of this type in the project You can click Duplicate to create a new isolated foundation type Isolated Foundation Type Properties Description Name Dimensions Specifies the width of the isolated foundation type Applies to the Pile Cap Pile family type Width Specifies the length of the isolated foundation type Applies to the Pile Cap Pile ...

Page 970: ...oundation Instance Properties Description Name Constraints The level to which the slab is constrained Level The level to which the host of the isolated slab is constrained Host Specifies the elevation of the top of the isolated foundation relative to its level Offset Changes the column constraint to grid Moves With Grids Materials and Finishes Specifies the material of the isolated foundation Mate...

Page 971: ...ing it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings tool See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1415 Phasing Indicates in which phase the component was created See Project Phasing on page 1331 Phase Created Indicates in which phase the component was demolished See Project Phasing on page 1331 Phase Demolished Structural Analysis Indicates the property type for structural analysis Select eithe...

Page 972: ...ketch it in a 3D view provided the work plane of the 3D view is set to the work plane in which you want to place the structural floor The top of the structural floor is offset relative to the level at which it is placed For information about Height Offset from Level and other Structural Floor parameters see Structural Floor Properties on page 938 For information about structural floors and hidden ...

Page 973: ...pecify an offset for slab edges in the Offset text box on the Options Bar NOTE Instead of picking walls you can sketch a structural floor Use the sketch tools on the Create Floor Boundary tab Draw panel to form the boundary of the structural floor The sketch must form a closed loop or boundary condition See Sketching on page 303 7 Click Create Floor Boundary tab Floor panel Finish Floor Adding a S...

Page 974: ...e filled half arrows Direction of span To rotate a span direction symbol 1 Select the span direction component 2 Click Modify Span Direction Symbol tab Modify panel Rotate 3 Click a start angle for the rotation of the span direction 4 Click an end angle to complete the angle of rotation To align the span direction to a structural floor beam or grid line 1 Select the span direction component 2 Clic...

Page 975: ...Floor sketch with slope arrow Select the slope arrow and click Create Floor Boundary tab Draw panel Properties Do one of the following methods To create a slope by setting height at tail 1 For Specify select Height at Tail 2 Specify a value for Height Offset at Tail This value determines how high above the level the slope arrow begins 3 Optionally specify a level for Level at Tail to start the slo...

Page 976: ...lel floor lines that you sketched and click Modify Floors Edit Boundary Draw panel Properties For Defines constant height property select Yes for both lines This enables the Offset from Base property Then select the lines individually and specify a value for the Offset from Base property for each of the lines Method 3 Select a single sketch line and click Modify Floors Edit Boundary Draw panel Pro...

Page 977: ...oundary tab Draw panel sketch the structural floor opening 4 Click Create Opening Boundary tab Opening by Face panel Finish Opening Drop Panels You can add drop panels to reinforce a structural floor at column locations This is achieved by sketching a second smaller structural floor 1 Open a plan view with a structural floor over a column Drop Panels 935 ...

Page 978: ...st form a closed loop or boundary condition 4 Click Create Floor Boundary tab Floor panel Finish Floor 5 View the drop panel in an elevation or cross section view 6 Select the new drop panel 7 Right click the new drop panel and select Element Properties 8 In the Instance Properties dialog adjust the Constraint parameters of the drop panel so that it is at the correct elevation in your model 936 Ch...

Page 979: ...ctural floor properties or by directly changing structural floor geometry in the drawing area To modify a structural floor before you add it you must select the structural floor type in the type selector When you activate the Structural Floor tool to place structural floors you can select different types of structural floors in the Type Selector Modifying Structural Floors 937 ...

Page 980: ...uction User selects Edit button to add change or delete structural floor layers See Com pound Structure on page 813 Structure Indicates the thickness of a structural floor type which is determined by the cumu lative thickness of its layers See Shape Editing for Structural Floors Roofs and Floors on page 944 Default Thickness Specifies an additional offset from the top exterior rebar cover This all...

Page 981: ... used but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings tool See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1415 The pricing of the structural floor Cost Structural Floor Instance Properties Description Name Constraints The level to which the structural floor is constrained Level Specifies the elevation of the top of the structural floor relative to the Level parameter ...

Page 982: ...s about the structural floor Comments A label created for the structural floor Possible use shop mark This value must be unique for each element in a project Revit Architecture warns you when the Mark number value is already used but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings tool See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1415 Phasing Indicates in which phase th...

Page 983: ...ng walls you can sketch a foundation slab Use the sketch tools on the Create Floor Boundary tab Draw panel to form the boundary of the foundation slab The sketch must form a closed loop or boundary condition See Sketching on page 303 7 Click Create Floor Boundary tab Floor panel Finish Floor 8 Click the foundation and select the desired Foundation family type on the Family drop down list NOTE Foun...

Page 984: ...Scale Fill Pattern Applies a color to the fill pattern for a slab in a coarse scale view Coarse Scale Fill Color Identity Data Add or edit the slab keynote Click in the value box to open the Keynotes dialog See Keynotes on page 1117 Keynote The manufacturer internal number Model The slab manufacturer Manufacturer A field for placing general comments about the slab type This information can be incl...

Page 985: ...he slab from the horizontal plane Slope Indicates the slab perimeter This is a read only parameter Perimeter Indicates the area of the slab This is a read only parameter Area Indicates the volume of the slab This is a read only parameter Volume Indicates the width of the slab if rectangular This is a read only parameter Width Indicates the length of the slab if rectangular This is a read only para...

Page 986: ...dation the slab will provide support for other elements connected to it If set to Slab on Grade the slab will only support itself Structural Usage Analytical Model The plane of the slab used for analysis and design Analytical Projection Plane Shape Editing for Structural Floors Roofs and Floors You can use shape editing tools to manipulate the surface of either an existing horizontal structural fl...

Page 987: ... to another roof and the roof cannot be a curtain roof If either of these conditions is not met you cannot use the slab shape edit buttons NOTE If these conditions are violated later by element editing the slab shape edit will cause an error with a callback allowing the user to reset the slab shape edit You can use the following shape edit tools on the Modify Floors tab Shape Editing panel Sub Ele...

Page 988: ...e to modify the location or elevation NOTE If you place the cursor over the structural floor you can press Tab to pick specific sub elements Standard selection methods also apply See Selecting Multiple Elements on page 340 Dragging a blue arrow moves the point vertically Dragging a red square shape handle moves the point horizontally 4 Click the text control to enter a precise height value for the...

Page 989: ... Add Split Line tool to add linear edges and to split the existing face of a structural floor into smaller sub regions 1 Select the structural floor you want to modify 2 Click Modify Floors tab Shape Editing panel Add Split Line 3 Select a vertex edge face or point anywhere on the structural floor to start the split line NOTE Start points and endpoints can be added anywhere on the face of the stru...

Page 990: ...created using the endpoint elevations from the picked reference The elevations are moved up from the bottom face to the top face of the structural floor or roof using the structural floor or roof thickness Using the Curved Edge Condition Tool Structural Floors drawn with arc segments can be altered using structural floor shape editing tools The Curved Edge Condition tool is an additional tool spec...

Page 991: ...stance Properties dialog Using the Reset Shape Tool To remove structural floor shape modifications and reset the element geometry to its original state click Click Modify Floors tab Shape Editing panel Reset Shape Deleting Shape Modifiers To delete shape edit elements 1 Select the modified structural floor 2 Click Modify Floors tab Shape Editing panel Modify Sub Elements 3 Click on the shape edit ...

Page 992: ...s layer the top face of the roof or structural floor slopes and the bottom stays in a horizontal plane creating a variable thickness structural floor NOTE There is a Thickness property for structural floors If the structural floor has a structural floor shape edit and if the structural floor type contains a variable layer then this parameter can be used to set the structural floor to a uniform thi...

Page 993: ...Modify Sub Elements Tool on page 946 Structural Component Tags Structural components can be annotated with tag components as needed Some structural component instances are annotated by default when they are placed For example beam size is displayed when you add a beam to your model Structural framing tag families are available in the Annotations folder of the Library folder You have a choice of lo...

Page 994: ...952 ...

Page 995: ... presentation Site Settings You can modify a project s global site settings at any time You can define contour line intervals add user defined contour lines and select the section cut material Defining Site Settings 1 Click Massing Site tab Model Site panel 2 To display contour lines in a site plan do the following Select At Intervals Of and enter a value for contour line intervals This value dete...

Page 996: ... page 493 NOTE If you clear At Intervals of custom contour lines still display 4 Under Section Graphics do the following For Section cut material select a material to use to display the site in a section view Appropriate materials include Site Earth Site Grass and Site Sand See Searching for a Material on page 470 For Elevation of poche base enter a value to control the depth of the cross section ...

Page 997: ...he Topography category Subcategory Section Graphics Sets the material that displays in a section view Section cut material Controls the depth of the cross section of earth for example 30 feet or 25 meters This value controls the poche depth for all topography elements in your project Elevation of poche base Property Data Specifies the display of angular values on property line tags Angle Display S...

Page 998: ... option effectively you may want to work in a shaded 3D view 5 Click in the drawing area to place points If needed change the elevation on the Options Bar as you place additional points 6 To complete the surface click Finish Surface If you need to modify the toposurface select it and click Modify Topography tab Surface panel Edit Surface Edit the sketch and click Finish Surface Related topics Spli...

Page 999: ...ides contour data using a regularized grid of elevation points The points file must contain x y and z coordinate numbers as the first numeric values in the file The file must also be in a comma delimited file format a CSV or TXT file Additional information in the file such as a point name is ignored Any additional numeric information for a point must occur after the x y and z coordinate values If ...

Page 1000: ...can use subregions to draw parking lots on a graded surface roads or islands Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces It merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties such as material To add a toposurface subregion 1 Click Massing Site tab Modify Site panel Subregion Revit Architecture enters sketch mode 2 Click Create Subregion Boundary t...

Page 1001: ...en a site plan or 3D view 2 Click Massing Site tab Modify Site panel Split Surface 3 In the drawing area select the toposurface to split Revit Architecture enters sketch mode 4 Click Split Surface tab Draw panel Pick Lines or use other sketch tools to split the toposurface You cannot pick toposurface lines with the Pick Lines tool You can pick other valid lines such as walls 5 To sketch the split ...

Page 1002: ...rging To merge toposurfaces 1 Click Massing Site tab Modify Site panel Merge Surfaces 2 If desired on the Options Bar clear Remove points on common edges This option removes excess points that were inserted after a surface was split The option is selected by default 3 Select the primary surface 4 Select the secondary surface The 2 surfaces merge into one Graded Regions To create a graded region yo...

Page 1003: ...erty has the value of the current phase Related topics Reporting Cut and Fill Volumes on a Site on page 964 Toposurface Subregions on page 958 Toposurface and Subregion Properties on page 961 Toposurface and Subregion Properties Description Name Materials and Finishes Select the surface material from the list You can create your own toposurface ma terial Topographical surfaces do not support mater...

Page 1004: ... lines that can report square footage or acreage Load the tags from the Annotations folder of the Revit Architecture family library The tags are Property Tag Acres rfa acreage Property Tag SF rfa square footage and M_Property Tag rfa metric Exporting You can export property line area information when you export your project to an ODBC database For more information about creating an ODBC database s...

Page 1005: ... Type select Arc For Radius enter a value The radius value must be greater than half the length of the line segment The larger the radius the larger the circle becomes resulting in a flatter arc For L R select L if the arc appears to the left of the line segment Select R if the arc appears to the right of the line segment 6 Insert additional lines as needed 7 Click Up and Down to modify the order ...

Page 1006: ...l method of reporting cut fill values There are other ways to report values including sketching a new surface within an existing surface 1 Create a toposurface in a site plan view See Toposurfaces on page 955 2 Select the finished toposurface 3 Click Modify Topography tab Element panel Element Properties 4 In the Instance Properties dialog set Phase Created to a phase earlier than the view s phase...

Page 1007: ...in your schedule To select the surface under the pad press Tab to highlight it or turn off the pad s visibility See Overriding Visibility and Graphic Display of Individual Elements on page 199 Building Pads You can add a building pad to a toposurface and then modify the pad s structure and depth You add a building pad by sketching a closed loop on a toposurface After sketching the pad you can spec...

Page 1008: ...ite tab Model Site panel Building Pad 3 Click Create Pad Boundary tab Draw panel and use the draw tools to sketch the building pad as a closed loop See Sketching on page 303 4 Click Create Pad Boundary tab Element panel Building Pad Properties 5 In the Instance Properties dialog set the Height Offset From Level and other building pad properties as needed See Building Pad Properties on page 968 6 C...

Page 1009: ... Architecture can match layers accurately Layers can be assigned for the following functions Structure A layer that supports the remainder of the building pad Substrate A material that acts as a foundation for another material Thermal Air Layer A layer that provides insulation and prevents air penetration Finish 1 A finish layer for example the top surface of the building pad Finish 2 A finish lay...

Page 1010: ...n page 685 Building Pad Properties You can change the properties of building pad types and building pad instances Modifying Building Pad Properties 1 Open a site or plan view 2 Select the building pad NOTE Use Tab to cycle through the selection options Selection options are displayed on the left side of the status bar 3 Click Modify Pads tab Element panel Element Properties To change the propertie...

Page 1011: ...e slope arrow line The default value is 0 Height Offset at Tail Ends the slope arrow at the designated level Level at Head Sets the end height of the slope arrow line Revit Architecture uses both parameters to calculate the rise of the slope Height Offset at Head Dimensions Sets the slope angle for the selected building pad The default value is 0 This para meter is enabled when Defines Slope Prope...

Page 1012: ...ing component type from the Type Selector drop down 4 Place the cursor on the toposurface and click to place the component Place as many components as desired You can create an array of parking components See Using Arrays of Elements on page 365 5 After placing the components click Selection panel Modify 6 Select the parking components 7 Click Modify Parking tab Host panel Pick Host 8 Select the t...

Page 1013: ...omponents To pick a host for the components optional 5 After placing the components click Selection panel Modify 6 Select the components 7 Click Modify element tab Host panel Pick Host 8 Select the host Related topics Toposurfaces on page 955 Parking Components on page 970 Plants and Entourage on page 1203 Contour Line Labels You can label contour lines to indicate their elevation Contour labels d...

Page 1014: ... the display characteristics of labels for contour lines For example you can use a different font size or typeface setting such as bold or italics Also you can specify label units and whether labels display for primary contour lines only or for both primary and secondary contour lines To change the appearance of contour line labels 1 Open a site plan view 2 Right click a contour line label and cli...

Page 1015: ...abel text Italic Applies underlining to label text Underline If selected only the primary contour lines are labeled See Site Settings on page 953 Label primary contours only Specifies units and rounding properties for contour lines By default this option uses the project settings Units Format Specifies the source of the elevation base project shared or relative Elevation Base Contour Label Type Pr...

Page 1016: ...974 ...

Page 1017: ...A room is a subdivision of space within a building model based on elements such as walls floors roofs and ceilings These elements are defined as room bounding Revit Architecture refers to these room bounding elements when computing the perimeter area and volume of a room In Revit Architecture you can turn on off the Room Bounding parameter of many elements You can also use room separation lines to...

Page 1018: ...u add model elements the area boundaries do not necessarily change automatically You can specify how area boundaries behave Some area boundaries are static That is they do not change automatically and must be changed manually Some area boundaries are dynamic They stay connected with underlying model elements If the model elements move the area boundaries move with them A floor plan divided into pr...

Page 1019: ...t specify the level from which to measure the upper boundary of the room See Defining the Upper Boundary of a Room on page 993 For example if you are adding a room to a Level 1 floor plan and you want the room to extend from Level 1 to Level 2 or some point above Level 2 specify an Upper Limit of Level 2 For Offset measuring from the Upper Limit level enter the distance at which the upper boundary...

Page 1020: ... to the element boundaries You can also place a room in a free space or one that is not entirely bounded and then draw room bounding elements around the room later When you add bounding elements the room expands to the boundaries See Room Boundaries on page 979 Related topics Controlling the Visibility of Rooms on page 979 Room Tags on page 985 Room Properties on page 1003 Color Schemes on page 10...

Page 1021: ... which you want to display and work with rooms See View Templates on page 507 To display rooms 1 Open the plan view or the section view 2 Type vg or click View tab Graphics panel Visibility Graphics 3 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog scroll down to Rooms and click to expand it 4 To display rooms in the view using an interior fill color select Interior Fill 5 T...

Page 1022: ...he room perimeter at the appropriate height See Computation Height on page 989 Rooms in Section Views Use a section view to visually check the upper and lower boundaries of a room You can also use a section view to check the perimeter of a room that has sloped walls or other atypical features In section views the graphic display of room boundaries varies depending on whether volume computation is ...

Page 1023: ...Revit Architecture is omitting parts of the room from its volume computations This may be caused by a combination of sloping walls and the computation height that is defined for the corresponding level or by other situations See Computation Height on page 989 and Situations That Can Affect Room Volume Computations on page 992 Room Bounding Elements The following elements are bounding elements for ...

Page 1024: ...mpute the area and volume of the room To turn on the Room Bounding parameter 1 Select the element 2 Click Modify element tab Element panel Element Properties 3 In the Instance Properties dialog under Constraints select Room Bounding 4 Click OK Related topics Room Bounding Elements on page 981 Room Boundaries in Linked Models on page 984 Room Areas and Perimeters for Design Options on page 1323 Roo...

Page 1025: ...eating a Room on page 977 You can also do the following Tag the room See Tagging a Room on page 985 Apply a color scheme to the plan view or to a section view See Color Schemes on page 1019 Showing or Hiding Room Separation Lines 1 Open a plan view or 3D view 2 Type vg or click View tab Graphics panel Visibility Graphics 3 Click the Model Categories tab 4 In the Visibility column expand the Lines ...

Page 1026: ...linked model See Using Room Boundaries in a Linked Model on page 984 Placing rooms in a host project building exterior using walls in a linked model building interior More about rooms and linked models If you unload a linked model rooms in the host project are no longer bounded by the room bounding elements in the linked model Elements in a nested link are room bounding when you turn on the Room B...

Page 1027: ...ary of a Room on page 993 Room Tags Rooms and room tags are separate but related Revit Architecture components Rooms are model elements in Revit Architecture like walls and doors Room tags are annotation elements that can be added and displayed in plan views and section views Room tags can display values for related parameters such as room number room name computed area and volume Related topics C...

Page 1028: ...ys in the tag instance properties It also displays on the Options Bar when you are adding a room area or tag to a view Select one of the following options Horizontal The tag displays horizontally in the view the default Vertical The tag displays vertically in the view Model The tag can align with walls and boundary lines in the building model or rotate to a specified angle See Rotating a Tag on pa...

Page 1029: ...nded by elements such as walls and room separation lines Revit Architecture computes the room area between the boundaries Revit Architecture displays a warning if the room is not in a properly enclosed region To place a room tag when creating or placing a room in a view select the Tag on placement option of the Options Bar If you place a room without a tag you can tag it later using the Tag Room t...

Page 1030: ...operties The properties of a room tag are the properties of the annotation family If a room is selected in a schedule you can click Show on the Modify Schedule Quantities tab to see the position of the room in any related view For more information about schedules see Creating a Schedule or Quantity on page 173 Room Tag Properties Use room tag properties to control the appearance and behavior of ro...

Page 1031: ...el of the room Revit Architecture measures the perimeter of the room at this height If a building includes sloped walls or other atypical features you may need to adjust the computation height to achieve more accurate room areas and volumes See Computation Height on page 989 By measuring the perimeter of the room at the defined height Revit Architecture determines the area of the room Related topi...

Page 1032: ...g the computation height can affect the performance of Revit Architecture Changing the Computation Height 1 Open a section view or any view in which you can see defined levels Optional Make rooms visible in the section view See Controlling the Visibility of Rooms on page 979 2 Select a level datum in the view and click Modify Levels tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Type Properties 3 ...

Page 1033: ...ll At wall core layer Locates the room boundary at the interior or exterior layer of the core closest to the room At wall core center Locates the room boundary at the centerline of the wall core 3 Click OK For information about defining the structure and core layers of a wall see Vertically Compound Walls on page 639 Room Volume Room volumes display in the Instance Properties dialog in tags and in...

Page 1034: ... Area Computation setting Determines the room height See Defining Room Height on page 993 and Considering Ceilings and Floors in Room Volume Computations on page 996 Uses the room area and the room height to compute the room volume Situations That Can Affect Room Volume Computations In a few cases the room volume that Revit Architecture computes may not reflect unique features of a room For exampl...

Page 1035: ... the room Change the room height graphically After adding a room to a plan view open a section view that shows the room In the section view you can select the room and use controls to adjust the upper and lower boundaries of the room See Rooms in Section Views on page 980 Defining Room Height Parameters To define the height of a room use room instance parameters as described in the following topic...

Page 1036: ...erties the Level parameter is read only This parameter reflects the level of the plan view in which you place the room For example if you place a room on a Level 2 floor plan the Level parameter for the room is Level 2 Use the Base Offset parameter to indicate the distance between the base level and the lower boundary of the room To use the base level as the lower boundary enter 0 zero To move the...

Page 1037: ... a Room on page 978 Revit Architecture displays upper and lower arrow controls 3 To change the upper or lower boundary of the room pull the corresponding control up or down Revit Architecture displays listening dimensions to indicate the distance of the upper and lower boundaries from the upper limit and base level of the room You can enter a value directly if desired See Listening Dimensions on p...

Page 1038: ...ments when computing the volume For example if a ceiling or roof occurs below the specified upper limit of a room then Revit Architecture computes the volume up to the room bounding element For rooms under roofs such as attic spaces specify an upper boundary that is greater than the height of the roof This strategy ensures that the volume is computed up to the roof pitch For example the following ...

Page 1039: ...tep ensures that the Revit MEP project recognizes room bounding elements in the Revit Architecture project See Using Room Boundaries in a Linked Model on page 984 e Places spaces in the Revit MEP model The spaces use the room boundaries defined by the Revit Architecture project As an alternative teams can create a Revit project and enable worksharing The architect and the mechanical engineer each ...

Page 1040: ... the same room name and number can exist in the same or different locations of the model as long as they are in different phases To achieve this do not switch the phase in the same plan view but make duplicate plan views with dedicated phases You can make edits to room bounding elements in one phase without affecting other phases For example you can delete room bounding walls in one phase and prov...

Page 1041: ... in one phase you may want to use that room specification in another phase This is useful when changing an existing region with new construction To do this copy the room from a view assigned to one phase to a view assigned to a different phase to preserve the parameter settings For example to copy room specifications from the Existing phase to the New Construction phase use the following procedure...

Page 1042: ...he project still contains information about the room Then you can place the room in another location later during a project redesign See Unplacing or Moving Rooms on page 1000 Delete Completely removes the room including all information about the room from the project See Deleting Rooms on page 1002 A floor plan containing rooms and a room schedule Unplacing or Moving Rooms When you add a room to ...

Page 1043: ...e room Viewing a List of Unplaced Rooms 1 If the project does not include a room schedule create one See Creating a Schedule or Quantity on page 173 2 Display the room schedule in the drawing area The room schedule lists all rooms defined in the building model For any rooms that are currently unplaced the schedule displays Not Placed for any read only fields including Area Perimeter Level Upper Li...

Page 1044: ... project The project no longer stores any information about the rooms Rooms and Areas as Polylines When exporting AutoCAD files you can export rooms and areas as closed polylines The exported polylines match the boundaries of rooms in Revit Architecture The room boundaries are exported onto a single layer That layer is turned off by default in the AutoCAD file The polylines include the following X...

Page 1045: ...nts The base level on which the room resides A read only value See Defining the Lower Boundary of a Room on page 994 Level The level from which to measure the upper boundary of the room See Defining the Upper Boundary of a Room on page 993 Upper Limit The distance at which the upper boundary of the room occurs measuring from the Upper Limit level Enter a positive number to go above the Upper Limit...

Page 1046: ... Warnings for Selected Elements on page 1415 Room numbers are assigned sequentially See Creating Se quential Room Number Tags on page 1130 The room name such as Conference Room or Kitchen Name User specified information about the room Comments Type of occupancy for the room such as Retail Occupancy Department for which the room will be used Department Finish for the base Base Finish Finish for the...

Page 1047: ...e should be one in which room bounding elements exist Energy Analysis Model Does Not Contain Any Roof Surfaces Warning The energy analysis model does not contain any roof surfaces If there are roofs in your model please verify that they are room bounding and make sure that the room offsets are high enough to include the roofs Issue This warning displays when you attempt to export to gbXML and room...

Page 1048: ...ot Computed Issue This message displays for the Volume parameter in room tags and room schedules when you have not enabled volume computation Because volume computation may affect Revit Architecture performance enable it only when you want to prepare and print schedules or other views that report volumes Solution To compute room volumes click Home tab Room Area panel drop down Area and Volume Comp...

Page 1049: ...k Leader Room Tag Was Deleted Warning A Room Tag was deleted but the corresponding Room still exists You can place another tag for the room using the Room Tag tool or select the room and delete it Issue This message displays when you delete a room tag in a room Solution You can ignore the warning or you can remedy the situation by placing another tag for the room or deleting the room from the proj...

Page 1050: ...Analysis Use area analysis tools to define spatial relationships in the building model Related topics Rooms and Areas Overview on page 975 Analyzing a Conceptual Design on page 594 Area Schemes Area schemes are definable spatial relationships For example you can have an area scheme showing the relationship between core and circulation spaces in a floor plan Area plan with area scheme applied You c...

Page 1051: ...me are also deleted 1 Click Home tab Room Area panel drop down Area and Volume Computations 2 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog click the Area Schemes tab 3 Select the area scheme 4 Click Delete 5 Click OK Area Plans Area plans are views that show spatial relationships based on area schemes and levels in your model You can have multiple area plans for every area scheme and level Each area...

Page 1052: ...ary lines in external walls that are not closed in a loop TIP If the project includes a ruled curtain system within the exterior wall loop you must sketch the area boundary because ruled curtain systems are not walls 9 Add more area boundaries as needed See Creating Area Boundaries on page 1010 Related topics Area Plans on page 1009 Area Schemes on page 1008 Areas and Area Tags on page 1011 Color ...

Page 1053: ... separate but related Revit Architecture components Areas are model elements in Revit Architecture like walls and doors Area tags are annotation elements that you can add to area plan views When creating an early design before you define walls or other bounding elements in a project you can create an area schedule In the schedule add information about the areas that you plan to use Later you can p...

Page 1054: ...area within an area boundary When you place an area tag you can assign a unique name to the area Before you can add area tags you must add areas to the area plan See Creating an Area on page 1011 If you do not use the Tag on placement option when creating areas you can use the following procedure to add area tags later NOTE As an alternative use the Tag All Not Tagged tool to tag untagged areas Se...

Page 1055: ... message if the same value for the number parameter is used for 2 areas in an area scheme You can add this parameter to a schedule and it can display in an area tag Area name Name Specific comments about the area Comments Other Type of area NOTE Changing the area type alters the position of area boundaries created with the Apply Area Rules options See Area Types on page 1016 for type rules Area Ty...

Page 1056: ...or plan the project stores information about the area This can include information that you add using area properties such as the area name usage and so on See Area Properties on page 1013 You can see information about areas in an area schedule If you want to retain information about an area but remove it from its current location in the building model unplace the area as follows To unplace an are...

Page 1057: ...fy Schedule Quantities tab Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel Isolate This option filters the schedule so that it lists only the areas that are not placed or enclosed You may want to save this schedule that you can quickly determine which areas need to be placed or enclosed Hiding Unplaced Areas in an Area Schedule 1 Display the area schedule in the drawing area The area schedule lists area...

Page 1058: ...ies See Area Type Rules on page 1017 Area type values come from the default area schemes Gross Building and Rentable The Gross Building area scheme has 2 area type values Gross Building Area and Exterior Area The Rentable Area scheme has 6 type values building common area office area exterior area floor area major vertical penetration and store area When you create a new area scheme it uses the ty...

Page 1059: ...g Area Area Boundary measured to the outside surface of building None Gross Building Area Area Boundary measured from outside surface of building Exterior Area Gross Building Area Exterior Area Area Boundary measured from wall centerline Exterior Area Exterior Area Area Boundary measured from outside surface of building Gross Building Area Exterior Area Rentable Area Scheme Types NOTE Windows in R...

Page 1060: ...a Office Store or Building Common Area Floor Area Area Boundary measured from the wall face border ing the floor area Exterior Major Vertical Penetration Floor Area Area Boundary measured from the wall centerline Floor Area Floor Area Major Vertical Penetration Area Boundary measured from the wall centerline Major Vertical Penetration Major Vertical Penetration Area Boundary measured from the wall...

Page 1061: ...rooms in a floor plan by department set the Department parameter value for each room to the necessary value and then create a color scheme based on the values of the Department parameter You can then add a color scheme legend to identify the department that each color represents You can apply color schemes based on any parameter value for a room or area You specify parameter values in the Instance...

Page 1062: ...me legend Select the legend and click Modify Color Fill Legends tab Scheme panel Edit Scheme For a floor plan view or section view access view properties Right click in the drawing area and click View Properties or right click the view name in the Project Browser and click Properties In the Instance Properties dialog click in the cell for the Color Scheme parameter Related topics Creating a Color ...

Page 1063: ... use as the basis of the color scheme NOTE Be sure that values are defined for the parameter you select You can add or change parameter values in the Instance Properties dialog 7 To color by a specific parameter value or by a range of values select By Value or By Range NOTE By Range is not available for all parameters When you select By Range the units display format appears next to the Edit Forma...

Page 1064: ...log using another method 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog click Add Value 3 In the New Color Scheme Entry dialog enter a name and click OK 4 Edit value options as necessary See Creating a Color Scheme on page 1021 for details on options NOTE Certain parameters only accept properly formatted values For example if you need to enter a value for area you can enter a number or a formula If the value d...

Page 1065: ...ting a Color Scheme on page 1021 Adding Values to a Color Scheme Definition on page 1022 Using a Color Scheme in a Section View In addition to using a color scheme for a floor plan view you can also use a color scheme to color and apply fill patterns to rooms or areas in a section view See Applying a Color Scheme on page 1022 Using a Color Scheme in a Section View 1023 ...

Page 1066: ...ttings column 6 If the linked model contains rooms select By Host view or Custom If the linked model contains areas select Custom If you select Custom For Linked View select the view from the linked model to display For Color Fill select By Host View 7 Click OK For more information about visibility of linked Revit models see Visibility for Linked Revit Models on page 1282 Applying the Linked Model...

Page 1067: ...d a color scheme legend to the colored view to identify what the colors represent Color scheme legends can be placed anywhere in the floor plan Multiple color scheme legends can be placed in a view or you can apply a color scheme to a view and if you do not want the color scheme legend to display you can select it and delete it You can resize color scheme legends using drag controls You can also r...

Page 1068: ...ab Element panel Element Properties drop down Type Properties 3 In the Type Properties dialog edit the values for Swatch Width and Swatch Height NOTE Changes made to these type parameters affect all color scheme legends of this type in the project 4 Click OK To modify the order of items 1 In the drawing area select the color scheme legend 2 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab Scheme panel Edit Sch...

Page 1069: ...OTE Changes made to this type parameter affect all color scheme legends of this type in the project 4 Click OK Color Scheme Legend Properties Description Name Graphics Controls the width of the swatches Swatch Width Controls the height of the swatches Swatch Height Filters the display of values in a view By view shows only the values in the current view All shows all values present in the color sc...

Page 1070: ... legend title Font Sets the size of the legend title Size Applies bold formatting to the legend title Bold Applies italic formatting to the legend title Italic Applies underline formatting to the legend title Underline 1028 Chapter 16 Rooms and Areas ...

Page 1071: ...ge 1087 Construction Documents Overview Construction documents are the records that you share with clients engineers and construction professionals to communicate a design For example clients need to see floor plans elevations and 3D drawings of the design for approval Engineers from other disciplines will want to see those drawings as well as more detailed drawings to help them understand the bui...

Page 1072: ...schedules on each sheet Sheets Overview A sheet also called a drawing sheet is an individual page of a construction document set In Revit Architecture you create a sheet view for each sheet in the construction document set You can then place multiple drawings or schedules on each sheet view 1030 Chapter 17 Preparing Construction Documents ...

Page 1073: ...ganization With Revit Architecture you can create a digital cartoon set First add the required views drawings and schedules to the project and sketch the basic design of the building model Add the desired sheets to the project and give them appropriate names and numbers Then add the views to the appropriate sheets If desired you can set the view scales titles and other attributes now so the result...

Page 1074: ...e building model in the project views the views on the sheets update automatically This technique streamlines the project documentation process and maintains organizational standards Adding a Sheet 1 Open the Revit project 2 Add a sheet using one of the following methods In the Project Browser right click Sheets all and click New Sheet Click View tab Sheet Composition panel New Sheet 3 Select a ti...

Page 1075: ...iews and place each one on a different sheet NOTE You can also place legends and schedules including view lists and drawing lists on sheets Legends and schedules can be placed on multiple sheets See Adding a Schedule to a Sheet on page 1063 To add views to a sheet 1 Open the sheet 2 To add a view to the sheet use one of the following methods In the Project Browser expand the list of views locate t...

Page 1076: ... a Sheet When placing a particular view on a sheet you can use the following techniques to hide parts of the view to focus on one area Crop region Use the crop region to focus the view on a particular area of the building model See Crop Regions on page 211 Masking regions Use masking regions to hide areas of the view within the rectangular crop region that are not relevant For example in the follo...

Page 1077: ...tle See Viewport Types on page 1057 Aligning Views on a Sheet When positioning views on a sheet you can align the view titles The view titles stay aligned even if the size of a viewport changes NOTE This method of aligning views on a sheet does not apply to schedules To align views on a sheet 1 In a project add 2 or more views to a sheet See Adding Views to a Sheet on page 1033 2 Drag a view to th...

Page 1078: ...pen the sheet 2 Select the view to lock in place on the sheet 3 Click Modify Viewports tab Modify panel Pin 4 The pin icon displays on the view indicating that it is locked in place To unlock a view on a sheet 1 On the sheet select the locked view The pin icon displays on the view indicating that it is locked in place 2 Click the pin icon The pin icon changes indicating that the view is no longer ...

Page 1079: ...r and Sheet Name parameters Specifying Title Block Information for Sheets A title block typically displays information about the project as well as information about individual sheets Use the following procedures to specify the information that you want to display in the title blocks of sheets in a project NOTE To add custom fields to a title block see Adding Custom Fields to a Title Block on page...

Page 1080: ...ea and click View Properties On the Instance Properties dialog for the sheet change the values of the sheet specific parameters that display in the title block Click OK Modifying a View on a Sheet 1 Open the sheet 2 In the drawing area select a view on the sheet TIP If views on the sheet overlap press Tab until the correct view highlights Watch the status bar for the description of the viewport 3 ...

Page 1081: ...g and Detailing on page 1087 and Dimensions on page 263 2 Create dependent views See Creating Dependent Views on page 194 In each dependent view use crop regions to show the part of the model to display in that view and the annotations to include If any unwanted annotations or model elements display in a dependent view right click the element and click Hide in view Elements In the primary view add...

Page 1082: ...w and click Deactivate View 3 On the Options Bar for Rotation on Sheet select the desired rotation option The view rotates on the sheet Creating a Title Sheet A construction documentation set usually includes a title sheet also called a cover sheet The title sheet typically includes a rendering 3D drawing or other view of the building model It may also include the following types of information Ta...

Page 1083: ...opriate title block See Adding a Sheet on page 1032 2 Rename the sheet to indicate that it is the title sheet See Renaming a Sheet on page 1037 3 Add the desired view to the sheet See Adding Views to a Sheet on page 1033 4 Create a drawing list omit the title sheet from the list and add the drawing list to the sheet See Drawing Lists on page 1066 5 Add the required information to the title sheet T...

Page 1084: ... page 1120 2 Open the sheet on which you want to place the legend view 3 In the Project Browser expand Legends click the name of the legend view drag it into the drawing area and click to place it on the sheet You can place a legend view on multiple sheets 4 Optional For a component legend or symbol legend hide the view title See Removing a View Title from a Sheet on page 1060 5 Optional For a key...

Page 1085: ...et on page 1032 4 Place the note block on the sheet as follows a In the Project Browser expand Schedules Quantities b Select the name of the note block drag it onto the sheet and click to place it Using External Information on a Sheet You can include information that is external to a Revit project on the sheets that Revit Architecture generates You can use external text spreadsheets and images on ...

Page 1086: ... the following file types BMP bitmap JPEG JPG PNG portable network graphics and TIFF 3 Add the spreadsheet image to the Revit sheet See Adding an Image to a Sheet on page 1044 Adding an Image to a Sheet 1 Prepare the image file Revit Architecture supports the following image file types BMP bitmap JPEG JPG PNG portable network graphics and TIFF 2 In the Revit project open the sheet 3 Click Insert t...

Page 1087: ...at different scales this parameter shows the value As indicated Scale Indicates whether views on the sheet are dependent on other views See Duplicate Dependent Views on page 192 Dependency See the description for Referencing Detail which follows From the example the referencing sheet is A101 Referencing Sheet This value comes from the referencing view that is placed on a sheet For example you crea...

Page 1088: ...information about the project client and individual sheets including issue dates and revision information Title Blocks Overview Title blocks define the size and appearance of a drawing sheet Think of them as templates for the drawing sheet You create a title block family using the Family Editor For each title block you specify the sheet size and add borders a company logo and other information You...

Page 1089: ...ing one of the following methods Open a project that contains sheets that use the title block or a project into which you have loaded the title block In the Project Browser expand Families Annotation Symbols Right click the name of the title block to modify and click Edit In the Revit window click Open Family Navigate to the location of the title block family RFA file Select the file and click Ope...

Page 1090: ...ck on page 1047 3 Click Insert tab Import panel Image 4 In the Import Image dialog navigate to the location of the image file 5 Select the image file and click Open 6 Click in the drawing area to place the image To reposition the image drag it to the desired location on the sheet To resize the image select it and drag a blue corner dot Loading a Title Block into a Project You can load a title bloc...

Page 1091: ...remain in place in the drawing area 3 In the Project Browser under Families Annotation Symbols expand the desired title block 4 Drag the title block from the Project Browser to the sheet and click to place it Place title block This method is useful when you have deleted the title block from a sheet and then performed other tasks without immediately placing a new title block on the sheet To place a...

Page 1092: ... Ensure that Itemize every instance is selected 6 Specify formatting for column headings in the revision schedule as follows a Click the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog b In the Fields list select a field c Specify the heading orientation and alignment for the field d If you want to omit the selected field from the revision schedule select Hidden Field Use the Hidden Field option ...

Page 1093: ... page 1051 13 To save the title block on the Quick Access toolbar click Save 14 Load the title block into one or more open projects See Loading a Title Block into a Project on page 1048 Rotating a Revision Schedule You can rotate a revision schedule 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise on a title block To rotate a revision schedule modify the title block family You cannot rotate a revision sch...

Page 1094: ... height for a revision schedule 1 Open the title block for editing See Modifying a Title Block on page 1047 2 Modify the revision schedule properties as follows a In the Project Browser under Views all Schedules right click Revision Schedule and click Properties b On the Instance Properties dialog for Appearance click Edit c On the Appearance tab of the Revision Properties dialog for Height select...

Page 1095: ...hedules right click Revision Schedule and click Properties 3 On the Instance Properties dialog for Appearance click Edit 4 On the Appearance tab of the Revision Properties dialog for Build schedule select one of the following values Top down Column headings display at the top of the revision schedule Revision rows start at the top of the schedule and go down Bottom up Column headings display at th...

Page 1096: ...k use shared parameters NOTE Use shared parameters not project parameters so that they are available to the title block families and the projects that use them To add custom fields to a title block 1 Create or edit a shared parameter file and add shared parameters to the file Click Manage tab Project Settings panel Shared Parameters Add one shared parameter for each new project specific or sheet s...

Page 1097: ...tion you can import it into Revit Architecture Some text in the imported title block may reflect information that is specific to the project or sheet Replace this text with Revit parameters so that the information can update automatically To import a title block 1 In the CAD application do the following a Prepare the title block For example remove unwanted text or text that you plan to replace wit...

Page 1098: ...op down Full Explode You can now select individual lines or pieces of text to move or delete them 6 Replace project specific or sheet specific text from the imported title block with Revit labels For example if the imported title block includes the text Client Name as a placeholder select this text and delete it Then replace it with the Project Name parameter that Revit Architecture provides or an...

Page 1099: ...ontal line display on a sheet You can apply viewport types to views on a sheet NOTE To change the information included in a view title or its display attributes create or edit a view title type See View Title Types on page 1061 Creating a Viewport Type The following procedure assumes that you have created sheets in a project and placed views on the sheets To create a viewport type 1 Open a sheet V...

Page 1100: ...b Element panel and from the Type Selector drop down select the viewport type to apply to the viewport Revit Architecture applies the viewport type to the selected viewport Modifying Viewport Type Properties 1 On a sheet select a viewport and click Modify Viewports tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Type Properties 2 Edit viewport type properties See Viewport Type Properties on page 10...

Page 1101: ...s on sheets You can also define view title types and use them to apply standard settings to view titles To change the weight color or pattern of the horizontal line in a view title or omit the line from the view title create or modify a viewport type See Viewport Types on page 1057 To change the length of the horizontal line for an individual view title see Modifying a View Title on a Sheet on pag...

Page 1102: ...rizontal line in a view title create or modify a viewport type See Viewport Types on page 1057 Removing a View Title from a Sheet If you do not want to display a view title on a sheet create a viewport type that omits view titles Then apply the viewport type to that view on the sheet The following procedure assumes that you have created sheets in a project and added views to the sheets To remove a...

Page 1103: ...e for editing using one of the following methods Open a project that contains sheets that use the view title type or a project into which you have loaded the view title type In the Project Browser expand Families Annotation Symbols Right click the name of the view title type to modify and click Edit Click Open Family Navigate to the location of the view title type RFA file Select the file and clic...

Page 1104: ...iew title type into the project In the Project Browser the view title type displays under Families Annotation Symbols Applying a View Title Type to a Viewport Type After creating or modifying a view title type to display the desired information and text attributes apply it to a viewport type All views on sheets that use this viewport type then display titles using that view title type To apply a v...

Page 1105: ...e on a Sheet You can change the attributes that control the display of a schedule on the sheet including grid lines and text attributes The following procedure assumes that you have added a sheet to a project and placed a schedule on the sheet See Adding a Sheet on page 1032 and Adding a Schedule to a Sheet on page 1063 To format a schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser under Schedules Quant...

Page 1106: ...plits the schedule 3 Click the Z break control The schedule divides into 2 sections splitting at the approximate location of the Z break control 4 To split a section of the schedule further click the Z break control again NOTE You cannot delete schedule sections from a sheet You cannot drag schedule sections from one sheet to another 5 To adjust the number of rows in a section of the schedule drag...

Page 1107: ...e button The split schedule sections rejoin into one section Adjusting Schedule Columns on a Sheet When you place a schedule on a sheet text that does not fit within a column wraps to a new line To adjust the column width select the schedule A blue triangle displays to the upper right of each column Drag a blue triangle to the left or right NOTE If the schedule is split into multiple sections adju...

Page 1108: ... select the field b For Heading orientation select Vertical This setting affects the column heading on a sheet only It does not affect its display in the schedule view 4 Click OK twice 5 Open the sheet to see the results In the schedule the column headings for the selected fields display vertically instead of horizontally See Adjusting Schedule Columns on a Sheet on page 1065 Drawing Lists A drawi...

Page 1109: ...from a drawing list 1 In the Project Browser right click the name of the sheet to omit and click Properties 2 On the Instance Properties dialog clear Appears In Drawing List This option is selected for all sheets by default 3 Click OK Revit Architecture updates the drawing list to exclude the sheet Adding a Drawing List to a Sheet To add a drawing list to a sheet use the procedure for adding a sch...

Page 1110: ...ies 3 On the Instance Properties dialog for Fields click Edit 4 Add a custom field named Sheet Order as follows a On the Fields tab of the Drawing List Properties dialog click Add Parameter b In the Parameter Properties dialog under Parameter Type select Project parameter c Under Parameter Data for Name enter Sheet Order d Click OK On the Drawing List Properties dialog the Sheet Order field displa...

Page 1111: ...ding a Schedule to a Sheet on page 1063 and Formatting a Schedule on a Sheet on page 1063 Revisions When working on building projects you must often make changes to meet client or regulatory requirements These revisions need to be tracked for future reference For example you may want to check the revision history to identify when why and by whom a change was made Revit Architecture provides tools ...

Page 1112: ... the assigned revisions See Tagging a Revision Cloud on page 1077 6 Check sheets to make sure that the revision schedules show the desired information See Specifying the Revisions to Include in a Revision Schedule on page 1079 7 Issue the revisions See Issuing a Revision on page 1080 Entering Revision Information When you revise the building model enter information about the revision in the projec...

Page 1113: ...ge combine revisions into a single entry For some projects you may want to merge all revisions from a particular stage of the project All new revisions for the next project stage are then listed individually When you merge revisions the target revision the revision being merged to remains Information about the revision being merged is lost NOTE You cannot delete revisions in the Sheet Issues Revis...

Page 1114: ...tecture numbers revisions according to the sequence of revisions in the Sheet Issues Revisions dialog For example suppose you create clouds for revisions 2 3 and 4 When you add those clouds to a sheet the numbering in the tags and the revision schedule display 2 3 and 4 You cannot modify the sequence number Numbering Per Sheet Revit Architecture numbers clouds relative to the sequence of other clo...

Page 1115: ...ions Revit Architecture provides flexibility in how it displays the sequence of revisions in a project You can track revisions using the following numbering schemes Numbers Letters or a user defined sequence of letters or other characters No number or letter Use the Sheet Issues Revisions dialog to specify the numbering scheme to use for each revision You can also specify the letters or other char...

Page 1116: ...ng an Alphabetic Sequence for Revisions If you use an alphabetic sequence for revision numbers you can specify the characters and the order in which they occur You can specify one alphabetic sequence per project To define an alphabetic sequence 1 In the project click View tab Sheet Composition panel Sheet Issues Revisions 2 In the Sheet Issues Revisions dialog under Alphabetic Sequence click Optio...

Page 1117: ...ews on the sheet Related topics Revision Workflow on page 1070 Entering Revision Information on page 1070 Adding a Revision Cloud 1 In the project open a view in which you want to indicate changes You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views 2 Click Annotate tab Detail panel Revision Cloud Revit Architecture enters sketch mode 3 Sketch a cloud as follows a In the drawing area place ...

Page 1118: ...aries of a revision cloud You can also change the line weight color and style of one cloud or of all clouds in the project To change the boundaries and appearance of a revision cloud 1 In a project view select the revision cloud 2 To change its boundaries do the following a Click Modify Revision Clouds tab Edit panel Edit Sketch Revit Architecture enters sketch mode b Select segments of the revisi...

Page 1119: ... a revision tag You may need to zoom in to see the controls for the revision tag c To reposition the tag drag the blue arrows d To adjust the elbow in its leader line drag the blue dot e To remove the leader line on the Options Bar clear Leader f To assign the tag to a different revision cloud click Modify Revision Cloud Tags tab Tag panel Pick New Host In the drawing area select the desired revis...

Page 1120: ...The date of the assigned revision based on the Date column of the Sheet Issues Revisions dialog This value is read only Revision Date For the assigned revision the value of the Issued to column of the Sheet Issues Revisions dialog This value is read only Issued to For the assigned revision the value of the Issued by column of the Sheet Issues Revisions dialog This value is read only Issued by A un...

Page 1121: ...sion schedule 1 Open a sheet 2 Zoom in on the revision schedule in the title block for the sheet 3 Right click in the drawing area and click View Properties 4 On the Instance Properties dialog for the Sheets on page 1030 for Revisions on Sheet click Edit The Revisions on Sheet dialog lists all revisions entered in the Sheet Issues Revisions dialog Revisions assigned to clouds in views on the sheet...

Page 1122: ...changes to the revision information NOTE If you must change any revision information after issuing the revision clear Issued make the changes and then select Issued again e Click OK 3 Print or publish the revised sheets See Printing on page 1080 or Publish on page 1381 Printing The Print tool prints the current window a visible portion of the current window or selected views and sheets You can sen...

Page 1123: ...f for Offset from Corner you select User Defined enter X and Y offset values 6 Under Hidden Line Views choose an option to increase print performance for hidden line views in elevations sections and 3D views Vector processing times vary depending on the number of views processed and view complexity Raster processing times depend on the dimensions of the view and amount of graphics Vector processin...

Page 1124: ... click OK 4 Click OK TIP You can transfer print settings to another project using Transfer Project Standards Click Manage tab Project Settings panel Transfer Project Standards and in the Select Items To Copy dialog select Print Settings See Transferring Project Standards on page 446 To change a saved print setting 1 In the Print Setup dialog for Name select a saved print setting 2 Make the desired...

Page 1125: ...rrent window a visible portion of current window or selected views sheets If you are printing selected views and sheets click Select select the views and sheets to print and click OK When you are printing selected views and sheets to a file Revit Architecture creates one file per view or sheet If you want to create a single file that contains all selected views and sheets print to PDF See Printing...

Page 1126: ... prompted to save your changes to the modified set If you click No the changed settings are applied to the in session set Any future changes you make without saving are also applied to the in session set These changes are lost when you exit the Revit Architecture session To revert view sheet set settings 1 In the View Sheet Set dialog for Name select a saved set 2 Click Revert The settings are rev...

Page 1127: ...on of the resulting PDF file If needed click Browse and navigate to the target folder If you are generating multiple PDF files the specified file name is used as a prefix It is appended with the names of the selected views and sheets 7 If you are printing multiple pages and you want them to print in reverse order under Options select Reverse Print Order 8 To change print settings under Settings cl...

Page 1128: ...d to control the order in which they print When you start the print job Batch Print manages the printing of the drawings requiring no further interaction from you If desired you can monitor the progress of the print job using a status dialog Batch Print is available to Revit subscription customers To use this utility do the following 1 Download Batch Print from the Autodesk customer subscription W...

Page 1129: ... measured in paper space For example a 1 4 text note indicates that the text note will display as 1 4 high on a sheet Text notes automatically scale with the view For example if you reduce the size of the view scale the text automatically resizes Text notes without a leader snap to the text origins from nearby text notes or labels Origin is a point that depends on the text alignment left right cen...

Page 1130: ... wrapping text Place the cursor in the drawing area then click and drag to form a text box For a text note with a one segment leader or an arc leader Click once to place the leader end Move the cursor to draw the leader Then click the cursor for non wrapping text or drag it for wrapping text For a text note with a two segment leader Click once to place the leader end Move the cursor and click agai...

Page 1131: ...xt note the text note becomes wrapping Rotate it Place the cursor on the rotate control to rotate the note See Rotating Elements on page 379 Change text alignment Click Modify Text Notes tab Alignment panel Left Center or Right Alternatively you can click Modify Text Notes tab Element panel Element Properties and in the Instance Properties dialog edit the Horizontal Align property Change the typef...

Page 1132: ...Run dialog enter charmap and click OK The Character Map dialog displays 3 Select a character and click Select 4 Click Copy 5 Return to Revit Architecture and select a text note 6 Click inside the text box to edit the text 7 Click Modify Text Notes tab Clipboard panel Paste or press CTRL V The special character appears in the text box Adding or Removing Leader Lines from a Text Note 1 Select the te...

Page 1133: ...g Text Note Styles on page 500 Leader Arrowhead Properties on page 1092 Text Note Type Properties Description Name Graphics Sets the color of the text and the leader line Color Sets the thickness of the line that surrounds the text when you select the text and the thickness of the leader line You can change the definition of the line weight numbers using the Line Weights tool See Line Weights on p...

Page 1134: ...ote remains readable whenever you rotate it It never displays upside down Keep Readable Leader Arrowhead Properties Parameter names values and descriptions for text note leader arrowheads Many values are modifiable Settings are global for the project To access properties for leader arrowhead types click Manage tab Project Settings panel Settings drop down Arrowheads Arrowhead Properties Descriptio...

Page 1135: ...age 1110 Adding Grids 1 Click Home tab Datum panel Grid 2 Click Place Grid tab Draw panel and select a sketch option Use Pick Lines to snap the grid to an existing line such as a wall For more information about sketch options see Sketching on page 303 3 Click when the grid is the correct length Revit Architecture automatically numbers each grid To change the grid number click the number enter the ...

Page 1136: ...he grid header 2 Enter a new value You can enter a number or a letter You can also change the value by selecting the grid line right clicking and selecting Element Properties In the Instance Properties dialog enter a different value for the Name property Offsetting a Grid Line from Its Bubble There may be times when you sketch a grid line and want to offset its bubble from the rest of the grid lin...

Page 1137: ...bbles 1 Open a view that displays grid lines 2 Select a grid line Revit Architecture displays a check box near the grid bubble You may need to zoom in to see it clearly 3 Clear the check box to hide the bubble or select it to show the bubble You can repeat this process to show or hide the bubble at the opposite end of the grid line To show or hide grid bubbles using type properties 1 Open a view t...

Page 1138: ...n individual grid line For example you may want to adjust the gap so the grid line does not display through the middle of a model element This feature is available when the grid line uses a grid type for which the Center Segment parameter is Custom or Gap See Customizing Grid Lines on page 1097 A grid line that has been adjusted to end at the wall To adjust the center segment of a grid line 1 Sele...

Page 1139: ...he desired position The end segment adjusts its length accordingly Customizing Grid Lines You can customize grid types in the following ways Change the line color weight and pattern of the entire grid line Modify the Bubble grid type or create your own See Changing a Continuous Grid Line on page 1098 Hide the center segment of the grid lines to create a gap displaying only the end segments in view...

Page 1140: ...e grid line Use the other parameters to indicate which grid bubble to use and where it should display See Grid Type Properties on page 1100 4 Click OK Revit Architecture updates all grid lines of this type in all views Creating a Grid Line with a Center Gap 1 Open a view that displays grid lines 2 Select a grid line and click Modify Grids tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Type Propert...

Page 1141: ...r and End Segment Pattern specify the line weight color and pattern of the end segments of the grid line For End Segments Length enter the length of the segments in paper space to display on each end of the grid line Use the other parameters to indicate which grid bubble to use and where it should display See Grid Type Properties on page 1100 4 Click OK Revit Architecture updates all grid lines of...

Page 1142: ...gment Color The line style to use for a continuous grid line or if Center Segment is None or Custom the line style for the end segments End Segment Pattern If the Center Segment parameter is None or Custom the length of the end segments in paper space End Segments Length In a plan view the default setting to display a bubble at the start point of a grid line That is when you draw a grid line the b...

Page 1143: ...r each known story or other needed reference of the building for example first floor top of wall or bottom of foundation To add levels you must be in a section or elevation view When you add levels you can create an associated plan view Levels are finite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level hosted elements such as roofs floors and ceilings You can resize their extents so that they d...

Page 1144: ...align to one another When you select a level line that is aligned with others a lock appears to show the alignment If you move the level line horizontally all aligned level lines move with it 5 Click when the level line is the correct length You can change the name of the level by clicking the number to select it You can also change the height of the level by clicking the dimension Revit Architect...

Page 1145: ...s in the following ways Select a level line A temporary dimension displays between that level line and any level lines immediately above and below Selected level line shown with temporary dimensions above and below it To move the selected level up or down click the temporary dimension type a new value and press ENTER Drag the selected level line up or down To move multiple level lines select the d...

Page 1146: ...t a level line and click Modify Levels tab Element panel Element Properties 2 In the Instance Properties dialog edit instance properties 3 To edit type properties click Edit Type Changes made to type properties affect all level lines of that type in the project You can click Duplicate to create a new level line type 4 Click OK Level Type Properties Description Name Constraints If the elevation bas...

Page 1147: ...perimeter of a room is measured at a defined distance above the base level of the room To use the default computation height 4 or 1200 mm above the base level of the room select this option Also see Computation Height on page 989 Automatic Room Computation Height To enable this parameter clear Automatic Room Computation Height Enter the distance above the base level to use when computing the room ...

Page 1148: ...u selected Draw Reference Plane do the following a Place the cursor in the drawing area b Draw the reference planes by dragging the cursor c When you finish the plane designated by a green dashed line click to end the line 3 If you selected Pick Existing Line Edge do the following a On the Options Bar specify an offset if desired b Select the Lock option to lock the reference plane to the line or ...

Page 1149: ...b Element panel Element Properties Reference Plane Instance Properties Description Name Construction You can use a reference plane to define the point where walls wrap for doors and windows Select this option to use the reference plane to define this point This parameter is only available in the Family Editor See The Families Guide on page 418 Wall Closure Identity Data The name of the reference p...

Page 1150: ... and reference planes are not visible in all views If the datum does not intersect a view s plane or does not intersect the plane in the correct way then it will not be visible in that view Datum planes are modifiable You can resize their extents so that they are visible in some views but not others You can also change datum extents in one view and then propagate that change to any desired paralle...

Page 1151: ...y of Non Perpendicular Datums in Views If a datum element such as a reference plane is not perpendicular to a view then the datum element does not display in the view For example the following floor plan shows 2 reference planes indicated with dashed green lines The reference plane on the left intersects the section line at an angle The reference plane on the right is perpendicular to the section ...

Page 1152: ...tion line For example the following floor plan shows 2 arc grid lines Grid Line 3 intersects the section line but its center is not perpendicular to the section line As a result Grid Line 3 does not display in the section view Grid Line 2 intersects the section line in the floor plan and its center intersects the section line perpendicularly Therefore Grid Line 2 displays in the section view indic...

Page 1153: ... If you resize the datum the change occurs in that view only View specific extent control NOTE When you drag the filled circle the open circle remains This shows where the model 3D extent is If you want to return to that extent right click the datum and click Reset to 3D Extents If you drag a datum extent outside the crop boundary of the view the control on the extent is always in view specific 2D...

Page 1154: ...e Extents does not affect Model 3D extents Controlling Visibility of Datums Using Scope Boxes When you add datum elements grids levels and reference lines to a project they can display in more views than desired For example when you add grid lines to a plan view the grid lines display in all plan views of the model However you may want the grid lines to display in only certain views This is exactl...

Page 1155: ...hange its size and position in a 3D view 1 In a plan view click View tab Create panel Scope Box 2 On the Options Bar enter a name and specify a height for the scope box if desired TIP You can also change the name of the scope box after creating it Select the scope box click Modify Scope Boxes tab Element panel Element Properties In the Instance Properties dialog enter a value for the Name property...

Page 1156: ...g for Scope Box select the desired scope box For example for a project with 2 scope boxes named Scope Box 1 and Scope Box 2 select Scope Box 1 from the drop down list 3 Click OK The datum now displays only in views whose cutting plane intersects the selected scope box If a view s cutting plane lies outside the scope the associated datum does not display in the view For example in the following ill...

Page 1157: ...with it Dragged scope box moves level lines associated with it To revert the extents of a level datum back to its default select the level right click and click Reset to 3D Extents The model 3D extent cannot be moved from the edge of a scope box to which it is assigned but the 2D extent can be modified in a view This option returns the extent to the default position slightly offset to the outside ...

Page 1158: ...sociated datums will not display in the plan views for Levels 5 through 8 Conversely if you resize the scope box to intersect those levels the datums will display in those views Scope box in 3D with drag and rotation controls Setting the Views Visible Property for a Scope Box The Views Visible property sets the display of a scope box in various views including elevation views 1 Open a view in whic...

Page 1159: ...evealing and Unhiding Hidden Elements on page 209 Keynotes A keynote parameter is available for all model elements including detail components and materials You can tag each of these elements using a keynote tag family The keynote value is derived from a separate text file that contains a list of keynotes If an element already contains a value for a keynote it displays in a tag automatically If no...

Page 1160: ...alue stored in the keynote parameter or selected from the keynote table This value displays in the keynote as well as filling in the keynote parameter By sheet Numbers keynotes according to their order of creation A value for the keynote parameter is still stored if one has been chosen A Keynote Legend displays the Keynote Number according to the order it was created instead No number appears in t...

Page 1161: ...e element must be visible in the view and the material must be displayed by setting the detail level to medium or fine For example you will not be able to keynote the material of a door s panel whose visibility is set to not show in plan view The same door family can have a keynote or tag attached to the door panel s material in an elevation view because the solid geometry is visible in the view I...

Page 1162: ...erials of a project have their keynote values applied before you apply keynote tags to materials See Changing Material Identity Data on page 487 Assigning Keynote Values to Elements All elements have a Keynote Type parameter These can be supplied in advance using the Type Properties dialog see Element Properties on page 120 or selected when the tag is placed Assigning Keynote Values Using Tags Aft...

Page 1163: ... dialog click the Filter by Sheet check box and click OK Filtering Keynotes by CSI Heading To filter keynotes scheduled to one main category of keynotes 1 Open the keynote legend from the Legends category in the Project Browser 2 Right click the view and click View Properties 3 In the Instance Properties dialog click Edit for the filter parameter 4 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog for Filte...

Page 1164: ...t value 11060 tab Theater and Stage Equipment tab 11000 11061 tab Acoustical Shells tab 11000 For sub categories of sub categories 11060 A1 tab Counter Weight Rigging tab 11060 Sample User Keynote Text File For User Keynotes you can place them in front of the CSI structure by using the following format Main Heading Parent Category 00000 tab Division 00 User Notes Sub Category Heading Child 00001 t...

Page 1165: ...ed with elements the end of the leader is free to be relocated to another location and not connected to just the boundary of an element Therefore when placing a keynote you can select the leader option Free End or Attached End Material tags are assigned Free End and cannot be assigned Attached End A material keynote tag s leader end identifies the material as you move it over different materials T...

Page 1166: ...ample if the label is set to display element type name the tag displays the type name of each tagged element Some parameters such as type name are automatically updated by Revit Architecture while other parameters such as comments are user defined Editing the Label of a Placed Tag Tags are edited in the Family Editor Select the tag and click Modify element Tags tab Family panel Edit Family to open...

Page 1167: ...ou can change its orientation by selecting the tag and pressing SPACEBAR 3 If you want the tag to have a leader line on the Options Bar select Leader 4 If desired enter a value for the length of the leader in the text box next to the Leader check box 5 Highlight the element to tag and click to place the tag Related topics Tag All Not Tagged on page 1126 Modifying Tags on page 1128 Material Tags on...

Page 1168: ...ents in one operation The Tag All Not Tagged tool applies to many types of elements such as doors windows detail items and masses It also applies to rooms and areas Some elements such as walls must be tagged separately This function can be useful for example when you place and tag rooms in a floor plan view and you want to see tags for the same rooms in a reflected ceiling plan RCP view NOTE The d...

Page 1169: ...d generic models in one operation To select multiple categories while pressing SHIFT or CTRL select the desired categories 6 To attach a leader to each tag do the following Under Leader select Create For Length enter a default leader length 7 For Orientation select Horizontal or Vertical 8 Click OK NOTE If the visibility of the tag category or its object type is turned off a message displays Click...

Page 1170: ...g to have a leader line on the Options Bar select Leader 4 Highlight the material to tag within the component and click to place the tag You can move the end of the leader to a new material and the new material will display in the material tag NOTE You can highlight the material before you select it by moving the mouse over the material The material must be displayed by setting the detail level to...

Page 1171: ... add an arrowhead to the leader line click Manage tab Project Settings panel Settings drop down Object Styles In the Object Styles dialog click the Annotation change the color weight and pattern of the leader Objects tab scroll to the appropriate tag and specify values for Line Weight Line Color and Line Pattern Rehosting a Tag If needed you can change the element to which a tag applies The new el...

Page 1172: ...ponds to the current floor plan view As you place subsequent rooms on that level the room numbers follow in sequence 202 203 204 and so on 4 Click OK 5 Click Home tab Room Area panel Room to create additional rooms and room tags All subsequent rooms are numbered sequentially Creating Sequential Door or Window Tags To number window and door tags you enter a unique value for the Mark parameter 1 Pla...

Page 1173: ... use the Generic Annotation template For more information see The Families Guide on page 418 As you create a symbol family you notice that you can only see it in one view Like other annotations it is view specific 2 Click Annotate tab Detail panel Symbol 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area where you want the symbol to appear 4 Click to place it Modifying Symbols You can modify the appearance of...

Page 1174: ...eating an annotation symbol Your steps may differ based on design intent 1 Click New Annotation Symbol 2 In the New Annotation Symbol dialog select the Annotation Symbol template for the project and click OK The templates are all very similar Some may already have predefined properties and values Revit Architecture opens the Family Editor 3 Click Create tab Family Properties panel Category and Par...

Page 1175: ...TE Generic annotations have multiple leader options when loaded into a project Insulation The Insulation tool places a batt insulation graphic for detail views Adding Insulation 1 Click Annotate tab Detail panel Insulation 2 Sketch the insulation in a detail view Insulation is sketched similar to lines You can set an offset from the cursor and you can pick a line on which to sketch the insulation ...

Page 1176: ...etail view is a view of the model that appears as a callout or section in other views This type of view typically represents the model at finer scales of detail than in the parent view It is used to add more information to specific parts of the model Visibility of a detail view tag depends on the scale of the parent view and whether the crop boundary of the detail view intersects or is entirely wi...

Page 1177: ...on tool Click View tab Create panel Callout Click View tab Create panel Section 2 Click Callout or Section tab Element panel and select Detail View Detail as the view type from the Type Selector drop down 3 On the Options Bar select an appropriate detail scale 4 To reference another detail or drafting view on the Options Bar click Reference other view and select a view from the list 5 Choose 2 poi...

Page 1178: ...region to show concrete grass or sealant As you sketch the lines for the region you can change the line style by clicking Create Filled Region Boundary tab Draw panel Properties In the Instance Properties dialog select a different value for the Subcategory property For example you might want the region boundary to have invisible lines 12 Add detail components to the detail See Creating a Detail Co...

Page 1179: ...s From Callouts Duplicating a Detail View To copy the model geometry from an existing view into a new view right click the existing view in the Project Browser and click Duplicate View Duplicate If you right click and click Duplicate View Duplicate with Detailing both the model geometry and the detail geometry are copied into the new view Detail geometry includes detail components detail lines rep...

Page 1180: ...k Insert tab Import panel Insert from File drop down Insert 2D Elements from File 2 In the Open dialog select a project that was saved as a detail view and click Open 3 In the Insert 2D Elements dialog select a view that contains the 2D elements you wish to insert This copies the 2D Detail Components repeating details detail lines insulation and filled regions to the new detail view Although model...

Page 1181: ... drafting views do not display any model elements When you create a drafting view in a project it is saved with the project When using drafting views consider the following Similar to other views drafting views are listed in the Project Browser under Drafting Views See Project Browser on page 93 All of the detailing tools used in detail views are available to you in drafting views See Detailing To...

Page 1182: ...g Regions and Filled Regions to construct the geometry in this view See Detailing Tools on page 1146 Also see Drafting Views on page 1139 and Sketching on page 303 Importing a View From Another CAD Program You can import a view from another CAD program and create a detail from that view 1 Click View tab Create panel Drafting View 2 Enter a name and appropriate scale for the new drafting view 3 Cli...

Page 1183: ...ine the look of section tags and callout tags When the drafting view is a reference view the Reference Label parameter sets the text displayed next to the view tag Reusing Drafting Views Referencing a Drafting View When you create a detail callout from a section plan or elevation view you can click Reference Other View on the Options Bar to reference any detail or drafting view from the Project Br...

Page 1184: ...uplicate type names the type name and properties from the current project are used and a warning message displays Related topics Inserting Schedule Views from Another Project on page 191 Inserting Detail Components from a Saved Detail View on page 1138 Saving Views to an External Project on page 1138 Creating Details After you have created a view for detailing you can use additional resources prov...

Page 1185: ...s Guide on page 418 The following procedure is a general procedure for creating a detail component family Your steps may differ depending on your design intent 1 In the Family Editor sketch reference planes for placing the detail component 2 Use tools on the Create tab to create the shape of the detail component A detail component is displayed in a symbolic form and is not shown in 3D Click the Li...

Page 1186: ...e 2 reference planes to have elements contract or expand based on the length TIP You can change the sorting order of objects in the family by using the detail component draw order tools For more information see Sorting the Draw Order of Detail Components on page 1156 3 For lines select the line and click Modify Lines tab Visibility panel Visibility Settings and select the views in which the object...

Page 1187: ...parameter you need to define the Number parameter in the family s instance properties Maximum Spacing indicates that the detail component is spaced at an even interval along the length of the path and at a distance up to the value specified for Spacing The actual spacing used may be less to ensure a complete component at either end of the path 7 Select the Inside parameter to confine the spacing o...

Page 1188: ...ce a symbol such as a direction arrow or a break mark symbol to indicate omitted information See Symbols on page 1130 Masking Region Create masking regions to obscure elements in a view See Masking Regions on page 1147 Filled Region Create detail filled regions and give them a fill pattern to represent various surfaces including concrete or compacted earth You draw regions on the default work plan...

Page 1189: ...regions 2D masking regions can be created in a project and in the Family Editor when you are creating a 2D family annotation detail or title block 3D masking regions can be created in the Family Editor when you are creating a model family Masking regions do not participate in shading they are always drawn the background color of the drawing area Masking regions cannot be applied to element subcate...

Page 1190: ...plied You can view this detail family by opening the Nominal Cut Lumber Section family in the following directory Imperial or Metric Library Detail Components Div 06 Wood and Plastic 06100 Rough Carpentry 06110 Wood Framing After you add a masking region you can sort the draw order For more information see Sorting the Draw Order of Detail Components on page 1156 Masking Regions in Model Families W...

Page 1191: ...cted for both the table and the chair The chair masks the table because the chair back is higher than the table In the second image the Draw in Foreground parameter is cleared for the chair so that the masking region is drawn where it was sketched The Draw in Foreground parameter is still selected for the table Therefore the table masks the chair Scenario 2 The following images also show the same ...

Page 1192: ...ate a model family that only contains 2D elements for example a 2D toilet fixture and you want to apply a masking region to the 2D element you must include an invisible line to represent the Z dimension which is where the masking region is drawn The invisible line must be drawn above the level and must be a minimal length such as 1 8 so that the masking region does not obscure any other elements i...

Page 1193: ... for example Plumbing Fixture wall based rft and click Open 3 Open the view to import the DWG file into For example if you have a DWG file for a plan representation open the plan view 4 Click Insert tab Import panel Import CAD 5 In the Import CAD Formats dialog navigate to the DWG file If you only want the representation to be visible in plan view select the Current View Only option Also if you ar...

Page 1194: ...he area of the masking region This is a read only value Area Identity Data Comments for the masking region Comments Properties for Masking Regions in 2D and 3D Families Description Name Constraints Draws the masking region on the closest work plane in the view This property is only available in the Family Editor when you are creating or modifying a 3D family For more information see Masking Region...

Page 1195: ...l patterns are based on the actual dimensions in the building model The following procedure is a general method for creating a filled region Steps may vary depending on your design intent 1 Click Annotate tab Detail panel Region 2 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab Element panel and select a boundary line style from the Line Styles drop down 3 Sketch the region using the sketch tools on the D...

Page 1196: ...part of an annotation family Revit Architecture identifies it as a Filled Region but does not store it in the Project Browser Detail Lines The Detail Line tool creates detail lines for detailing drawings Detail lines are visible only in the view in which they are drawn Often they are drawn over the model view NOTE If you want to sketch lines that exist in 3D space and display in all views see Mode...

Page 1197: ...nents on page 1156 Show Hidden Lines After you put detail components in the correct graphic draw order you can use the Show Hidden Lines tool to obscure the lines behind a detail component 1 Select Modify tab Edit Linework panel Show Hidden 2 Select the elements that you want to show hidden lines through Lines from obscured elements will show through these elements 3 Select one or more elements fo...

Page 1198: ...er use in other projects This allows for reuse and saves duplication of work You can save views that contain only view specific elements such as drafting views To save 2D views do either of the following To save a single view in the Project Browser right click the view and click Save to New File Navigate to the desired location enter a file name and click Save To save several views from the projec...

Page 1199: ...related to the tag type The Label Parameters window contains the Category Parameters that display in the label Typically this is a single parameter but you can detail more complex concatenated labels Building a Label You add and remove parameters by moving them between the windows Highlight a parameter in the Category Parameters window and click Add Parameter to move it into the Label Parameters w...

Page 1200: ...er Options The columns in the Label Parameters window display annotation options for the label The parameter names are listed in order in the first column Spaces You increase or decrease the spacing between parameters in the label by entering a representative number of spaces zero or greater This option disables if the Break option is selected Prefix You can add a prefix to the parameter value by ...

Page 1201: ...ilable only for feet and fractional inches 8 Click OK Label Type Properties You can modify the Type Properties of labels Description Name Graphics Sets the color of the text and the leader line Color Sets the thickness of the line that surrounds the text when you select the text and the thickness of the leader line You can change the definition of the line weight numbers using the Line Weights too...

Page 1202: ...ght of the label boundary Horizontal Align Text in the label remains readable whenever you rotate it It never displays upside down Keep Readable Sets whether the label is visible in a project Visible Applying the Label to a Tag in a Project 1 In a project click Insert tab Load from Library panel Load Family 2 Navigate to the family you want to load and click Open If prompted to replace a family of...

Page 1203: ...brary panel Load Family 2 Create a sheet using the titleblock See Sheets on page 1030 The new sheet view opens with the label you created in the titleblock family 3 Select the label and click Element Properties 4 From the Instance properties list locate the parameter you defined for the family and enter a value for it 5 Click OK Applying the Label to a Titleblock in a Project 1161 ...

Page 1204: ...1162 ...

Page 1205: ...us effects and content such as lighting plants decals and people As an alternative you can export a 3D view and use another software application to render the image See Exporting to 3ds Max on page 1373 Rendering Workflow In Revit Architecture the process of rendering a 3D view is as follows The first 4 steps can be performed in any order 1 Create a 3D view of the building model See 3D Views on pa...

Page 1206: ...ddress lighting needs and plan the visual impact of lights You can define lighting fixtures and their light sources placing them in the building model for best effect When you render a 3D view you can specify whether the artificial lights natural light or both will display in the rendered image Related topic Defining the Sunlight Source for Shadows on page 253 Lights Overview Lighting is an import...

Page 1207: ...ighting fixture families for wall lights ceiling lights table lamps floor lamps exterior lighting and other types of lighting fixtures You can use the Family Editor to design your own lighting fixtures You can also download additional lighting fixture families from the Revit Web Content Library and other sources Related topics Creating and Modifying Lighting Fixtures on page 1169 Using Lighting Fi...

Page 1208: ...n page 1170 Defining a Light Source on page 1180 Controlling the Brightness of a Light Source on page 1196 Adjust Light Sources Before Rendering on page 1168 Displaying Light Sources in a View on page 1192 Photometrics and IES Files In Revit Architecture photometrics are parameters for creating realistic lighting fixture families Photometrics help to define the visible light that displays in a ren...

Page 1209: ...ying photometric properties for a lighting fixture set the light distribution to Photometric Web and use the manufacturer s IES file if one is available Because an IES file provides a more accurate representation of the light source you get better results in a rendered image To obtain an IES file go to the website of the lighting manufacturer and search for ies Locate the IES file for the desired ...

Page 1210: ...ed topic Connectors on page 435 Adjust Light Sources Before Rendering A common goal of rendering an image is to check the effect of lighting on the building model For example suppose you want to evenly illuminate the facade of a building After placing lighting fixtures you want to make sure that the lights provide the desired result However the rendering process can be resource intensive Before re...

Page 1211: ...Revit Architecture lighting fixtures are model elements that are defined by Revit families Revit Architecture provides several lighting fixture families which you can use in projects or as the basis for custom lighting fixtures To create or modify a lighting fixture family use the Family Editor Related topics Lighting Fixtures on page 1165 Using Lighting Fixtures in a Building Model on page 1190 R...

Page 1212: ...riate amount of light 5 Click Family Properties panel Types 6 In the Family Types dialog specify values for the parameters See Parameters for Lighting Fixtures and Light Sources on page 1182 7 Click OK 8 Click Load into Project to load the light fixture into the current project or save the fixture and exit the Family Editor Creating Lighting Fixtures with Multiple Light Sources To create a lightin...

Page 1213: ...fixture and its light sources are listed as one item Not shared settings for individual light sources For ex For example for a chandelier the individual ample you can change the initial intensity candles cannot be listed individually grouped or totalled for the entire chandelier but not for its indi vidual candles To share a lighting fixture family 1 Open the lighting fixture family in the Family ...

Page 1214: ...urce Turning on the light source allows you to specify photometric parameters for it c Select Shared Sharing the light source family ensures that a lighting fixture schedule can display information for individual lights and that you can adjust lighting parameters for individual lights See Sharing a Lighting Fixture Family on page 1171 d Click OK e Save the light source family 3 Create the host lig...

Page 1215: ...host lighting fixture family the track See Modifying Families in a Project or Nested Family on page 430 6 Place one or more instances of the light source family into the host lighting fixture family as follows a If needed open the host lighting fixture family in the Family Editor b Click Home tab Build panel Component drop down Place a Component c Click Place Component tab Element panel and select...

Page 1216: ...ting a chandelier You can also use this procedure to create a lighting fixture family that has multiple light sources and for which you do not want to schedule the light sources or control their lighting parameters individually The specific steps required will vary depending on your needs and design intent To create a chandelier 1 Create the host chandelier family as follows a Create the geometry ...

Page 1217: ...mily create one candle light source as follows a Create geometry for the candle b Put the candle in the desired position on the chandelier and lock it in place c Define the geometry of the light source See Defining the Geometry of a Light Source on page 1180 d Define its parameters See Defining Parameters for Lighting Fixtures and Light Sources on page 1182 e In the drawing area move the light sou...

Page 1218: ...ource for the chandelier candle d Define parameters for the light source See Defining Parameters for Lighting Fixtures and Light Sources on page 1182 e Save the light source family In the following steps this family is referred to as the candle family 5 Load the candle family into the host chandelier family See Modifying Families in a Project or Nested Family on page 430 6 Place one or more instan...

Page 1219: ... in a chandelier a In the host chandelier family select one of the candles from the candle family b Click Modify Element tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Type Properties The Type Properties dialog displays a column with an equal sign in the column heading A gray button displays in this column for each type parameter that you can link to other parameters c Click the gray button in the...

Page 1220: ...file provided by Revit Architecture The Revit IES files reside in the following location by default C Program Files product name and version Data Electrical Components IES 2 Specify Photometric Web light distribution as follows a Open the lighting fixture family in the Family Editor See Modifying a Lighting Fixture Family on page 1179 b In the drawing area select the light source c Click Modify Li...

Page 1221: ... click Edit In the Revit window click Open Family Navigate to the location of the lighting fixture family RFA file Select the file and click Open The Family Editor opens displaying the lighting fixture family in the drawing area 2 Modify the lighting fixture family as desired To change the hardware of the lighting fixture edit its geometry See Family Editor on page 416 To change the light source d...

Page 1222: ...ght Source on page 1180 3 Define parameters for the light source See Parameters for Lighting Fixtures and Light Sources on page 1182 Defining the Geometry of a Light Source The geometry of a light source determines the shape of the light that emits from the lighting fixture For example the following image shows 2 different geometries for light sources NOTE The Family Editor is the only place where...

Page 1223: ...e Properties dialog for Light Source Definition click Edit The Light Source Definition dialog displays 4 For Emit from Shape select the shape of the light to emit from the light source Point Line Rectangle or Circle 5 For Light distribution select the pattern of light distribution for the light source Spherical HemiSpherical Spot or Photometric Web TIP If you plan to specify an IES file to define ...

Page 1224: ...Properties panel Types 3 In the Family Types dialog for Name select the family type to modify You can define different parameter values for different family types For more information see The Families Guide on page 418 4 Define parameters as desired See Parameters for Lighting Fixtures and Light Sources on page 1182 5 Click Apply 6 Optional Repeat this process for other family types defined for th...

Page 1225: ... views extending from the boundary of the Emit from Shape outwards Light Source Symbol Size For example suppose you define a light source with an Emit from Shape of circle and an Emit from Circle Diameter of 500 mm If you specify a Light Source Symbol Size of 200 mm in a 2D view Revit Architecture shows a light source symbol that is 900 mm in diameter 200 500 200 This parameter is available when t...

Page 1226: ...ation about wattage requirements for the lighting fixture Wattage Comments Photometrics The following parameters affect rendered images You may be able to obtain parameter values from the manufacturer of the light source Check the manufacturer s website The IES file that defines the light emitted from the light source This parameter is available when the Light distribution setting is Photomet ric ...

Page 1227: ...t from Shape Emit from Rectangle Width setting is Rectangle See Defining the Geometry of a Light Source on page 1180 The length of the rectangle that represents the light source in a rendered image This parameter is available when the Emit from Shape setting is Rectangle Emit from Rectangle Length The length of the line that represents the light source in a rendered image This parameter is availab...

Page 1228: ... See Changing the Light Loss Factor for a Light Source on page 1196 To define the light loss factor 1 Open the lighting fixture family 2 Click Family Properties panel Types 3 For Name select the family type to modify 4 Scroll down the list to locate the Light Loss Factor parameter and click in its Value column The Light Loss Factor dialog displays 5 Specify the calculation method for Light Loss Fa...

Page 1229: ...st Loss Factor that is produced by a given ballast Valid values are between 0 and 1 For example a value of 0 95 indicates that the ballast produces 95 of its initial lumens and loses 5 For metal halide lamps a measure of the amount of light lost due to the position of the lamp A decrease in light occurs when the angle of the lamp shifts the cold spot of the bulb Values less than 1 0 indicate a los...

Page 1230: ...r the parameters See Initial Intensity Parameters on page 1188 6 Click OK The Family Types dialog displays the new Initial Intensity value 7 Click OK 8 Save changes to the lighting fixture family Initial Intensity Parameters When defining the Initial Intensity of a light source define the parameters as follows Description Parameter A measurement of the electrical power consumed by a light source T...

Page 1231: ...fy the distance at which the illuminance is measured At a distance of Defining the Initial Color When defining a lighting fixture you can specify the initial color of its light source The initial color is the color appearance of the emitted light before it is affected by color filters or environmental factors To define the initial color of a light source 1 Open the lighting fixture family 2 Click ...

Page 1232: ...ure open a section or an elevation To place a table lamp or a floor lamp open a floor plan or a section 3 Click Home tab Build panel Component drop down Place a Component 4 Click Place Component tab Element panel and select the lighting fixture from the Type Selector drop down 5 In the drawing area click to place instances of the lighting fixture in the desired locations 6 To exit the Component to...

Page 1233: ... lighting fixture family in the Family Editor 5 Name a reference plane that is parallel to the wall as follows a In the Project Browser under Views all Floor Plans double click Ref Level or a floor plan view that shows reference planes for the lighting fixture b In the drawing area select a reference plane that is near the wall and parallel to it If the lighting fixture family does not include a r...

Page 1234: ...roperties 3 In the Instance Properties dialog change the values of the parameters as needed The instance parameters that are available vary depending on the lighting fixture family and how its family parameters are defined 4 To change type parameters do the following a In the Instance Properties dialog click Edit Type b In the Type Properties dialog change parameter values as desired The type para...

Page 1235: ...hts See Angles for Spotlights on page 1195 Aiming a Spotlight In a building model you can control the position of a spotlight to achieve the desired lighting effects To position a spotlight use its angle parameters and the Rotate tool To aim a spotlight 1 Add spotlights to the building model placing them in their approximate locations See Adding a Lighting Fixture to a Building Model on page 1190 ...

Page 1236: ...ther view select a spotlight and click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Type Properties b Click Duplicate to create a new type c Enter a name for the type and click OK d In the Type Properties dialog scroll down to locate the Tilt Angle Spot Field Angle and Spot Beam Angle parameters e Enter the desired values for each parameter See Angles for Spotlights on p...

Page 1237: ...n illumination of the wall Angles for Spotlights When defining a spotlight you can specify the following angles Beam angle The angle at which light intensity reaches 50 of the peak intensity Enter a value between 0 and 160 degrees To make a spot that is small and bright enter a smaller value Field angle The angle at which light intensity reaches 10 of the peak intensity Enter a value between 0 and...

Page 1238: ...hen you change the initial intensity of a light source the change affects all relevant project views 1 In a project view select a lighting fixture and click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Type Properties 2 Click Duplicate to create a new type 3 Enter a name for the type and click OK 4 In the Type Properties dialog for Initial Intensity click in the Value co...

Page 1239: ...Artificial Lights dialog in the Dimming column enter dimming values for light groups or individual lighting fixtures Enter a value between 0 and 1 to indicate the relative amount of dimming A value of 1 means that the light is completely on not dimmed A value of 0 means that the light is completely dimmed off NOTE If a lighting fixture is a nested family that contains multiple light sources but is...

Page 1240: ...it Architecture However settings to dim or turn on or off light groups or individual lighting fixtures apply to individual 3D views only NOTE The number of lights in a 3D view to be rendered can significantly increase render time Use light groups to turn off unnecessary lights in the view See Render Performance and Lighting on page 1234 1198 Chapter 19 Rendering ...

Page 1241: ...dialog 1 In a Revit Architecture project open a 3D view 2 Open the Rendering dialog See Opening the Rendering Dialog on page 1222 3 Under Lighting for Scheme select a setting that includes artificial lights 4 Click Artificial Lights Creating a Light Group 1 Open the Artificial Lights dialog See Opening the Artificial Lights Dialog on page 1199 2 Under Group Options click New 3 In the New Light Gro...

Page 1242: ... group do the following a In the Artificial Lights dialog under Grouped Lights expand the light group name b Select the lighting fixture to remove from the group c Under Fixture Options click Remove from Group In the Artificial Lights dialog the selected lighting fixture displays under Ungrouped Lights 4 When you are finished in the Artificial Lights dialog click OK Adding and Removing Lights in a...

Page 1243: ...to indicate that it is being added to the group c If necessary you can open another project view click Light Group panel Add and select more lighting fixtures to add to the group 4 To remove lighting fixtures from the group do the following a Click Light Group panel Remove The lighting fixtures that are currently assigned to a light group display as green b Select each lighting fixture that you wa...

Page 1244: ...t includes artificial lights 4 Click Artificial Lights 5 In the Artificial Lights dialog under On Off select individual lighting fixtures or light groups to include them in the rendered image Clear the check boxes to omit the lights in the rendered image You can also enter values in the Dimming column to dim individual lighting fixtures or entire light groups See Dimming Lights on page 1197 6 Clic...

Page 1245: ...r such as picture frames and computers Similar to model elements in Revit Architecture entourage objects are defined in Revit families Revit Architecture provides a library of entourage families If you have additional entourage objects that you want to use in projects you can add them to existing families or create families for them In 2D and 3D views entourage is represented using simple line dra...

Page 1246: ...section views When you render a 3D view the people are displayed in detail Revit Architecture provides 2 RPC families for people RPC Male and RPC Female for metric systems M_RPC Male and M_RPC Female In each family types provide render appearances for different men and women When you load these RPC families into a project the Type Selector displays the available people Select the desired RPC perso...

Page 1247: ... may want to include cars and other types of vehicles Revit Architecture provides one RPC car You can purchase more vehicles from ArchVision When you place a car in a view you can modify its properties For example you can tint the windows and specify a custom license plate See Automobile Properties on page 1207 Office Clutter When you render an interior view you may want to add furnishings and fix...

Page 1248: ...arance for the entourage the drawing area displays an appropriate placeholder for it 3 Create family types and specify their parameters See The Families Guide on page 418 For example suppose you want to include a variety of red ash trees in a project so you create an RPC family named Red Ash You define 3 family types named Tall Short and Autumn In the type parameters you can specify a different he...

Page 1249: ...pecify parameters for the render appearance and click OK See Render Appearance Properties for RPC Objects on page 1207 8 In the Family Types dialog click Apply 9 Optional Repeat this process for other family types defined for the RPC family 10 Click OK 11 Save changes to the RPC family Render Appearance Properties for RPC Objects The properties for render appearances vary depending on the type of ...

Page 1250: ...e shows a reversed mirror reflection of the plant on other surfaces such as glass When this option is cleared the Cast Reflections rendered image shows a repeat image in the reflecting surface instead of a reversed mirror image See Cast Reflections on page 1210 View Whether to use a single image for the plant regardless of the direction from which it is viewed in a walkthrough To lock the view sel...

Page 1251: ...hen open Open Whether the notebook computer is turned on and can display an image Power Whether the computer screen displays a specified image when the computer is open and turned on Custom Screen Custom image to display on the computer screen Click Browse to navigate to the file This image displays only when Power and Custom Screen are selected See Best Practice for Storing Image Files on page 51...

Page 1252: ...mage Whether to use the specified frame in a rendered image Use Specified Frame The frame to use in a rendered image Frame Cast Reflections The Cast Reflections property for RPC objects works differently than a similar setting in Autodesk 3ds Max RPC content provides a specialized texture that is applied to a flat plane When the texture is applied to the opposite side of the plane unusual reflecti...

Page 1253: ... dialog select the desired settings See Setting Family Geometry Visibility on page 513 d Click OK 5 Create family types and specify their parameters See The Families Guide on page 418 6 Specify a render appearance By default for an entourage family Revit Architecture uses the family geometry that you imported or sketched in the drawing area to represent the object in a rendered image If desired yo...

Page 1254: ...cm archvision com help Now you must specify the location of the ACM so that Revit Architecture can access the additional RPC content 2 In Revit Architecture click Options 3 In the Options dialog click the Rendering tab 4 Under ArchVision Content Manager Location select Local 5 For Executable Location specify the location of the ACM executable file rpcACMapp exe By default Revit Architecture attemp...

Page 1255: ...roject and place the entourage objects in a project view for rendering See Placing Plants and Entourage in a Project View on page 1213 Placing Plants and Entourage in a Project View 1 Open a floor plan view or a 3D orthographic view in a Revit Architecture project You cannot place plants or entourage in perspective views elevation views or section views 2 Load a family of plants or entourage as fo...

Page 1256: ...206 Maple trees of different heights To change the size of a plant in a project 1 In a view select a plant to modify and click Modify Planting tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Type Properties 2 If you want to change the height of all plants of this type in the current project do the following a In the Type Properties dialog for Height enter a value to indicate the new height of the p...

Page 1257: ...g enter a name for the decal and click OK The Decal Types dialog displays the new decal name and its attributes 4 For Image File specify the file to use Click Browse to navigate to the file Revit Architecture supports image files of the following types BMP JPG JPEG and PNG See Best Practice for Storing Image Files on page 519 5 Specify the remaining attributes of the decal See Decal Attributes on ...

Page 1258: ... the Options Bar enter values for Width and Height To maintain the aspect ratio between these dimensions select Lock Proportions 5 In the drawing area click a flat surface such as a wall face or roof face or a cylindrical surface on which to place the decal The decal displays as a placeholder a clear box with 2 lines through it in all non rendered views as shown The detailed decal image is visible...

Page 1259: ...he decal image and its attributes by clicking Insert tab Link panel Decals drop down Decal Types Renaming a Decal Type 1 Click Insert tab Link panel Decals drop down Decal Types 2 In the decals list select the decal type to rename 3 Click Rename 4 In the Rename dialog enter a new name and click OK Duplicating a Decal Type 1 Click Insert tab Link panel Decals drop down Decal Types 2 In the decals l...

Page 1260: ... each decal instance and decal type You can also change attributes of the decal image Modifying Decal Properties 1 In a project view select the decal and click Modify Element Element panel Element Properties drop down Instance Properties 2 In the Instance Properties dialog edit the instance parameters See Decal Instance Properties on page 1218 3 To edit decal type parameters in the Instance Proper...

Page 1261: ...notes on page 1117 Keynote Manufacturer s model number or code for the decal Model Manufacturer of the decal Manufacturer Comments or information about this type of decal Type Comments URL of the website for the manufacturer or vendor URL Description of the decal Description Description of the selected assembly code read only Assembly Description Uniformat assembly code for the decal See Uniformat...

Page 1262: ...ied to the surface on which the decal is placed For example if you place a decal on a brick wall the texture of the brick wall affects the decal in addition to the decal texture specified here Relative amplitude of the bumps Enter 0 to make the surface flat Enter higher decimal values up to 1 0 to increase the depth of the surface irregularities Bump Amount Shapes cut into the surface of the decal...

Page 1263: ... Rendering dialog under Quality specify the render quality See Specifying the Render Quality on page 1224 4 Under Output specify the following Resolution To generate a rendered image for screen display select Screen To generate a rendered image for printing select Printer DPI When Resolution is Printer specify the DPI dots per inch to use when printing the image If the project uses metric units Re...

Page 1264: ...ure of a Rendered Image on page 1230 These render settings are view specific They are saved as part of the view properties To apply these settings to other 3D views use a view template See View Templates for Render Settings on page 1232 When you finish defining render settings create the rendered image See Creating the Rendered Image on page 1229 Opening the Rendering Dialog 1 Open the 3D view to ...

Page 1265: ...methods Crop region Open the 3D view and apply a crop region to define the area to render See Cropping a View on page 211 To check or change the size of the cropped view select the crop region and click Modify Cameras tab Crop panel Size Crop Render region Open the Rendering dialog and click Region In the 3D view Revit Architecture displays the render region boundary Select the render region and u...

Page 1266: ...h quality rendered image However high quality rendered images can be slow to generate For testing purposes you may want to generate a draft quality image quickly Use the Quality Setting on the Rendering dialog to specify the desired quality for the rendered image Description Relative Render Speed Quality Render as quickly as possible to get a general idea of the rendered image The image contains m...

Page 1267: ...the following parameters to define advanced render settings See Defining a Custom Render Quality on page 1225 In general increasing or turning on any one of these settings increases the quality of the rendered image However it also increases the time required to generate the image Increasing the values of multiple settings may increase render time exponentially See Rendering Best Practices on page...

Page 1268: ...tion to include light from the sky and light that bounces off other objects Clear it to omit these light sources from the rendered image See Indirect illumination on page 1235 Compute Indirect and Sky Illumination Increase this value to achieve more detailed indirect illumination the level of detail that is visible in indirect light and shadows Greater Indirect Illumination Precision precision yie...

Page 1269: ...anced lighting quality in interior views you can enable daylight portals if needed Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows doors that contain windows or glass and curtain walls Rendered image without daylight portals Rendered image with daylight portals Daylight portals are useful only for interior views that include sunlight That is on the Rendering dialog under ...

Page 1270: ...ndering dialog under Lighting for Scheme select the desired setting 2 If you selected a lighting scheme that uses sunlight for Sun select the desired sun position To define new sun and shadow settings for the rendered image select Edit New See Defining the Sunlight Source for Shadows on page 253 Click OK or Cancel to return to the Rendering dialog 3 If you selected a lighting scheme that uses arti...

Page 1271: ...ne other render settings To specify a background with sky and clouds 1 In the Rendering dialog under Background for Style select a Sky option that indicates the desired number of clouds 2 For Haze drag the slider between Clear and Hazy 3 Continue to define other render settings Creating the Rendered Image Before starting the render process see Rendering Best Practices on page 1233 for information ...

Page 1272: ...ved as part of the view properties The next time you render this view the same exposure settings are used To adjust the exposure of a rendered image 1 In the Rendering dialog under Image click Adjust Exposure 2 In the Exposure Control dialog specify the desired settings See Exposure Control Settings on page 1230 3 Click Apply to see the results of the changes in the rendered image 4 To return to t...

Page 1273: ...value between 0 gray black white and 5 more intense colors The default is 1 Saturation Saving the Rendered Image as a Project View After rendering an image you can save the image as a project view In a project rendered images display in the Project Browser under Views all Renderings You can then place the rendered view on a sheet in a construction document set To save the rendered image as a proje...

Page 1274: ... for a Rendered Image on page 1229 Image See Adjusting the Exposure of a Rendered Image on page 1230 4 Click OK View Templates for Render Settings A view template is a collection of properties that you define for views of a particular type After defining render settings for a 3D view you can store those settings in a view template When you want to use the same render settings for another 3D view a...

Page 1275: ...ties for the image To change its properties under Views all Renderings right click the image name and click Properties Change the parameters as desired and click OK Description Parameter Identity Data The name of the view as it displays in the Project Browser and other areas of Revit Architecture View Name The view title to display on sheets See View Titles on Sheets on page 1059 Title on Sheet Th...

Page 1276: ...sor power other active processes may be interfering with the rendering process Shut down non essential tasks to make more processor power available for the rendering process Render Performance and the Building Model One of the most effective ways to reduce the amount of time required to render an image is to reduce the number of model elements that the rendering engine must consider Use one or mor...

Page 1277: ... image In the Render Quality Settings dialog use the Indirect Illumination options See Render Quality Settings on page 1225 Section boxes and light groups When you use section boxes to limit the geometry being rendered you can significantly reduce the amount of time required to render an image See Defining the View Area to Render on page 1223 You can also use light groups to turn off lighting fixt...

Page 1278: ...sy surface Water is more difficult to render than glass Metal with a patina or a hammered surface is more difficult to render than polished metal Blurred reflections are the most difficult to calculate However you can control the quality of blurred reflections to reduce the impact on render performance Use the Reflections and Transparency options See Render Quality Settings on page 1225 How Refrac...

Page 1279: ...ing When rendering a 3D view you may encounter the following issues Press Render to Update the Image Error Changes you have made to the rendering are not shown in this image Press Render to update the image Issue This message displays in the drawing area when you render an image and then change the render settings or the building model It indicates that the rendered image is out of date Solution T...

Page 1280: ... to render an image but the disk drive has insufficient space or the image file size is too large Solution To make more disk space available for the rendering process use one or more of the following strategies Reduce the size of the image to be rendered See Controlling the Size of the Rendered Image on page 1228 and Render Performance and Image Size Quality on page 1236 Make more disk space avail...

Page 1281: ...sity of a Light Source on page 1196 Wattage and Efficacy If you specify a Wattage value on the Initial Intensity dialog be sure to also specify a value for Efficacy If you change Wattage alone you may make the light source unintentionally bright Efficacy is the amount of light luminous flux measured in lumens produced by a light source as a ratio of the amount of energy consumed to produce it meas...

Page 1282: ...inaccuracies or imperfections in the rendered image In some places light reflecting on surfaces looks splotchy or speckled Edges of model elements and their shadows are not crisp Instead the edges are soft and fuzzy Issue These issues may be caused by inappropriate render quality settings or the use of default settings Solution Try adjusting the render quality settings to obtain the desired result...

Page 1283: ...be cast from these elements You can use 3D plan views section views and views created from callouts as a basis for solar studies For more information see Project Views on page 125 To produce solar studies that accurately represent the position of the sun in relation to the project when Project North differs from True North rotate the view to True North See Rotating a View to True North on page 449...

Page 1284: ...ng Settings for a Still Solar Study on page 1242 For a single day study see Specifying Settings for a Single Day Solar Study on page 1244 For a multi day study see Specifying Settings for a Multi Day Solar Study on page 1245 8 In the Graphic Display Options dialog under Sun and Shadows do the following Select Cast Shadows This option has the same effect as clicking Shadows On on the View Control B...

Page 1285: ... Level Revit Architecture casts shadows on the specified level in 2D and 3D shaded views When you clear Ground Plane at Level Revit Architecture casts shadows on the toposurface if one exists NOTE This option does not affect shadows in rendered images 5 To test the new sun and shadow settings click Apply 6 When you are finished setting up the solar study click OK Still Solar Studies Based on Azimu...

Page 1286: ...ttings for a single day solar study 1 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog click the Single Day tab 2 Select a solar study from the list 3 To change the place do the following a For Place click b On the Place tab of the Manage Place and Locations dialog select a city or specify a latitude and longitude Click OK See Specifying the Project Location on page 448 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dia...

Page 1287: ...for Date specify the start date and end date for the solar study 5 For Time enter the time of day when the solar study is to show shadows for each day 6 For Time Interval select the amount of time to elapse between each image in the animation When you select a time interval Frames displays the number of individual images that the solar study animation will contain 7 To specify the level to be used...

Page 1288: ...ypes have a single frame format allowing you to save specified frames of an animation as separate image files NOTE When you want to export to a single frame format first create a folder in which to save the files especially if you are exporting several frames The export process saves each of the specified frames as a separate image file To export a solar study 1 In the Project Browser double click...

Page 1289: ...ther dimension to maintain the proportions of the frame and it displays the equivalent zoom percentage Likewise when you change the zoom percentage Revit Architecture calculates and displays the equivalent dimensions 8 Click OK 9 In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog under Save In navigate to the target folder 10 For File name enter a file name 11 For Files of type select an export file type 1...

Page 1290: ...1248 ...

Page 1291: ...ifferent members assigned to work on specific functional areas such as the interior layout the exterior shell and the furniture layout 2 Enable worksharing When you enable worksharing Revit Architecture creates the central file for the project The central file is like the project database It stores all changes made to the project and stores all current workset and element ownership information It ...

Page 1292: ...name displays on Collaborate tab Worksets panel active workset Allows you to edit an element that you do not own If no one owns the element permission to borrow is automatically element borrowing granted If another team member is currently editing the element that team member is the owner of the element and you must place a request to borrow the element from that team member Enabling Worksharing E...

Page 1293: ...ou want to name your central file hotel 2010 rvt consider naming it hotel_2010 rvt IMPORTANT When you save the central file be sure that it is saved to a network drive that all team members have access to 8 In the Save As dialog click Options 9 In the File Save Options dialog select Make this a Central File after save NOTE If this is the first time you have saved after enabling worksharing this op...

Page 1294: ...lders see Workshared Project Rollback on page 1271 The Revit_temp folder contains files that provide progress information on operations such as Synchronize with Central to the Worksharing Monitor For more information see Worksharing Monitor on page 1274 Related topics Worksharing Workflow on page 1249 Setting Up Worksets on page 1252 Using Workshared Files on page 1257 Setting Up Worksets A workse...

Page 1295: ...alue is the user name that is listed on the General tab of the Options dialog For more information on the Options dialog see Options on page 516 Borrowers Lists the users who are currently borrowing an element from the workset If there is more than one borrower you can view the list of borrowers from the drop down list Opened Indicates if a workset is open Yes or closed No Elements in open workset...

Page 1296: ... family that is loaded in the project is assigned to a separate workset You cannot rename or delete family worksets Views Contains all project view worksets For example Floor Plan Level 1 view is assigned to a workset called View Floor Plan Level 1 View worksets contain view properties and any view specific elements such as annotations dimensions or text notes When you add view specific elements t...

Page 1297: ...ave an exterior workset visible by default while a specific furniture workset would not be Groups and families Groups and families have a type workset and an instance workset that do not have to be the same All elements in a group are in the group instance workset To edit the group make the group type workset editable or borrow the group type To modify the elements inside a group make the group in...

Page 1298: ...g an Element to a Different Workset 1 In the drawing area select an element For this example a wall is chosen NOTE If you select several elements and include view specific elements for example tags you will not be able to edit the Workset parameter To automatically filter out elements that you cannot edit on the Status Bar select Editable Only before making your selection Alternatively you can cli...

Page 1299: ...ic functional area to work on for example interior exterior or site Revit Architecture projects can be subdivided into worksets to accommodate such environments Typical worksharing tasks include the following Create a local copy of the central file It is generally recommended that you create a local copy of the central file every day After you create a local copy of the central file this is the fi...

Page 1300: ... file itself instead of a copy 4 Click Open If you are already working in the central file use Save As to create a local copy Creating a Local Copy from an Open Central File 1 Click Save As 2 In the Save As dialog navigate to the desired location on your local network or your hard drive 3 Enter a name for the file and click Save Editing Workshared Projects When using a workshared project you can e...

Page 1301: ...wing area or right click the element and click Make Elements Editable If no one else is editing the element it opens for you to edit If another team member is editing the element or has ownership of the workset to which the element belongs a message displays indicating that you cannot edit the element until the other team member the owner relinquishes it NOTE If you try to make a change to an elem...

Page 1302: ...the element name To view the element select it from the list and if the element is not visible in the current view click Show NOTE If you have modified the requested element and you have not saved your changes to the central file an asterisk appears next to the request 4 Click Grant or if you do not want the other user to borrow this element click Deny Retract You can also use Deny Retract to with...

Page 1303: ... an Element 1 Click Collaborate tab Synchronize panel Editing Requests 2 Under My pending Requests select the request 3 Click Deny Retract 4 Click Close Outdated Workshared Elements If another user changes an element and publishes the changes that element in your local file is outdated It cannot be edited even if you borrow it until you Reload Latest see Loading Updates from the Central File on pa...

Page 1304: ...from the Open dialog 1 Click Open Project 2 Navigate to your local copy of the central file and select it 3 Select an option from the Open list See Save Options on page 115 Description Workset Default Opens all worksets in the central file Opening all worksets will significantly re duce performance in larger project files All Opens all editable worksets Depending on how many editable worksets are ...

Page 1305: ... to select it hold Ctrl or Shift and select other worksets and then click Editable You can select all worksets by pressing Ctrl A 6 Click OK When you click OK ownership information is communicated to the central file and to all local copies of the central file so that all team members have the current ownership information To make worksets editable by selecting an element In the drawing area right...

Page 1306: ...ct on printing but helps to prevent adding elements to an undesired workset To visually distinguish the active workset 1 Click Collaborate tab Worksets panel Worksets 2 In the Worksets dialog select Gray Inactive Workset Graphics and click OK Alternatively Click Collaborate tab Worksets panel Gray Inactive Worksets The following image shows a project floor plan where the Interior Layout workset is...

Page 1307: ...rowed are relinquished by default when you Synchronize with Central Between synchronizations with the central file you should save changes to the local file frequently You might want to establish specific times throughout the day when each team member will be synchronizing with central This ensures that team members are not trying to Synchronize with Central at the same time At the end of the day ...

Page 1308: ...the appropriate check boxes To synchronize the changes to central but keep the worksets and elements editable clear the appropriate check boxes 4 If desired enter a comment that is saved to the central file You can see all comments using the Show History tool See Viewing Workshared File History on page 1272 5 Verify that Save local file before and after synchronizing with central is selected to en...

Page 1309: ...tions Click Relinquish unmodified elements and worksets if you want others to have access to them Unchanged editable elements and worksets are relinquished and the local file is saved You remain the borrower of any elements you changed in the editable worksets Click Keep ownership of all elements and worksets to retain all editing permissions when the local file is saved The local file closes with...

Page 1310: ...vigate to the central file and select it 3 Select Detach from Central 4 Click Open If a non workshared file is opened with Detach from Central selected Revit Architecture ignores the option and opens the file normally After you open the file it no longer has any path or permissions information It is in a state similar to when worksharing was first enabled all elements in the file can be modified b...

Page 1311: ...w elements Open the central file directly or create a new local file from the central file and choose Relinquish All Mine Best practice is to discard your original local file so that you do not accidentally work on an outdated or the wrong local file If you retain your original local file be aware that if other users have modified elements that you used to own the original local file will be incom...

Page 1312: ...e elements If someone else has checked out that workset or has borrowed elements in it there is no way to assure that there will not be a conflict Rendering Workshared Projects Offline WARNING Rendering offline is generally not recommended If you render the model offline you will likely change material assignments and other project settings To change project settings you need to check out some of ...

Page 1313: ...You can also save a prior version as a new project file When you roll back a file all later versions in the backup directory are lost In addition you lose all information on workset ownership borrowed elements and workset editability You must coordinate with team members to reassign workset and element ownership Central File Backup Files and Folders The backup folder for the central file contains ...

Page 1314: ...es a workshared file the central file or a local copy of the central file was saved and who saved it The list also shows any comments entered in the Synchronize with Central dialog 1 Click Collaborate tab Synchronize panel Show History 2 In the Show History dialog navigate to the shared file select it and click Open 3 In the History dialog click the column headers to sort alphabetically or chronol...

Page 1315: ...plays Press Ctrl A to select all worksets in this dialog Initial status is based on when the file was last opened You can specify different worksets or click OK to confirm the default 6 In the Save As dialog click Save Moving the Central File Some examples of when you may need to move a central file include Your office has a new file server and you need to move the central file from the old server...

Page 1316: ...to continue 4 Click Save As Project 5 In the Save As dialog click Options 6 In the File Save Options dialog select Make this a Central File after save and click OK 7 In the Save As dialog click Save 8 Each team member should create a new local file See Creating a Local Copy of the Central File on page 1258 NOTE If you discover that there is only one local file that was not saved to central you can...

Page 1317: ... Worksharing Monitor 3 Open a Revit project and click Add Ins tab External Tools drop down Worksharing Monitor 4 In the Worksharing Monitor dialog click Help to learn how to use the utility Worksharing Monitor 1275 ...

Page 1318: ...1276 ...

Page 1319: ...ngs such as those that compose a campus When you link a Revit model into a project Revit Architecture opens the linked model and keeps it in memory The more links a project contains the longer it can take to open Linked Revit models are listed in the Revit Links branch of the Project Browser You can convert linked Revit models to groups and you can convert groups to linked Revit models See Convert...

Page 1320: ...model that contains a linked Revit model links become nested You can show or hide nested linked models in the host model By default nested linked models are not visible in the host model When a nested link is visible you can use Tab to select nested link instances and view properties of elements in the nested link as you can with other linked models In addition the Interference Check tool checks f...

Page 1321: ...ct A within its parent model Project B to Attachment when you import Project B into Project C the nested link Project A displays To show or hide nested linked models 1 Open the parent link for the nested model 2 Click Manage tab Manage Project panel Manage Links 3 In the Manage Links dialog click the Revit tab 4 In the Reference Type column change the value for the linked model to one of the follo...

Page 1322: ...Click Modify RVT Links tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Type Properties 3 In the Type Properties dialog find the Phase Mapping parameter and click Edit 4 In the Phases dialog select the appropriate mapping options for each phase and click OK 5 Click OK to exit the Type Properties dialog To apply phase mapping in the host model 1 Click View tab Graphics panel Visibility Graphics 2 In ...

Page 1323: ...u can modify the name for a linked model instance through its properties You can also override visibility and graphics settings for each linked model instance See Visibility for Linked Revit Models on page 1282 You can copy linked Revit models using the standard copy and paste procedures see Copying Elements on page 392 or you can drag a linked Revit model from the Project Browser into a project v...

Page 1324: ...ick in the drawing area to place the element Visibility for Linked Revit Models Parameters that control the visibility and appearance of linked Revit models are grouped under their own tab Revit Links in the Visibility Graphics dialog This dialog is arranged in a tree structure with the parent nodes referring to separate files the primary linked model and the child nodes referring to instances cop...

Page 1325: ... the Linked view list For 3D views the type of 3D view you are currently viewing dictates what populates the list if you are viewing a perspective 3D view in the host model only perspective 3D views from the linked model display in the Linked View list and the same applies for orthographic 3D views NOTE If the linked model has annotations that you want to display in the project the annotations mus...

Page 1326: ...urrently applying visibility and graphic settings for For example if you are in an elevation view only elevation views populate the Linked view list For 3D views the type of 3D view you are currently viewing dictates what populates the list if you are viewing a perspective 3D view in the host model only perspective 3D views from the linked model display in the Linked View list and the same applies...

Page 1327: ...ditional tab is available for Design Options Any one of the available options can be selected to include in the reported schedule data Linked Model Properties You can modify the properties of a linked model including the name of the linked model instance and the shared positioning settings To modify linked model properties right click the linked model name in the Project Browser under Revit Links ...

Page 1328: ...o means of determining unresolved references in a file Use the Show details option in the Unresolved References dialog Click Open Manage Links to correct the problem from the Unresolved References dialog Unresolved references will be listed as Not Found in the Status column Be sure to check each file format tab if multiple file types have been used in the file NOTE You can also open the Manage Lin...

Page 1329: ...of the central file Saved Path Indicates whether the linked model s saved path is relative or absolute See Link Man agement Options on page 1287 Path Type Location of the linked model if it is a local copy of a central file For more information Local Alias Revit models only on the central file and worksharing see Working in a Team on page 1249 Link Management Options To manage links in your file s...

Page 1330: ...efines the location of a linked file on a disk or network drive In general you should use a relative path instead of an absolute path If you use a relative path and later move the project and the linked file together to a new directory the link is maintained Revit tries to find the linked model by its relative position to the working directory If you use an absolute path and later move the project...

Page 1331: ...sets are editable After updating the link the team member should synchronize with central so that all team members have the updated link See Saving Workshared Files on page 1265 Also you may want to create a workset exclusively for links so that workflow is not interrupted See Setting Up Worksets on page 1252 Multi Discipline Coordination Building projects that are worked on by teams of architects...

Page 1332: ...nal type in the linked file is mapped to the corresponding default type in the host file You can change it to another type which means the copy assumes the new type You can also choose not to copy the element 7 Double click in the New type column for the category or type click the arrow icon and select Copy original type Don t copy this Type the original type for example 1 4 Head or the new type f...

Page 1333: ...prefix to Grid Name Columns Split columns into smaller ones at level lines Split Columns by Levels Walls Select to copy hosted elements such as windows doors and openings Copy windows doors openings Floors Select to copy inserts and openings NOTE If this option is selected all in serts are copied as openings Copy openings inserts 9 Click OK to close the Copy Monitor Options dialog 10 Click Copy Mo...

Page 1334: ...t or Select Link Revit Architecture enters Copy Monitor mode 15 Click Copy Monitor tab Tools panel Monitor You establish relationships between pairs of corresponding elements For example you select one grid and then another grid to form a relationship You cannot monitor unlike pairs such as a grid and a level If you select an opening you can monitor openings or inserts for example a window or door...

Page 1335: ...t project or click Collaborate tab Coordinate panel Coordination Review drop down Select Link to check warnings between the linked and the host projects If you chose Select Link click the link in the drawing area The Coordination Review dialog displays If you are running a review on the current project click the In host project tab If you are running a review on a link and the host project and lin...

Page 1336: ...l can be used during the design process to coordinate major building elements and systems It can be used to prevent conflicts and reduce the risk of construction changes and cost overruns A common workflow might occur like this An architect meets with a client and creates a basic model The building model is sent to a team that includes members from other disciplines such as structural engineers Th...

Page 1337: ...tegory 7 Click OK If there are no interferences to report a dialog displays informing you of this If there are interferences to report the Interference Report dialog displays The dialog lists all elements that are in conflict with one another Interferences are grouped according to the way you generated the check By default they are grouped as Category 1 left category column and Category 2 right ca...

Page 1338: ...s Shared coordinates are used for remembering the mutual positions of multiple interlinked files Those interlinked files can be all Revit files or a combination of Revit DWG and DXF files Recommended Uses for Shared Positioning If the significant coordinates for a project are in a linked model such as a building model with a linked site acquire the coordinates from the linked model If the signific...

Page 1339: ...g location in the host model You can drag the linked file to another position inside the host model When you do this you are actually changing the corresponding location in the linked file When you reposition the linked file to a new location you can save that change There are several ways to do this Warning Dialog After you move the linked file a warning indicates that the linked file will change...

Page 1340: ...hoose a location name The listed location names are from the linked model file When you click OK the linked instance moves to the recorded position for that named location Select Record Current Position As to record the current location of the linked model instance back to its file If you want to create a new location name for the instance click Change to add a new location name that is also saved...

Page 1341: ...to a linked DWG this changes the linked DWG The origin of the host Revit Architecture project s shared coordinate system becomes the origin of a new User Coordinate System UCS in the DWG file The Y axis of the new UCS corresponds to the host project s True North You can name the UCS when you publish coordinates It is not recommended that you change this name after publishing coordinates To publish...

Page 1342: ...ons move relative to all linked instances at shared locations Related topics Project Location and Orientation on page 448 Rotating a View to True North on page 449 Relocating a Project The Relocate this Project tool moves the entire project relative to the shared coordinate system 1 Click Manage tab Project Location panel Position drop down Relocate Project You use the tool just like the Move tool...

Page 1343: ...ationships between elements are not supported as in the original orientation of the project This can lead to unexpected results and errors for example some elements may deviate from exact reflection After you mirror the project a message displays to indicate any errors encountered You can export errors to review and correct them For information on exporting errors see Exporting Warnings to a File ...

Page 1344: ...project base point select Project Base Point 4 To display the survey point select Survey Point You can also click Reveal Hidden Elements on the View Control bar to turn on the visibility of the project base point and survey point in a view Moving Project Base Points and Survey Points The project base point and the survey point can be clipped or unclipped By default they are clipped in all views To...

Page 1345: ...ct base point in a new project To return the project base point to its startup location 1 Unclip the project base point 2 Right click the project base point and click Move to Startup Location Pinning Project Base Points and Survey Points You cannot move a pinned project base point or survey point Pinning the project base point disables the Relocate Project and the Rotate Project North tools Pinnin...

Page 1346: ...ordinates on the Location tab of the Building Site Export dialog using the coordinates provided by the civil engineer To ensure that an imported DWG site is positioned correctly in the project 1 Using the coordinates you received from the civil engineer specify the shared coordinates of the survey point 2 Specify the correct angle for True North 3 Specify Positioning Auto by Shared Coordinates to ...

Page 1347: ...used and simplified as a project progresses They are typically used as follows Changing the entry design Exploring different layouts for rooms or furniture Trying different window configurations Developing sustainable design alternatives You can use design options to explore multiple designs as the project develops At any time in the design process you can have multiple sets of design options Typi...

Page 1348: ...Design Option Workflow In general the process of using design options is as follows 1 Decide on the areas for which you want to develop design options 1306 Chapter 22 Design Options ...

Page 1349: ...ondary options for each design option set You can create one or more secondary options for each set See Adding Design Options on page 1310 Example For the Entry option set you create secondary options named Revolving Door and Two Double Doors In general any elements that will be modified or referenced in an option should belong to the design option instead of the main model See Referencing Element...

Page 1350: ...evit Architecture shows the design option along with the main model See Dedicating Views to Design Options on page 1318 Dedicated view Best Practices for Design Options When implementing design options consider the following strategies To prepare the main model for design options In the main model create as much of the model as possible before adding any design options Include elements that will b...

Page 1351: ...You create schedules that are dedicated to design options in the same way that you create dedicated views See Dedicating Views to Design Options on page 1318 To incorporate a design option After a design option is selected for implementation incorporate it into the main model and delete all other options using the Accept Primary function See Incorporating a Design Option into the Main Model on pag...

Page 1352: ...ecture also creates a primary option which you must edit to add its elements See Editing a Design Option on page 1311 Use the following procedure to add secondary design options To add a design option 1 Click Manage tab Design Options panel Design Options 2 In the Design Options dialog in the left hand list select the design option set to which you want to add an option 3 Under Option click New Th...

Page 1353: ...ption column select Automatic d Click OK 3 Open the design option for editing using one of the following methods Click Manage tab Design Options panel Design Options In the Design Options dialog select the design option from the list click Edit Selected and click Close Click Manage tab Design Options panel and select the desired design option from the drop down list Click Manage tab Design Options...

Page 1354: ...g a design option Promoting a Secondary Option to the Primary Option The primary option is the preferred design option in the set Elements in the main model and in the primary option can reference each other See Referencing Elements in Design Options on page 1321 Only one design option in a set can be the primary option All other options are secondary By default each project view displays both the...

Page 1355: ...so be part of the design option If main model elements need to reference and update with elements in a secondary option you must move the main model elements into that design option Then you can edit the design option to modify those elements as desired See Referencing Elements in Design Options on page 1321 To move elements from the main model to a design option set 1 Open a project view that sho...

Page 1356: ...nts 6 Click Modify tab Clipboard panel Paste Aligned drop down Same Place Revit Architecture moves the selected elements to the active option 7 To finish editing the active option click Manage tab Design Options panel and select Main Model from the drop down list Selecting Elements in Design Options and the Main Model To avoid unintended results or confusion when you are editing a design option Re...

Page 1357: ...Click Manage tab Design Options panel Design Options 3 In the Design Options dialog select the design option from the list 4 Under Option click Duplicate Revit Architecture creates a copy of the selected design option named Copy of design option 5 To rename the duplicate design option select the option name and under Option click Rename Enter a name and click OK 6 If needed repeat steps 4 and 5 to...

Page 1358: ... these views or to preserve them When you delete a design option set Revit Architecture removes all of its design options their elements and associated views as for deleting a design option If you are ready to incorporate a design option into the main model do not use these Delete procedures for the undesired options Instead see Incorporating a Design Option into the Main Model on page 1318 for in...

Page 1359: ...dialog lists the associated views Do the following a Clear the check boxes for any views that you do not want to delete b Click Delete to delete the design options in the set and the selected views Revit Architecture deletes the entire design option set including all of its design options their elements and the selected views Deleting Views Associated with Design Options To indicate that a view sh...

Page 1360: ...rimary option into the main model and deletes the design option set 7 Click Close If you need to undo this action on the Quick Access toolbar click Undo Viewing Design Options When you create a design option set Revit Architecture displays the main model and the primary option in all project views by default To see secondary options with the main model you must do one of the following Edit the opt...

Page 1361: ...d for each set the design option that the view is currently displaying A value of Automatic indicates the following When no design option is being edited the view displays the primary option When a design option is being edited the view displays the active option c For each design option set select the design option to display in this view If you have created multiple design option sets the view d...

Page 1362: ...ollowing When no design option is being edited the view displays the primary option When a design option is being edited the view displays the active option 4 If the desired design options are not selected select the appropriate design option for each set and click OK The view is now dedicated to the selected design options View Tags in Dedicated Views for Design Options View tags are the symbols ...

Page 1363: ...chitecture adds the level to the main model The level displays in halftone indicating that it is not part of the design option See Halftone Underlay on page 497 Views You cannot add views to a design option However you can dedicate views to design options Annotations and details You cannot add view specific elements such as annotations and details to a design option View specific elements belong t...

Page 1364: ...ents from the Main Model to a Design Option Set on page 1313 View specific elements can reference elements in design options For example you can dimension elements in a view that is dedicated to a design option See Annotating and Detailing Design Options on page 1315 Interdependent Elements in Design Options Elements that depend on another element must be in the same design option Interdependent e...

Page 1365: ... you want properties assigned to the room to be the same for all options keep the room in the main model If you want a room to vary in shape size or location in each design option or to have different room properties such as occupancy in each design option add the room to each design option in the set To do this you can use either of the following methods Move an existing room from the main model ...

Page 1366: ...op down Duplicate you can add room tags to the view See Tagging a Room on page 985 Room Volumes for Design Options When you use design options Revit Architecture computes room volumes using the following rules To define the perimeter of the room Revit Architecture uses the walls and room separation lines that are room bounding for the design option See Design Options and Rooms on page 1322 To defi...

Page 1367: ...m the main model to the design option set See Moving Elements from the Main Model to a Design Option Set on page 1313 Walls in the main model A wall added in the primary option join cleans up properly A wall in a secondary option joined to the main model To avoid the above problem with wall joins in a secondary option add the horizontal wall to that option The wall join then cleans up properly as ...

Page 1368: ...oted design option If you continue to have problems contact customer support Highlighted Elements Overlap Issue This warning may occur when you copy an element from the main model to a design option In this case the element exists in the main model and in the design option As a result these 2 elements overlap Solution To resolve the issue delete the element from the main model or from the design o...

Page 1369: ...e host element again becomes part of the main model See Incorporating a Design Option into the Main Model on page 1318 None of the Created Elements Are Visible in This View Issue This error occurs when you add an element to a design option but the element will not be visible in the current view This may be due to visibility of elements for the view or design option settings for the view Solution T...

Page 1370: ... and rooms in a secondary design option For example if the main model contains rooms and you place rooms into the same space in a design option the boundaries of the rooms in the main model might overlap the boundaries of the rooms in the design option For example suppose the main model contains the following room When a room is added to a design option the room tag reports an option conflict NOTE...

Page 1371: ...n conflicts add the conflicting main model room to the design option set This removes the room from the main model and resolves the conflict See Moving Elements from the Main Model to a Design Option Set on page 1313 Room Option Conflict 1329 ...

Page 1372: ...1330 ...

Page 1373: ...ule applying the appropriate phase to each See Applying a Phase to a Schedule on page 189 Related topic Phase Specific Rooms and Boundaries on page 998 Phase Properties You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases You can also make multiple copies of a view and apply different phases and phase filters to the different copies Phase Properties for ...

Page 1374: ...fferent value See Demolishing Elements on page 1338 Creating Phases 1 Click Manage tab Manage Project panel Phases The Phasing dialog opens displaying the Project Phases tab By default each project has phases called Existing and New Construction 2 Click the number box adjacent to a phase Revit Architecture selects the entire phase row The following image shows the New Construction phase selected 3...

Page 1375: ...ry elements using the Graphic Overrides settings for each phase defined using Manage tab Manage Project panel Phases Graphic Overrides tab Show Demo New Shows demolished elements and all new elements added to the building model Show New Shows all new elements added to the building model Show Previous Demo Shows existing elements and demolished elements Show Previous New Shows all original elements...

Page 1376: ... apply a phase filter and click Properties 2 In the Instance Properties dialog for Phase Filter select one of the following A default phase filter See Default Phase Filters on page 1333 A phase filter that you created See Creating Phase Filters on page 1334 None to apply no phase filter to the view All elements are shown in the view without any graphic overrides 3 Click OK Defining the Graphic Dis...

Page 1377: ...f the Material dialog The surface pattern and cut pattern are settings you specified on the Graphics Overrides tab of the Phasing dialog 7 Click OK Infill Elements for Phasing If an insert such as a window and its host such as a wall do not have the same values for the Phase Created and Phase Demolished properties Revit Architecture automatically places an infill element in the host to patch the h...

Page 1378: ...rt New window placed near demolished window Then if you apply a phase filter to the view that does not show demolished elements such as Show Previous New you see only the new insert New window only Viewing Infill Elements To see an infill element create a section view whose cut plane runs through the demolished insert and the host Sample section passing through wall and demolished window 1336 Chap...

Page 1379: ...ew and click View Properties 3 In the Instance Properties dialog for Phase Filter select Show Previous New This filter shows all original elements that were not demolished and all new elements added to the building model 4 Click OK 5 Select the infill element in the view You may need to move the cursor along a face of the element until it highlights Watch the status bar for information about highl...

Page 1380: ...n off the display of the demolished elements in that phase filter then demolished elements are hidden in the view when you click them NOTE If you build and demolish an element in the same phase it is considered to be a temporary element It displays in the view according to the phase filter s setting for temporary elements The following images show a view whose phase filter determines that existing...

Page 1381: ...ents that can be demolished highlight as you move the cursor over them The graphical display of demolished elements updates based on the phase filter setting See Phase Filters on page 1333 4 To exit the Demolish tool click Modify tab Selection panel Modify Related topics Demolishing Elements on page 1338 Phase Filters on page 1333 Project Phasing on page 1331 Using the Demolish Tool 1339 ...

Page 1382: ...1340 ...

Page 1383: ...WG drawing format is supported by AutoCAD and other CAD applications DXF data transfer is an open format that is supported by many CAD applications A DXF file is a text file that describes a 2D drawing The text is not encoded or compressed so DXF files are generally large If you use DXF for 3D drawings you may need to perform some cleanup to make the drawing display correctly SAT is the format for...

Page 1384: ... geometry to be exported Turn off visibility of graphics To turn off visibility of graphics in a view click View tab Graphics panel Visibility Graphics See Visibility and Graphic Display in Project Views on page 198 Turn off visibility for categories of elements in the view as appropriate For example you might want to omit rooms areas and topography from a 3D view to be exported If you want to ren...

Page 1385: ...eet Only from the Export list on the View Sheet Set tab of the dialog If you are exporting multiple views and sheets do the following a Select In session view sheet set from the Export list on the View Sheet Set tab of the dialog b Select the views and sheets to export See Creating View and Sheet Sets on page 1346 and Selecting Views to Print on page 1084 3 To specify export options click the DWG ...

Page 1386: ...d its start point and endpoint fall within the thin line no action occurs If 2 colinear lines with the same visual parameters overlap they are merged into one When walls become lines in the DWG file no short colinear lines are produced Exporting to DXF 1 Click Export CAD Formats DXF The Export CAD Formats dialog opens 2 Determine which views and sheets are to be exported to the DXF file If you are...

Page 1387: ...ets do the following a Select In session view sheet set from the Export list on the View Sheet Set tab of the dialog b Select the views and sheets to export See Creating View and Sheet Sets on page 1346 and Selecting Views to Print on page 1084 3 To specify export options click the DGN Properties tab of the Export CAD Formats dialog The following options are available Layer Settings on page 1349 E...

Page 1388: ...list to define the automatically generated file name See File Names for Exported Files on page 1353 6 Click Export Revit Architecture exports the selected views and sheets to SAT files and places them in the target folder Creating View and Sheet Sets When you export to various formats you use the View Sheet Set tab from the appropriate Export Publish Settings dialogs to specify which project views...

Page 1389: ...Sheet list as a tab delineated text file The file contains the include status type and name of all currently visible views in the list View Sheet List This table contains the views and sheets that have been filtered by the Export and Show in list options detailed above The table consists of sortable columns that define the view list NOTE Click the column headers to sort the list by Include status ...

Page 1390: ...vailable for use and may be selected from the Export drop down list at any time If the set is to be adjusted with different views and sheets proceed with the following steps 4 To filter your view choices for Show in list select Views in the Set Sheets in the Set or All views and sheets in the Set 5 Select and deselect views for the set by clicking their associated Include box A check mark indicate...

Page 1391: ...ry is mapped to an AutoCAD layer as specified in the Export Layer dialog In AutoCAD the layer controls the display of the entities Revit elements including their colors line weights and line styles In Revit Architecture you define object styles in the Object Styles dialog See Object Styles on page 493 The Layers and Properties setting determines what happens to a Revit element if it has attributes...

Page 1392: ...the blue wall are assigned to one layer in AutoCAD and the blue wall does not retain its unique characteristics In AutoCAD it looks the same as the other walls in the layer All properties BYLAYER new layers for overrides All walls in this Revit category except for the blue wall are assigned to one layer in AutoCAD The blue wall retains its unique attributes but it is assigned to its own layer Line...

Page 1393: ...cture linetype definitions are scaled to reflect project units but otherwise they are exported as is Coordinate System Basis Select a value from the Coordinate System Basis list to indicate whether the exported file will use the internal coordinates of the Revit project or coordinates that are shared with other linked models See Linking Revit Models on page 1277 and Shared Positioning on page 1296...

Page 1394: ... always exports as polymeshes Modeling programs generally represent 3D shapes using either of the following technologies ACIS is a solid modeling technology For example ACIS represents a cube as a single object or shape with 6 sides A polymesh is a 3D shape consisting of multiple polygons that are meshed joined together For example a polymesh cube consists of 6 square surfaces that are joined toge...

Page 1395: ...he specified template If you do not use a DGN template file Revit Architecture exports the project to a DGN file using default settings NOTE You can select Enable DGN Template File when exporting to DGN only This option is not available when exporting to DWG DXF or SAT File Names for Exported Files When exporting to a CAD format or DWF you can specify a name or prefix for the exported files In the...

Page 1396: ...he amount of the model that is exported Elements that are completely outside the section box are not included in the export file The section box is particularly useful for large models For example for an interior rendering of a conference room in an office building use a section box to export the conference room and omit the rest of the building NOTE For 3D views crop region boundaries are not exp...

Page 1397: ... select an export option See Export on page 1341 For more information about section boxes see Using a Section Box in a 3D View on page 159 Exporting Intersecting Geometry If the model includes intersecting geometry such as an extrusion passing through a wall surface Revit Architecture does not create new edges along the lines of the intersection As a result Revit Architecture may incorrectly remov...

Page 1398: ...wer when attempting to open views containing any of these unsupported features a warning directs you to view the DWFx file in Design Review NOTE All references to DWF in this documentation implicitly include DWFx unless specified otherwise 2D DWF Files You can export all Revit views or sheets to 2D DWF files If you export multiple views in a project to one DWF in Autodesk DWF Viewer you can click ...

Page 1399: ... cannot select individual elements in the DWF file When exporting to DWF select the option to export object data for Element properties Exporting to DWF 1 Click Export DWF 2 Determine which views and sheets are to be exported to the DWG file If you are exporting a single view select Current View Sheet Only from the Export list on the View Sheet Set tab of the dialog If you are exporting multiple v...

Page 1400: ... type properties of the objects in the exported views Rooms and Areas in a separate boundary layer Exports the room and area properties to a layer separate from the geometric representation With this option you can view individual rooms and room data when you are exporting a project or a view for use with facility management software such as Autodesk FMDesktop or DWF markup software such as Autode...

Page 1401: ... Markup 5 In the Import Link DWF File dialog navigate to the marked up DWF file select it and click Open The Link Markup Page to Revit Sheets dialog displays Under the DWF View column the dialog displays the sheet view names that are marked up in the DWF file The Revit View column displays the corresponding sheet view If the sheet name from the DWF file is the same as the sheet name from the Revit...

Page 1402: ...ation see Managing Links on page 1286 Exporting Layers When exporting a project to another format such as DWG or DGN you want the exported file to contain as much information about the project as possible Revit Architecture stores a wealth of project information in its categories and subcategories In CAD software this type of information is stored in layers or levels in MicroStation To ensure that...

Page 1403: ...w mapping file click Standard select a standard from the dialog and click OK 3 Edit mapping values as desired To change a Cut or Projection value click in the Layer Name or Color ID column for the appropriate category and enter the new value NOTE Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID For Export Layers DGN the columns are labeled Level Number corresponding to MicroStation leve...

Page 1404: ...e containing assembly code data for the entire project ODBC export creates specific relationships between tables in the database using primary keys and reference values See Table Relationships Within the Database on page 1364 Revit Architecture can export to the same database multiple times When exporting to an empty database Revit Architecture creates new tables When you export a project to a pop...

Page 1405: ...ting information about the database file to export to Use the dialog to specify the database to use or to create a new one For example For Microsoft Access click Select to select an existing database or click Create to create a new empty database to export data to For Microsoft Excel first use Excel to create a new empty workbook with the desired name Then on the dialog click Select Workbook and n...

Page 1406: ...erence values create relationships among tables in the database Corresponds to Column Field of a Door Instance Table None This is the unique identifier for this instance of a door Id Id column of the door Types table Type Id Id column of the Levels table Level Id column of the Rooms table Room Id column of the Key Schedules table Key schedule The primary key in the Assembly Codes table is the Asse...

Page 1407: ...Boundaries and Hide Unreferenced View Tags 6 Under Format select an output format for shaded views and non shaded views If you specified a Zoom To percentage for Image Size select a DPI dots per inch value for Raster Image Quality 7 Click OK The selected sheets or views are exported as images in the specified file Exporting Project Views to HTML You can create a web page that links HTML versions o...

Page 1408: ...al room area and total window area You can create triangulation reports that exclude areas bounded by multiple curve loops such as a room with columns or closets in the middle When a room area report excludes these areas triangulation is performed reported and displayed separately for each bounding loop This option only applies to Revit room area triangulation reports it is ignored for Revit room ...

Page 1409: ...objects in the building industry For more information about the IFC file format visit http www iai international org Revit Architecture and IFC Revit Architecture provides IFC import and fully certified export based on the latest IAI IFC2x3 data exchange standard When you export a Revit building information model to IFC format the information can be used directly by other building specialists such...

Page 1410: ...e Before exporting a Revit project to IFC you may need to map generic family instances to IFC containers element types You do this by creating a new IFC mapping file or editing an existing one Also you can use the following procedure to load the desired IFC mapping file before exporting a Revit project to IFC To load and modify an IFC mapping file 1 Click Export Options IFC Options 2 Do either of ...

Page 1411: ...d file type IFC 2x2 ifc IFC 2x3 ifc This is the default certified version of export and the latest version generally supported by other systems IFC BCA ePlan Check ifc This is a certified variant of IFC 2x2 used for submitting files to the Singapore BCA ePlan Check Server When exporting to this file type you should make sure that all room bounding elements are selected 5 Select export options Curr...

Page 1412: ...rs txt See IFC Specific Files on page 1371 for information on how to access this file For example in a folder where you store other corporate standard files create a parameter file named IFCexportParameters txt You only need to create these shared parameters once You can reuse them in multiple families 2 Use the Family Editor to create a new family or to modify an existing family See Revit Familie...

Page 1413: ...ortType 22 Click Modify Element tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Type Properties 23 Under Type Parameters scroll down to the IFC Parameters group The IFCExportAs and IFCExportType parameters display the values that you specified for the family type When you export the project to IFC elements in this family will be mapped to the specified IFC class and type IFC Specific Files Revit Ar...

Page 1414: ...n right click a level to expand all or select all rooms on the level 4 If warnings display for the building a level or a room select the item and click Show Related Warnings to learn the cause Then cancel the Export gbXML dialog and correct the problem in the building model Review and correct warnings until all of the warnings have been resolved throughout the model 5 In the preview of the Export ...

Page 1415: ... costs thermal loads and construction NOTE In the United States a postal code is called a zip code To specify the building type and postal code 1 Click Manage tab Project Settings panel Project Information 2 In the Instance Properties dialog for Energy Data click Edit 3 In the Type Properties dialog select the building type and enter the postal code 4 Click OK Exporting to 3ds Max When you have co...

Page 1416: ...ered image Limit Model Geometry To limit the model geometry that is exported to 3ds Max consider doing any or all of the following in the 3D view that you plan to export from Revit Architecture Hide elements that are not required in the view Use a section box Set the detail level For more information about these strategies see Limiting Model Geometry Before Exporting on page 1342 Prepare the 3D Vi...

Page 1417: ...ental ray as the rendering engine This is the default render setting for 3ds Max Design For more information refer to the 3ds Max documentation Troubleshooting Exports to 3ds Max When you export a 3D view from Revit Architecture and import it to 3ds Max you may encounter the following issues Slow performance when exporting from Revit Architecture and importing to 3ds Max Performance may be slow fo...

Page 1418: ...ity parameter selected are exported See Creating Site Utilities for Export on page 1378 2 Click Export Building Site To export a building site you must specify a gross building area If you did not create a gross building area previously you are given the option of creating one now 3 Review the export settings in the Building Site Export Settings dialog See Export Settings for a Building Site on pa...

Page 1419: ...w 3 In the Apply View Template dialog select Export to Civil Engineering from the Names list NOTE If Export to Civil Engineering is not in the list you need to update your project to the new template by transferring project standards See Transferring Project Standards on page 446 4 In the Apply View Template dialog apply addition visibility and graphic overrides by clicking Edit under View Propert...

Page 1420: ...lected in its instance properties See Connectors on page 435 for more information about the types of connectors that are available You can load a site utility family into your project or open one in the Family Editor to add or remove connectors or make other modifications You can also create your own site utility with connectors by using the Site rtf template in the ImperialMetric Template folder ...

Page 1421: ...dialog the active 3D view displays in the preview pane by default If the active view is not a 3D view the first 3D view in the 3D View for Export list displays Clicking Export or OK saves the dialog settings so the next time you open the dialog the settings will be the same The right pane has the following tabs for reviewing the model elements in the preview panel Model Displays the elements to be...

Page 1422: ...Offset under Property Line to Export See Sketching Property Lines on page 962 and Creating Property Lines with Survey Data on page 963 Site Model Displays the number of elements that comprise the building site from categories such as site roads pads parking and topography as well as ramps stairs and floors that have the Function parameter set to Exterior Utilities Displays the utilities with conne...

Page 1423: ...nt tool See Relocating and Mirroring a Project on page 1300 and Project Base Points and Survey Points on page 1302 NOTE If the survey point is clipped or pinned you cannot change the survey point coordinates on the Location tab See Project Base Points and Survey Points on page 1302 Angle from Project North to True North Displays the angle between Project North and True North Changing the angle rot...

Page 1424: ...industry The Autodesk Seek on page 108 website uses codes from OmniClass Table 23 to filter and identify shared content A code consists of an OmniClass number and title If an OmniClass code is not already assigned to a family you are prompted to assign one during the sharing process However you can continue to share with Autodesk Seek without defining one All Revit families have parameters for ass...

Page 1425: ...g families Windows XP C Documents and Set tings All Users Application Data Autodesk Revit release name IES Windows Vista C Program Data Autodesk Revit release name IES Sharing with Autodesk Seek NOTE Autodesk Seek on page 108 is currently available only in the English edition of the software 1 In the Family Editor click Publish Share with Autodesk Seek 2 In the Share family with Autodesk Seek dial...

Page 1426: ...Publish DWG to Buzzsaw 1 Click Publish DWG to Buzzsaw 2 In the Publish to Buzzsaw DWG dialog under Buzzsaw Sites select the site to which you want to publish project files If you need to add a new Buzzsaw location click Add For instructions see Adding a New Buzzsaw Location on page 1385 3 Enter a name or accept the default name for the exported file 4 Select an AutoCAD version of the published DWG...

Page 1427: ...ct Information tab of the DWF Publish Settings dialog If this information is changed the data is saved to the published DWF files and the project See Specifying Project Information on page 447 5 Click Publish TIP To save the current publish settings and close the dialog without publishing click OK 6 In the Publish DWF to Buzzsaw dialog under Buzzsaw Sites select the site to which you want to publi...

Page 1428: ... contain data If the target folder is a subfolder specify the path from the project site For example if you want to upload project files to the Fountain subfolder in the Courtyard project folder of the Palace project site enter the following Courtyard Fountain 7 Under Security specify the user name and password to use to log into the Buzzsaw project site 8 Click OK The new Buzzsaw location is incl...

Page 1429: ...other CAD programs such as AutoCAD DWG and DXF MicroStation DGN SketchUp SKP and DWG and ACIS SAT Revit Architecture supports importing most DGN surfaces and solids with the exceptions of cones B Spline surfaces and SmartSolids In addition to using the Import CAD and Link CAD tools you can import CAD files using drag and drop from Windows Explorer onto a model drafting or sheet view of Revit Archi...

Page 1430: ... Geometry on page 1404 Importing or Linking CAD Files Using the Import CAD and Link CAD Tools 1 Click Insert tab Import panel Import CAD or click Insert tab Link panel Link CAD If you link the file instead of importing it see Implications of Importing vs Linking for Xrefs on page 1388 2 In the Import CAD Formats or Link CAD Formats dialog navigate to the folder that contains the file to import or ...

Page 1431: ...n use both products to leverage the unique strengths of each For example If you want to model an initial design pass or quickly model a single element start with SketchUp Later use Revit Architecture to refine the design If you want to design entire building masses and then associate real building elements to them use SketchUp for the design phase Later use Revit Architecture for the detailed plan...

Page 1432: ...he SketchUp based form Switch to a 3D view To improve visibility on the View Control Bar for Model Graphics Style select Shading with Edges Click Home tab Work Plane panel Set In the Work Plane dialog select a plane Type ZF Zoom to Fit to adjust the drawing area to show the entire mass If you are creating a mass family click Massing Site tab Conceptual Mass panel Show Mass Limitations of SketchUp ...

Page 1433: ...port Texture Image Maps Transparency Smooth Curved Surfaces Text and Dimensions Raster Images and saved Pages Cut planes Imports cannot be cut by a cut plane unless imported into a cuttable family category See Cuttable Families on page 514 SketchUp and massing Not all SketchUp imports are appropriate to massing See Suitability of Imported Geometry on page 1387 Also see Importing Massing Studies fr...

Page 1434: ...el Import CAD or Insert tab Link panel Link CAD Positioning options also apply to linked Revit models when you click Insert tab Link panel Link Revit Definition Option Imports a CAD drawing into the active Revit view only For example you might want an AutoCAD object to appear only in a Revit floor plan view and not in a 3D view If Current View Only you set this option any text in the imported file...

Page 1435: ...le has a custom unit select Custom factor for Import Units This enables the text box adjacent to the selection list so that you can enter a scale value For example the file has a unit called widget where one widget equals 10 meters When importing the file select Custom factor for Import Units and specify a value of 10 in the adjacent text box Each unit from the source file is now equal to 10 meter...

Page 1436: ...2 NOTE If no values display for these parameters you must reload the link or reimport the file 3 Click OK Setting Line Weights for Imported DWG or DXF Files When you import a DWG or DXF file each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number line weight settings Revit Architecture can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit line weight You can then s...

Page 1437: ...Setting Constraint Parameters for Imported Geometry If you have imported geometry into all views you can set the base level for it and specify a height offset from that level To set constraint parameters 1 Select the imported geometry and click Modify Element tab Element panel Element Properties drop down Instance Properties 2 Set the Base Level and Base Offset instance parameters Alternatively yo...

Page 1438: ...ic Adding an Image to a Sheet on page 1044 Modifying Imported Images You can modify imported images using tools such as Rotate and Copy on the Modify Raster Images tab This tab displays when you select an imported image in the drawing area NOTE These tools also affect captured rendered 3D images To modify an imported image 1 Select the image so that handles display on the image and modify the imag...

Page 1439: ...orts the format and opens it properly For information about the IFC file format see Exporting to Industry Foundation Classes IFC on page 1367 When you open an IFC file Revit Architecture creates a new file based on the default template For information about selecting the default template see Selecting a Template for IFC Files on page 1397 You can load your own IFC class mapping files and override ...

Page 1440: ...lding components can be designed in mechanical applications such as Autodesk Inventor and used in Revit Architecture Revit MEP and Revit Structure To open a building component ADSK file do one of the following Click Open Building Component Click Home tab Build panel Component drop down Place a Component Then click Place Component tab Model panel Load Family select the ADSK file and place it in the...

Page 1441: ... component Restrictions to using a building component ADSK file include the following The geometry of the component cannot be changed in Revit Architecture Changes to geometry can only be made in the application in which the building component was originally designed Although the materials assigned in the mechanical application are not imported into Revit Architecture you can assign a material in ...

Page 1442: ...the component in the project 5 Display the component as a bounding box at a coarse level of detail 6 Display the full geometry at medium and fine levels of detail 7 View the component in any view 8 Run an interference check to ensure proper clearance 9 Tag and schedule the component using its parameters 10 Dimension the component to its reference planes and to some of its geometry 11 Create any ex...

Page 1443: ...ort an AutoCAD file Revit Architecture uses the version of the file that you imported It does not retrieve or display changes to the imported file When you link or import an AutoCAD file to a Revit project you can do the following Query objects in the file on page 1405 Hide or delete selected layers in the file on page 1405 Change the graphic display of layers in the file on page 1407 When you lin...

Page 1444: ... If for Layers you chose Specify the Select Layers Levels to Import Link dialog lists the layers in the file Select the desired layers and click OK Unselected layers are not available in the Revit project However the layers still exist in the AutoCAD file Revit Architecture retrieves the current version of the linked file and displays it in the current Revit view Related topics Querying Objects in...

Page 1445: ...t name is automatically filled in the Revit View column If the Revit sheet view name changed after it was exported to DWF the Revit View column displays Not linked next to the DWF sheet view 3 If the Revit View value is Not linked select a Revit sheet view by clicking the box below the Revit View column and selecting a name from the list You might also do this if you have several other sheet views...

Page 1446: ...or other import symbols This is analogous to exploding in AutoCAD with nested xrefs and blocks For example you explode an xref into other xrefs and blocks Those xrefs and blocks can in turn be exploded into more blocks and xrefs You can also explode the import symbol immediately into Revit text curves lines and filled regions This is a full explode NOTE You cannot explode linked files or an import...

Page 1447: ...bject style comes from the layer or by color 5 To hide the object s layer in the current view click Hide in view The selected layer may still be visible in other views TIP To see the hidden layer temporarily click Reveal Hidden Elements on the View Control Bar To redisplay the layer click View tab Graphics panel Visibility Graphics On the Imported Categories tab select the layer and click OK 6 To ...

Page 1448: ... they still exist in the original CAD file If you want to restore the layers you must delete the file from the Revit project and link to or import it again To delete layers in a linked or imported file use one of the following methods When you link or import the file to the Revit project in the Import or Link dialog for Layers select Visible to display only the layers that are currently visible in...

Page 1449: ... applies to all CAD files that are linked to the project To preserve or discard graphic overrides for linked files 1 Open the Revit project 2 Click Manage tab Manage Project panel Manage Links 3 In the Manage Links dialog do either of the following To retain the overrides select Preserve graphic overrides To discard the overrides clear Preserve graphic overrides 4 Click OK Making Global Changes to...

Page 1450: ...d in the Revit Project Symptom After linking a DWG file to a Revit project you made changes to the DWG file in AutoCAD However the Revit project does not display these changes Issues and Solutions This issue can have several causes The linked file was changed after it was loaded into the Revit project and the Revit project is still open To correct this situation reload the linked file In Revit Arc...

Page 1451: ...ers are hidden or deleted click View tab Graphics panel Visibility Graphics On the Imported Categories tab click to expand the DWG file Revit Architecture lists the layers in the file Layers that are not listed here have been deleted they are not available to the Revit project If you want to restore the layers you must first delete the linked file and then link it to the project again When linking...

Page 1452: ... SketchUp drawings SKP Images BMP JPG and PNG Data RWS and DAT NOTE It may be necessary to contact your network administrator to add these exceptions 1410 Chapter 24 Interoperability ...

Page 1453: ...eate a new sheet view and add a titleblock to it Add any views plans elevations sections to the sheet After you add a view change its view scale through the view properties You can plot multiple views at different scales on the same sheet Only a portion of a print job comes out on a sheet Several printers have limited on board memory to process print data When plotting large format sheet sizes to ...

Page 1454: ...ivers override the Colors setting that you specified in Revit Architecture To get the desired color output manually set the color through your printer s properties Graphics Issues When I print surface patterns are partially submerged into the concave side of a wall s surface Click Print Print Setup In the Print Setup dialog select the Vector Processing option Images The printed output of imported ...

Page 1455: ...number 1 Click Modify tab Inquiry panel Element ID drop down Select by ID 2 In the Select Elements by ID dialog type the ID number and click Show Revit Architecture locates the element and selects it in the view This tool is especially useful if you are trying to locate a view specific element by its ID Finding an Element s ID Number 1 Select an element in a view 2 Click Modify tab Inquiry panel E...

Page 1456: ...ith an Error Message In the error message dialog click Expand to extend the error message dialog and view a tree structure listing the errors and warnings associated with your last action To see more information about each error click the plus sign in the tree structure You can select highlight an error heading such as Error 1 and all elements associated with that error are selected in the drawing...

Page 1457: ...lick Modify tab Inquiry panel Warnings 2 Click the arrow buttons as needed to scroll through the list of warning messages 3 Click OK to close the list NOTE This tool is not enabled if there are no warning messages Warnings for Selected Elements If there are any warnings associated with an element you select in a drawing the respective Modify tab for the element displays a Warning panel with a Show...

Page 1458: ...This is probably caused by two creating a small triangular panel within the main panel the triangular panel grid lines almost meeting at a border of cannot be accurately regenerated because it is too small This message displays when the program regenerates the curtain panel the curtain wall or sloped glazing but not exactly at a point The curtain panel cannot be displayed Solution Cancel the place...

Page 1459: ...t into a location that does not contain a proper host you see this message Click Cancel to remove the warning On the ribbon click Edit Pasted Elements In Edit Pasted mode place the copied element on its proper host Click Finish to complete the paste process TIP The Paste Aligned tool does not provide the Edit Pasted Elements button If you see this message you can cancel and use the Paste tool inst...

Page 1460: ...references that are slightly off axis such as imported drawings or 2 columns that are not properly aligned Snap defining line ends to references that are positioned correctly in their respective contexts but the line between them is slightly off axis such as snapping to 2 different ceiling grids Off axis problems need to be resolved because Revit Architecture cannot create dimensions between lines...

Page 1461: ...ing the wall such that it cannot host the component You can either cancel the move or delete the partic ular instance Note that component is a variable for the particular instance for example a 36 X80 door Problem While creating a family you have tried to make a reference dimension constraining The dimension cannot be made con straining Solution You cannot turn a reference dimension into a constra...

Page 1462: ...1420 ...

Page 1463: ...vit content to external files Refining geometry or parameters Creating many types of elements Importing and exporting external file formats Revit provides an Application Programming Interface API that allows you to extend the functionality of the product You can add customized commands to the Add Ins tab External Tools panel or add new panels and tools In addition to those API extensions you can u...

Page 1464: ...the project has been updated 2 Click Manage tab Macros panel Macro Manager 3 Click each Document level tab to update 4 When complete click Close 5 On the Quick Access toolbar click Save 6 Close the project No further steps are required unless the macro code needs to be manually edited Upgrading Application Level Macros 1 Copy the directories in C Program Files Revit Architecture 2009 Program VSTAM...

Page 1465: ... Manager also provides options to create new macros using different types of templates An Integrated Development Environment IDE built into the product the Revit VSTA IDE You can launch it several ways such as by selecting the Macro Edit or StepInto buttons from the Macro Manager Access to the Revit API Revit security settings for both application level and document level macros Using Macro Manage...

Page 1466: ...abs Inactive document tabs represent open projects that contain embedded macros see below The tab bears the name of the project Project2 and Project3 in this case You add modify build and delete modules and macros from these tabs Macros and Modules A module is an organizational grouping of macros Macros can be either independent within a module when they run or share code or utilities with each ot...

Page 1467: ...TA IDE Macro Project File Locations When you work in the Revit VSTA IDE you must save and build the macros successfully before they will display in the Macro Manager s categorized list Before we look at an example of the initial code loaded into the Revit VSTA IDE let s discuss where macro project files reside on your computer Application level macro projects are stored in a subfolder of the Revit...

Page 1468: ...rrent document already contains modules macros must be enabled in the Macro Security settings See Macro Security on page 1434 1 Click Manage tab Macros panel Macro Manager to open the Macros Manager 2 Select the Application tab for application level macros or a Project tab for document level macros 3 In the Create section of the Macro Manager dialog click Module The Create a New Module dialog open...

Page 1469: ... Application object from a Document level macro use this Application or Me Application NOTE If the application or current document already contains macros macros must be enabled in the Macro Security settings See Macro Security on page 1434 1 In the Macro Manager select the Application tab for application level macros or a Project tab for document level macros where the macro will be placed 2 In t...

Page 1470: ...ed in the parent module in the Macro Manager The Revit VSTA IDE application launches to write the macros It displays a starting template for the macros in a specific programming language 1428 Chapter 26 Creating Macros with Revit VSTA ...

Page 1471: ...5 In the main window of the IDE you can now enter your source code See Macro Source Code Examples on page 1430 6 Click File Save macro name then close the Revit VSTA IDE 7 Repeat steps 6 through 10 for any additional macros needed in the module NOTE Remember that you must successfully build and save module projects in the Revit VSTA IDE before they will display in the Macro Manager s categorized l...

Page 1472: ...lements View pView this ActiveDocument ActiveView this ActiveDocument BeginTransaction this ActiveDocument Create NewTextNote pView origin baseVec upVec lineWidth align strText this ActiveDocument EndTransaction Please note that because this application level macro is written to modify a document you must begin a transaction this ActiveDocument BeginTransaction and end the transaction this ActiveD...

Page 1473: ...oject in the Revit VSTA IDE notice that you are building the AppVisualBasic project Your Application level VB NET macro s code resides in ThisApplication vb You can use the IDE s Project Explorer to see its location on disk To run your newly built macro select it in Macro Manager and click Run Then if necessary right click in the active view and select Zoom to Fit from the menu to see the text not...

Page 1474: ...utodesk Revit Elements View Me ActiveView Me Create NewTextNote pView origin baseVec upVec lineWidth align strText End Sub TIP Be sure to build your project in the Revit VSTA IDE before trying to run it from the Macro Manager For this example when you build the project in the Revit VSTA IDE notice that you are building the DocVisualBasic project and your Document level VB NET macro s code resides ...

Page 1475: ...ck Delete Deleting the macro does not permanently remove it It will be commented out in the source code To permanently delete the macro it will need to be removed manually by editing it in the IDE To modify a macro select it and click Edit The IDE will open the module and you can edit it its module and its associated macros Running Macros in the Macro Manager 1 Click Manage tab Macros panel Macro ...

Page 1476: ... You will still be able to see edit and build the code but modifications will not change the current module status Click Manage tab Macros panel Macro Security 2 Select the Macros tab 3 In the Application Macros Security Settings section select either Enable application macros or Disable application macros 4 Click OK 5 Close and reopen Revit Architecture NOTE Any changes to application level macro...

Page 1477: ...rity Setting Enable document macros Disable document macros A warning dialog prompts you to either enable or disable the mac User defined Ask before enabling document macros ros The resulting answer displays the correct icon This is the default setting Revit SDK API Reference Documentation VSTA Samples The Revit Software Development Kit SDK contains useful resources to help you understand the Revi...

Page 1478: ...y and open the following Revit project files from Revit release SDK VSTA Samples Revit_VSTA_Samples rvt Revit_VSTA_MEP_Samples rvt Revit_VSTA_Family_Samples rfa Included in this RVT file are several document level macros In Revit start the Macro Manager select one of the document level macros and select Run Note that when you open Revit_VSTA_Samples rvt from the SDK it may contain more samples tha...

Page 1479: ...tories are writable The application level macros will not run correctly if they are read only Revit API Differences Quick Reference The following table summarizes differences between the standard Revit API and the Revit Macro API Revit Macro API Standard Revit API Feature or Capability Declare a public method with no parameters and void return type in the ThisApplication or ThisDocu ment class Mus...

Page 1480: ... this Application Cre ate New APIObjectType Types 1 typeof APIObjectType returns the proxy type but APIObject GetType returns the 1 typeof APIObjectType and APIObject Get Type returns the Re vitAPI type RevitAPI type So use APIObject GetType typeof APIObjectType in Macro 2 type of APIObject Type ToString and 2 typeof APIObjectType ToString re turns namespace APIObjectType Full APIObject GetType To...

Page 1481: ...o resources on the file system how to add required references and how to define properties Those steps were done for you in the macros that were built into Revit_VSTA_Samples rvt which is provided on the SDK Add Required References If your macro presents a user interface you will need to add required references to your project For example in the SDK VSTASampleRooms macro we need to reference 1 Sys...

Page 1482: ...oject Explorer is updated with the references Create Folders in Revit VSTA IDE In the IDE s Project Explorer right click on the macro project and select Add New Folder from the menu For example 1440 Chapter 26 Creating Macros with Revit VSTA ...

Page 1483: ...evit VSTA IDE copy your macro s files to the subfolder you created NOTE If your macro uses a ResX file copy it too Add Existing Files to Macro Project in IDE Return to the Revit VSTA IDE In the Project Explorer to continue this example right click on the folder you created for your macro and select Add Existing Item from the menu For example In the resulting IDE dialog browse to the corresponding ...

Page 1484: ...vit SDK Samples Rooms CS Save the project and then click Build from the IDE toolbar menu In Revit launch Macro Manager and select your macro from the categorized list On the SDK the Rooms sample may be coded as a Document level macro In which case code changes would be needed to run it in the AppCSharp project shown in this section s screens When run from Macro Manager the macro collects data from...

Page 1485: ... Reference 4 In the Add Reference dialog click the NET tab 5 Select RevitProxy 6 Click OK The Revit Proxy dll is restored and the macro will build debug and run as needed Migrating SDK Samples to Revit VSTA The Revit SDK contains two samples folders Revit release SDK Samples Revit release SDK VSTA Samples The programs in the SDK s Samples folder use the standard Revit API We refer to these samples...

Page 1486: ...lication level macro The method RunSampleRooms is the entry for this VSTA sample Notice that we used the this pointer to replace commandData Application Additional Migration Notes for SDK Standard API Samples By default the SDK sample namespace is Revit SDK Samples SampleName CS As you edit the sample code that came from the SDK standard API samples be sure to change the namespace for Revit VSTA F...

Page 1487: ...We cannot migrate the RevitViewer sample to VSTA Therefore you need to compile RevitViewer as an independent SDK sample and then add its DLL as a reference in the Revit VSTA project When you migrate SDK standard API samples to Revit VSTA do not copy any Solution files sln or existing project files csproj or vbproj Toolbar related samples are unavailable in Revit VSTA Revit Macros FAQ Quick Referen...

Page 1488: ...roject in the Revit VSTA IDE the Macro Manager which are then edited in the IDE Therefore File Open Project in the IDE is disabled Application level macros can be run on all opened Revit projects within a single in What are the differences between applica tion level and document level macros stance of the Revit application Document level macro projects are stored within an RVT file They can be loa...

Page 1489: ...e loaded and unloaded dynamically When you de bug a macro if the event handler is not properly unregistered Revit may call a wrong method maybe an invalid memory address Although Revit VSTA may prevent Revit from crashing in this scenario any event handlers that are not properly unre gistered may cause performance issues during your current Revit session Modeless dialogs operating outside the scop...

Page 1490: ...tNewed void ThisApplication_OnDocumentNewed Document document System Windows Forms MessageBox Show C Application event OnDocumentNewed Related Information about Revit Macros Quick Reference To learn more please refer to the following resources The Revit API chm Help file contains the Revit API NET reference documentation The API reference documentation is provided with the Revit SDK which is on th...

Page 1491: ...etwork ADN http adn autodesk com has information and expert advice about the full Revit API If you do not already have an ADN login account please contact your Autodesk representative Related Information about Revit Macros 1449 ...

Page 1492: ...1450 ...

Page 1493: ...sentation of a building model displayed in the Revit interface For example floor plans and elevations are 2D views Compare with 3D view on page 1452 See Project Views on page 125 3D level A three dimensional 3D plane in the conceptual design environment on which to draw and manipulate forms 3D model A 3 dimensional 3D representation of a building or other design See also building information model...

Page 1494: ...3ds Max is professional 3D animation software that provides animation modelling and workflow functionality for the most complex problems in design visualization and visual effects Revit Architecture can export 3D models for use in 3ds Max See Exporting to 3ds Max on page 1373 ACIS A solid modeling technology An ACIS object is a geometric shape that is defined using this technology For example ACIS...

Page 1495: ...ument a building or design For example symbols tags keynotes and dimensions are annotations also referred to as annotation elements Annotation elements are always displayed at the same paper size regardless of view scale Compare with model element on page 1507 and datum on page 1469 For more information see Annotating and Detailing on page 1087 annotation schedule See note block on page 1511 archi...

Page 1496: ...ial relationships in a building For example in an office building you may want to distinguish between common space such as lobbies hallways rest rooms and kitchens office space and storage In an apartment building you may want to indicate rentable space and non rentable space After creating an area scheme you can assign area types to individual areas in an area plan For more information see Area S...

Page 1497: ...eate a linear array in which the elements are distributed evenly along a line or a radial array in which the elements are distributed evenly along an arc or a circle See Creating an Array on page 365 Linear array of columns Radial array of columns assembly code See Uniformat assembly code on page 1549 attach To explicitly join elements such as walls or columns to other modeling components Glossary...

Page 1498: ...ing and detailing You can import AutoCAD files for use in Revit projects and you can export Revit files for use in AutoCAD projects Autodesk Seek A web service that lets you search for download and integrate product and design information into your drawing You can also publish families to the Autodesk Seek website to make them available for other designers to incorporate into their designs Autodes...

Page 1499: ...e 1459 blend A combination blending of 2 shapes to create a 3D shape You can create blends using solid geometry and void geometry For example the 2D shapes below are blended to create the solid extrusion that follows See Creating a Blend on page 323 bounding box An invisible 3 dimensional rectangular space that contains all model elements annotation elements and datum elements defined in a family ...

Page 1500: ...e 893 break control A Revit symbol that you can use to break a section line break a schedule into multiple sections or break a crop region into sections In the following elevation view the blue Z shaped break controls allow you to break the crop region into sections break line The Z shaped line used in a drafting view or detail view to obscure parts of the drawing to focus the drawing on a particu...

Page 1501: ...wings of the design and related documentation In a Revit project every drawing sheet 2D and 3D view and schedule is a representation of information from the same underlying building model database For more information see What Is a Project on page 117 Building Maker A conceptual design and modeling environment that takes any overall building form described conceptually and maps it to building elem...

Page 1502: ...ich will not display in the parent view In the parent view the callout area is marked with a callout tag The following views show a callout tag in a section view and the detail view for the callout For more information see Callout Views on page 146 camera A visualization tool that you use to create a 3D view of a building model When you place a camera in a 2D view you can control the target point ...

Page 1503: ...column or a wall In Revit Architecture you can use an element s centerline to measure dimension align resize specify constraints and perform other functions in a building model Measuring from the centerlines of walls central file A master project file for a model on which multiple team members are working The model can be subdivided into functional areas worksets such as interior exterior and site...

Page 1504: ...etween the elements When a view shows a fine level of detail Revit Architecture shows precisely how the layers of compound walls or other structures join together The cleaned join applies only to the current view See Wall Joins on page 651 and Joining Geometry on page 406 Before joining the roof and the soffit After joining the roof and the soffit clip plane A vertical or horizontal plane that def...

Page 1505: ... create floors ceilings plan regions openings in walls and roofs solid extrusions and other parts of a building design In the following sketch a closed loop defines the walls ceiling and floor An open loop defines the roof See Sketching on page 303 collinear Passing through or lying on the same straight line Sketching a line that is collinear with an existing wall color scheme A set of colors and ...

Page 1506: ...sign See Architectural Columns on page 756 Structural columns are vertical load bearing elements in a structure See Structural Columns on page 820 Communication Center A tool that displays links to information about product updates and announcements To access the Communication Center click in the InfoCenter toolbar in the upper right corner of the Revit window component A building element that is ...

Page 1507: ...n place and loadable mass family elements constraint A parameter that defines a relationship between elements in a building design For example you can specify the top constraint for a wall as Level 2 If Level 2 moves upward the height of the wall increases to maintain the relationship For more information see Constraints on page 300 construction document A document that communicates a building des...

Page 1508: ...rg context menu See shortcut menu on page 1537 contour line An imaginary line that connects points of equal elevation to describe the topography of a building site See Site Design on page 953 control A graphical icon in the Revit drawing area that you use to manipulate elements For example when you select a chain of walls blue circles display These blue circles are drag controls You can drag such ...

Page 1509: ... coping 2 In architectural design a finishing or protective cap for an exterior wall core The structural part of a compound wall or other host element When you use Revit Architecture to design a compound wall you specify the layers and materials that compose the core of the wall as well as the interior and exterior layers of the wall In the following illustration the core is outlined in green in t...

Page 1510: ...play in the view or on a sheet on which the view is placed In the following floor plan view the inner solid red line indicates the model crop region The outer dashed red line indicates the annotation crop region For more information see Crop Regions on page 211 CSI See Construction Specifications Institute CSI on page 1466 curtain system A building component consisting of panels curtain grids and ...

Page 1511: ...nstruction For example in the following drawing the red area indicates the cut volume and the blue area indicates the fill volume required to level the site for a building See Reporting Cut and Fill Volumes on a Site on page 964 cutback The calculated adjustment in beam geometry that ensures beam ends meet without overlaying one another at a join This is the visible gap seen in a steel beam connec...

Page 1512: ... can use decals for signs paintings and billboards In project views a placeholder indicates the location of a decal The full decal displays in a rendered image The following rendered image shows a decal on the television For more information see Decals on page 1215 dependent view A copy of a view Use dependent views when a view of the building model is too large to display on a single sheet and yo...

Page 1513: ...d or a shim to a drafting view Revit Architecture provides over 500 detail component families based on 16 CSI divisions You can also create your own detail components See Inserting a Detail Component on page 1142 detail group A group of view specific elements such as text and filled regions See Editing Elements in Groups on page 354 detail level A Revit setting that determines the amount of geomet...

Page 1514: ... in a drafting view that shows details of the roller assembly for a sliding door For more information see Detail Lines on page 1154 detail view A view of a model that displays as a callout or section in other views This type of view typically represents the model in finer detail than shown in the parent view It is used to add more information to specific parts of the model A detail view reflects g...

Page 1515: ...nc Revit Architecture can import and export DGN files For more information see Interoperability on page 1341 dimension A view specific element that shows the size of an element or shows distances between elements or points in a building model As you place an element Revit Architecture displays temporary dimensions so that you can place the element accurately You can create permanent dimensions and...

Page 1516: ... representation of a material in a drawing For example sand is represented by a stipple pattern You can place drafting patterns on flat and cylindrical surfaces and you can define them for families You can also place drafting patterns on cut component surfaces in plan views and section views The following image shows a cross section of a window in a wall with different drafting patterns for interi...

Page 1517: ...g the Revit Interface on page 85 drawing list A schedule list of all drawing sheets in a project The drawing list functions as a table of contents for the project It is typically placed on the first sheet of a construction document set For more information see Drawing Lists on page 1066 drawing sheet See sheet on page 1536 DWF Design Web Format the Autodesk file format for publishing design data I...

Page 1518: ...ollowing drawing shows the eave of the roof in green For more information see Eaves on page 686 element An individual item in a building model Revit Architecture projects use 3 types of elements Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of a building For example walls floors and roofs are model elements Annotation elements help to document the model For example dimensions text notes and sect...

Page 1519: ...t is inserted into another wall of a different type or construction Embedded walls are useful for example when you need to create a storefront on a building exterior The following image shows a curtain wall embedded in a host wall For more information see Embedded Walls on page 638 end cap An end of a wall that does not join to another wall The unjoined end of the wall is exposed You can specify w...

Page 1520: ...r the outside face of a surface external reference An AutoCAD mechanism that allows the architect to reference other drawing files in an AutoCAD based project Also referred to as an xref See Implications of Importing vs Linking for Xrefs on page 1388 and Exploding Imported Geometry on page 1404 extrusion A method of defining 3D geometry for a building model You begin a solid extrusion by sketching...

Page 1521: ...ou render an image of the building model See Applying a Material to the Face of an Element on page 411 You can use mass faces as the basis for creating walls roofs curtain systems and floors in a building model The following image shows a mass face that is being used to create a wall See Creating Building Elements from Mass Instances on page 615 Glossary 1479 ...

Page 1522: ... For more information see Building with Elements on page 119 and Revit Families on page 415 family type Also referred to as simply a type See family on page 1480 and type on page 1547 far clip plane The clip plane that is at the side of the view farthest from the start point of an elevation view a section view a 3D view or a walkthrough view In the following floor plan the green dotted line opposi...

Page 1523: ... red area indicates the cut volume and the blue area indicates the fill volume required to level the site for a building See Reporting Cut and Fill Volumes on a Site on page 964 filled region A 2D view specific graphic You can use filled regions to represent various surfaces such as concrete or compacted earth You can add a filled region to a detail view a drafting view or an annotation family For...

Page 1524: ...ters in the following ways To select or deselect elements in a view See Selecting Elements Using a Filter on page 341 To override the graphic display and control the visibility of elements in a view See Controlling Visibility and Graphic Display of Elements Using Filters on page 204 To control the display of elements based on their phase status new existing demolished or temporary See Phase Filter...

Page 1525: ...control floor area face See mass floor on page 1503 floor plan A 2D drawing of a building model that shows the layout of walls and other building components In Revit Architecture a floor plan is also referred to as a floor plan view See Plan Views on page 125 focal point The point in the distance on which a camera is focusing See camera on page 1460 footing The base of a foundation that rests dire...

Page 1526: ... roof for a building The pink angles indicate the slope of the roof on each side form The various geometric shapes created in the conceptual design environment for example extrusions sweeps and lofts formula A mathematical equation used to determine the dimension of an object or a calculated value for a schedule Formulas allow you to create parameters that depend on other parameters for their valu...

Page 1527: ...ar study frame 2 In a building a rigid structure built into a wall to hold a door window or other component In Revit Architecture you can specify the material and finish for a door frame Frame for a new window family framing elevation An elevation view that shows the structural framing of a building model You can work in a framing elevation when adding vertical bracing to the model or for any task...

Page 1528: ...building model Generic annotations are usually related to a parameter for a model element or type You can create generic annotation families and nest them inside host model families so that the annotations display in the project This is useful if you want to include a label with a model family and display that label in the project generic model A family of geometry that does not fit into any of th...

Page 1529: ...page 1093 ground plane A horizontal plane that represents ground level in a building model In Revit Architecture you can specify the ground plane when creating a solar study for 2D and 3D views See Solar Studies on page 1241 group A defined set of elements that can be placed as a unit in a building design Grouping elements is useful when you need to create entities that represent repeating units o...

Page 1530: ...on page 697 halftone A display color that blends the line color of an element with the background color of the view For example the following image shows some elements in halftone gray and others in black You can specify the halftone display properties using the Visibility Graphics dialog See Visibility and Graphic Display in Project Views on page 198 and Halftone Underlay on page 497 1488 Glossar...

Page 1531: ... level For example in a floor plan you can double click a section head to go to the section view In the following floor plan the blue symbol is a section head head 3 For windows and doors the piece that goes across the top of the window or door to create the rough opening head height For windows and doors a measurement from the floor to the top of the rough opening hidden element An element that y...

Page 1532: ... over an object in the drawing area so that Revit Architecture displays the object s outline in a different weight bold and color such as gray instead of black A description of the element displays on the status bar at the bottom of the Revit window After a brief delay the element description also displays in a tooltip near the cursor This highlighting indicates that the object is ready for select...

Page 1533: ...rt Link on page 1386 import symbol A Revit element that contains all objects such as blocks and xrefs from an imported drawing When you move the cursor over the imported objects Revit Architecture shows information about the import symbol You can explode an import symbol to convert it into individual Revit elements See Exploding Imported Geometry on page 1404 imported categories Categories of elem...

Page 1534: ...1367 and Opening Industry Foundation Class IFC Files on page 1397 For more information about the IFC file format go to http www iai international org infill element An insert that fills patches a hole in a host element after changes are made during different phases of a building project For example if you remove a window from a wall during a demolition phase Revit Architecture fills the hole with ...

Page 1535: ...ecture you use a detail component to represent insulation in 2D drawings For more information see Insulation on page 1133 interior The inside of a building or the inside surface of an object interoperability The ability of Revit Architecture to interact with other software applications Examples of interoperability include importing files from other applications into a Revit project and exporting a...

Page 1536: ...llowing images show geometry before they are joined top and after they are joined bottom in a view with a coarse detail level See Joining Geometry on page 406 Before joining geometry After joining geometry joist A beam that supports a floor or ceiling Joists are generally made of wood steel or concrete They are often set parallel from wall to wall or across or abutting girders See Structural Usage...

Page 1537: ...Service and Units Each key specifies different floor wall and base finishes for its room style Rather than manually specifying finishes for all 100 rooms you can assign a room style to each room When you create a room schedule fields in the schedule automatically update with the appropriate finishes based on the assigned Room Style keys For more information see Key Schedules on page 173 Key schedu...

Page 1538: ...ks You create a label as part of a tag or title block family while in the Family Editor When you place the tag or title block in the project you replace the label with the actual value for that instance For example the following title block template contains labels that indicate the type of information to be entered on a sheet When you create a sheet the labels are replaced with actual values land...

Page 1539: ...rol the line weight style and color of the leader as well as its position shape and arrowhead legend A table that provides descriptions or information about symbols used in drawings In Revit Architecture you can create a legend and include it on multiple sheets See Legend Views on page 168 Symbol legend for use on construction documents level A finite horizontal plane that acts as a reference for ...

Page 1540: ...of templates detail components entourage materials and families of model elements and annotation elements Revit Architecture provides some libraries Other libraries are available on the Internet Family categories in the Imperial library line pattern A series of dashes or dots alternating with blank spaces 1498 Glossary ...

Page 1541: ... A line of a particular pattern weight and color used to indicate different effects For example in the following site plan a red dashed line indicates the zoning setback Revit Architecture predefines several line styles and uses them for default purposes You can change these and add your own line styles to suit your needs and preferences For more information see Line Styles on page 494 line weight...

Page 1542: ...ng with Linked Models on page 1277 listening dimensions A Revit feature that allows you to specify a value for a dimension as you sketch an element in a view You specify a start point for the element start sketching in the desired direction type the exact dimension desired and press Enter Revit Architecture draws the element to the specified length The following image shows the text box that appea...

Page 1543: ...ties of the wall the wall centerline core centerline interior or exterior wall face or interior or exterior face of wall core In the following illustration the green dashed lines indicate the location line of the wall See Walls on page 633 lock To secure a dimension or the location of an element so that it cannot be changed When you select a locked dimension or element a lock control displays next...

Page 1544: ...chitecture to display the desired changes See Linking DWF Markup Files on page 1403 masking region A defined area that obscures elements in a view Masking regions are useful when you are creating a model family from an imported 2D DWG file and you need the model element to obscure other elements when placed in a view You can also use them to hide parts of a drawing For more information see Masking...

Page 1545: ... 589 mass face See face on page 1479 mass floor An interior horizontal surface in a mass During the conceptual design stage of a building project a mass floor represents a story in the building You can divide masses into mass floors to perform various types of analysis on the design See Analyzing a Conceptual Design on page 594 Glossary 1503 ...

Page 1546: ...l When your conceptual design is complete you can add building elements directly to these shapes See Massing Studies on page 589 Massing study used as the basis for a building design Final building design matchline A sketch line that indicates where to split a view for a dependent view as shown See Duplicate Dependent Views on page 192 1504 Glossary ...

Page 1547: ...pattern in a cut view See Materials on page 468 material takeoff schedule A list of the subcomponents or materials of any Revit family Material takeoff schedules have all the functionality and characteristics of other schedule views but they allow you to show more detail about the assembly of a component Any material that is applied to a component within Revit Architecture can be scheduled For mor...

Page 1548: ...inal wall You can pick the mirror axis or draw a temporary axis Use the Mirror tool to flip a selected element or to make a copy of an element and reverse its position in one step The following image shows the results of mirroring and copying a door using the center wall as the mirror axis See Mirroring Elements on page 380 miter A joint at a 45 degree angle or evenly angled between the joined ele...

Page 1549: ...del elements in views For example you can choose to display a model using wireframe hidden lines shading or shading with edges You can specify the model graphics style for a view using the View Control Bar at the bottom of the Revit window For more information see Model Graphics Styles on page 250 model group A set of model elements that are placed together in a building design Model groups are us...

Page 1550: ...model element Model patterns represent the actual appearance of an element such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall They are fixed with respect to the model and scale with the model See Fill Patterns on page 459 model text Text used in a building model such as for signage You can add model text in a project view and in the Family Editor for families that can be represented in 3D such as wa...

Page 1551: ...d other forces between a beam and its supporting members In Revit Architecture you can specify moment parameters for a beam including the moment connection start and moment connection end See Moment Symbols on page 852 monolithic stairs Stairs that consist of one solid piece of material such as concrete In Revit Architecture you can specify that stairs are monolithic in the stair type properties Y...

Page 1552: ...milies subcomponents The subcomponents can belong to the same category for example various window types or different categories for example an exterior door and two lighting fixtures You create nested families using the Family Editor The following nested family includes a door 2 sidelights and 2 lighting fixtures For more information see The Families Guide on page 418 See also shared family on pag...

Page 1553: ... referred to as an annotation schedule Note blocks are useful for listing notes that are applied to elements in a project For more information see Annotation Schedules Note Blocks on page 175 Sample note block NURB surface Non uniform rational B spline A mathematical model commonly used in computer graphics for representing and generating curves and surfaces In Revit Architecture you can create ro...

Page 1554: ...e element or line will move or a new element or line will be created For example when creating walls you might specify an offset of 5 meters When you select an existing wall Revit Architecture draws a new wall 5 meters from the selected wall The following illustration shows that when you move the cursor near the outside of a chain of walls Revit Architecture draws a preview line to show the offset...

Page 1555: ...e orientation of a compound wall to reverse the order of its layers origin A fixed starting point or the point in a coordinate system where the axes intersect In Revit Architecture you use an origin for many functions such as positioning a linked project creating a custom fill pattern positioning a group resizing walls or sketching lines for a new family The origin of each element is defined in th...

Page 1556: ...ll door door frame and window frame are painted different colors See Applying a Material to the Face of an Element on page 411 pan In a 3D context pan moves the camera left and right In a 2D context pan scrolls the view If you are using pan with an active view on a sheet pan scrolls the sheet view not the active view on the sheet See Navigating Views on page 217 panel In Revit Architecture a secti...

Page 1557: ...iguration on page 197 and Datum Extents and Visibility on page 1108 parameter A setting that determines the appearance or behavior of an element type or view Also called a property See Element Properties on page 120 and View Properties on page 259 parametric Controlled by parameters In a Revit project parameters define the relationships between elements of the building model These relationships ar...

Page 1558: ...ied These patterns become part of the surface and depending on their shape will require a specific number of grid cells when applied See Patterning Surfaces on page 575 PDF Portable Document Format An open file format originally created by Adobe Systems that supports electronic information exchange In Revit Architecture you can print construction documents as PDF files You can then share the const...

Page 1559: ...n page 156 phase A stage or time period in the construction process of a building project Typical phases include existing construction demolition remodeling and new construction Revit Architecture tracks the phase in which views or components are created or demolished and lets you apply phase specific filters to views so you can define how the project appears during various stages of work The foll...

Page 1560: ...ement of the pinned element See Preventing Elements from Moving on page 382 plan A 2D drawing of a building model that shows the layout of walls rooms and other building components A floor plan presents a view of the building as though you are looking down on it from above with the roof and intervening levels removed A reflected ceiling plan is a drawing that shows the ceiling in a building design...

Page 1561: ...w A view of a floor plan or a reflected ceiling plan for a building model For more information see Plan Views on page 125 planting Vegetation used to create a landscape around a building design Revit Architecture provides a library of planting families You can also create or download additional plants For more information see Plants and Entourage on page 1203 poche A fill pattern that represents a...

Page 1562: ... connected straight line segments Polylines typically define open loops See Export Rooms and Areas as Polylines on page 1353 polymesh A 3D shape consisting of multiple polygons that are joined meshed together For example a polymesh cube consists of 6 square surfaces that are joined together to form the cube shape This is sometimes referred to as face based geometry Compare with ACIS on page 1452 F...

Page 1563: ...system It also can be used to position a building on a site and for locating the design elements of a building during construction See Project Base Points and Survey Points on page 1302 Project Browser Part of the Revit interface that shows a logical hierarchy for all views schedules sheets families groups and linked Revit models in the current project For more information see Project Browser on p...

Page 1564: ... way of looking at that information Also called a view The Project Browser lists the views available for a project These can include floor plans ceiling plans elevations sections detail views drafting views 3D views walkthrough views legend views schedules renderings and sheets For more information see Project Views on page 125 projection line style A graphic style applied to an element when a vie...

Page 1565: ...d control that provides a quick way to allow or prevent changes to the position of an element After you place a pushpin you cannot move the element until you unpin it by clicking the pushpin control See Preventing Elements from Moving on page 382 quantity The number or amount of building materials used in a project Schedules can calculate the quantities of individual items or materials needed to c...

Page 1566: ...els or attach them to host elements such as floors ramps or stairs For more information see Railings on page 746 Parts of a railing ramp A sloped floor or passageway For more information see Ramps on page 742 and Sloped Floors on page 710 RCP view See reflected ceiling plan view on page 1526 rebar A steel rod or bar used in reinforced concrete construction The following detail of a footing shows t...

Page 1567: ...ference callout with callout tag reference line A line used when designing families of model elements or placing elements in a building model When you draw a reference line in a view the line is visible in other related views A straight reference line provides 4 planes to sketch on One plane is parallel to the work plane of the line itself another is perpendicular to that plane and the remaining 2...

Page 1568: ...ions You can place reference sections in plan elevation section drafting and callout views Reference sections can refer to section views callouts of section views and drafting views For more information see Reference Sections on page 142 referencing view The parent view of a callout or section that is the view from which a callout or section originates The referencing sheet is the sheet on which t...

Page 1569: ...ecture renders 3D project views with various effects such as lights plants decals and people For more information see Rendering on page 1163 resize To change the size of a model element For example in Revit Architecture you can resize a wall or a foundation to adjust to changing specifications See Resizing Elements on page 383 retaining wall A wall that holds back earth for example at the edge of ...

Page 1570: ...or building design Revit Architecture provides tools revision clouds and revision schedules that enable you to include revision information on sheets For more information see Revisions on page 1069 revision cloud A graphic shaped like a cloud that indicates changes in a construction document In Revit Architecture you can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views The cloud is visible only...

Page 1571: ...todesk product Revit MEP optimizes mechanical electrical plumbing MEP systems engineering through data driven system sizing and design It provides a building information modelling design and documentation solution for MEP engineering Revit Structure An Autodesk product Revit Structure integrates a physical model for layout coordination and documentation with an independently editable analytical mo...

Page 1572: ...loor plan uses room separation lines to distinguish the entry from the kitchen and dining areas For more information see Room Separation Lines on page 982 room bounding elements A model element that defines a boundary of a room For example walls partitions floors ceilings and roofs are room bounding elements Revit Architecture uses room bounding elements when calculating the area or volume of a ro...

Page 1573: ...ng See Controlling Visibility and Graphic Display of Elements Using Filters on page 204 run A set of stairs or a ramp of a defined length In Revit Architecture you can sketch a run to create a ramp or set of stairs See Stairs on page 728 and Ramps on page 742 RVG The file format for a Revit group prior to Revit Architecture 2008 In Revit Architecture 2008 and later you can still load Revit groups ...

Page 1574: ...er interface mechanism that controls the visibility of datum planes levels reference lines and grids in views When you add grids levels and reference lines to a project they may display in more views than desired For example when you add grid lines to a plan view the grid lines display in all plan views of the model To limit the appearance of datum planes to certain views use a scope box See Contr...

Page 1575: ... the selection color and controls or handles indicate how the element can be manipulated or modified See Selecting Elements on page 339 selection box A user interface mechanism that you use to select elements within a defined area by dragging the cursor around them To create a selection box place the cursor near the elements to select click and hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor diagon...

Page 1576: ...and wall reveals in their type properties setback 2 The legally required distance between the property line and buildings For example in the following site plan a red dashed line indicates the zoning setback setback 3 The distance from the connection point of a primary beam in a join to its edge This is measured linearly with a connecting beam s center For more information see Cutback on page 865 ...

Page 1577: ...e provides illumination for the shaded elements See Shading with Edges Model Graphics Style on page 253 shadow study See solar study on page 1539 shaft An opening that extends the entire height or through specified levels of a building cutting through floors ceilings and roofs as appropriate For example the stairwell and elevator shaft in the following section view were created as shafts See Cutti...

Page 1578: ...gle item for selecting tagging and scheduling See also nested family on page 1510 For more information see The Families Guide on page 418 shared parameters User defined fields that you add to families or projects and then share with other families and projects They are stored in a file independently of a family file or Revit project this allows you to access the file from different families or pro...

Page 1579: ... Edge on page 254 sill The horizontal member at the bottom of a door or window frame In Revit Architecture you can specify a default sill height for a window type or a specific sill height for a window instance or door instance The sill height is the measurement from the floor up to the sill site The location or defined plot of ground for a building project See Site Design on page 953 site plan Th...

Page 1580: ...To draw a line or shape Revit Architecture provides several tools and techniques for sketching See Sketching on page 303 sketch 2 A drawing of a 2D shape The following sketch contains an open loop the roof and a closed loop the walls floor and ceiling SKP The file format for projects created using Google SketchUp a general purpose modeling and visualization tool You can import SKP files into a Rev...

Page 1581: ...drawing Revit Architecture displays snap points and snap lines to assist in aligning elements or lines with existing geometry Snap points display in the drawing area as triangles squares and diamonds depending on the snap type Snap lines display as dashed lines in the drawing area For example when you move the cursor over an existing wall to draw a new wall Revit Architecture displays a snap line ...

Page 1582: ...on on page 932 spline A curved line drawn by specifying and positioning a number of points Revit Architecture uses a mathematical polynomial function to smoothly join the segments at these points creating the curved line See Best Practices for Sketching a Spline on page 314 and Modifying a Spline on page 808 split To divide a single object into multiple objects or sections In a Revit project you c...

Page 1583: ...more horizontal layers each consisting of different materials and surfaces See Vertically Stacked Walls on page 647 stair calculator A Revit tool that automates the creation of stairs based on a specified minimum tread depth and maximum riser height For more information see Stair Calculator on page 734 stairs A series of steps that allow you to go from one level to another Also referred to as a st...

Page 1584: ...ructural Floor on page 929 subcategory For a subcomponent of a family a property that defines its display the line weight line color and line pattern For example you can assign one subcategory to the wood trim of a window and another subcategory to the glass For information about creating a subcategory see The Families Guide on page 418 subscription Purchased support for Revit Architecture A subsc...

Page 1585: ... such as the coordinate system used in a civil engineering application Project Base Points and Survey Points on page 1302 sustainable design The art of planning physical objects so they can be created and maintained in a way that supports the longevity of natural ecosystems and reserves It ranges from designing small objects for everyday use to designing buildings cities and the physical surface o...

Page 1586: ...ction documents symbolic line A line that provides information but is not intended to represent actual geometry in an element For example when creating a door family you might sketch symbolic lines in an elevation view to represent a door swing Symbolic lines are visible parallel to the view in which you sketch them You can control the visibility of symbolic lines on cut instances You can also con...

Page 1587: ... the length of an element See Measuring Elements on page 405 target point The point in the distance at which a camera is aimed or directed See camera on page 1460 template A collection of settings that you can use as a starting point for projects families views and more See Creating a Custom Project Template on page 445 and View Templates on page 507 For information about family templates see The ...

Page 1588: ...ation that consists of text and may include a leader line and arrow You can add text notes to a detail view drafting view or a sheet For more information see Text Notes on page 1087 tick mark The graphic shape used to represent the end of a dimension such as an arrow or a slash See Changing the Dimension Line Tick Mark on page 287 A floor plan that uses 2 types of tick marks title block A template...

Page 1589: ...s to meet a specified boundary See Trimming and Extending Elements on page 390 True North The direction toward the North Pole Drafting conventions dictate that Project North is the top of the view You may want to orient a view to True North when producing solar studies to create accurate sunlight and shadow patterns for the project or rendered images See Rotating a View to True North on page 449 t...

Page 1590: ...all elements of a particular family type Type parameters are also called type properties The instance parameters and type parameters of an element combine to establish its element properties For more information see Modifying Type Properties on page 121 type properties See type parameters Type Selector A drop down list on the ribbon from which you can select a family type for the element being add...

Page 1591: ... 1 For a 2 dimensional polygon an intersection of 2 sides vertex 2 For a 3 dimensional shape an intersection of 3 sides When you blend 2D shapes to create a 3D shape you can use vertex connections to control the rate at which one shape is blended to another shape See Creating a Blend on page 323 view See project view on page 1522 View Control Bar A panel of buttons providing quick access to functi...

Page 1592: ...oor plan You can then apply these templates to different floor plans to display information in each plan according to its purpose See View Templates on page 507 view specific The characteristic of being visible in one project view only viewport A user interface mechanism that allows you to manipulate and activate a view that has been placed on a sheet When you activate a view through a viewport yo...

Page 1593: ... more walls In Revit Architecture you can specify the type of join between walls For more information see Wall Joins on page 651 wall reveal A decorative cutout in a wall For more information see Wall Reveals on page 669 Glossary 1551 ...

Page 1594: ...annotation elements See Opening Files from the Web Library on page 113 wireframe A model graphics style in which Revit Architecture displays the image of the model with all edges and lines drawn but no surfaces See Wireframe Model Graphics Style on page 251 witness line An annotation that indicates the distance between 2 points or elements in a building model In Revit Architecture you can change t...

Page 1595: ... enable worksharing you can divide a project into worksets with different team members responsible for each workset For more information see Setting Up Worksets on page 1252 worksharing A design method in which different team members are responsible for designing different functional areas of the same project file See Working in a Team on page 1249 X Ray Available in the conceptual design environm...

Page 1596: ... to the view To zoom in is to increase the magnification making the building appear larger To zoom out is to decrease the magnification making the building appear smaller Zoom tools are available on the 2d and 3D SteeringWheels and the Navigation Bar See Zooming Project Views on page 243 1554 Glossary ...

Page 1597: ...ecified as the Project Units for Length and C when Meters specified as the Project Units for Length F or C temperature Unit Specifies the default unit for length The value is Feet when Feet and Fractional Inches is specified as the Project Units for Length and Meters when Meters is specified as the Project Units for Length Feet or Meters lengthUnit Specifies the default unit for area SquareFeet or...

Page 1598: ...1 Construction id con w10 Layer id lay 266 Material id mat 266 Schedule id schdl Common_Office WeekSchedule id wk schdl Common_Office DaySchedule id dy schdl Common_Office Zone id zone A DocumentHistory gbXML Campus Element The Campus element should be used as the base for all physical objects On a campus place one or more buildings Supported Attributes Description Attribute Always ìcmps 1 Id Supp...

Page 1599: ...e Revit MEP YYYY The YYYY can vary depending on release ProductName This is the number of the product release that produces this file If this file is produced by Revit MEP the value of this element will be YYYY The release number YYYY currently 2008 will vary depending on release Version This is the version of Microsoft Windows The value can be Microsoft Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Server 2003 Pla...

Page 1600: ...ude and longitude Name This is the value specified for Postal Code in the Project Information dialog ZipcodeOrPostalCode This is the value specified for Latitude in the Manage Place and Locations dialog Latitude This is the value specified for Longitude in the Manage Place and Locations dialog Longitude is given as an angular measurement ranging from 0 at the Prime Meridian Greenwich to 180 eastwa...

Page 1601: ...lected from the elevation for the Revit Level element See Space Element Space Sample Building id bldg 1 buildingType MultiFamily Area 2972 114583 Area InfiltrationFlow type Average BuildingStorey id bldg lvl Level_1 Name Level 1 Name Level 0 000000 Level BuildingStorey Space id sp 1 Building Space Element Supported Attributes Description Attribute This attribute is a hyphen separated string consis...

Page 1602: ...ry data defining an analytical space volume where each polygon face has a reference to a Surface Through the Surface you can connect a source element with each polygon in a SpaceBoundary space There will be a number of SpaceBoundary elements per Space See SpaceBoundary Element Sample Space id sp 1 Room buildingStoreyIdRef bldg lvl Level_1 Name 1 Space Name Area 296 444444 Area Volume 2371 555556 V...

Page 1603: ...ons through its surfaceIdRef attribute One Surface may be referenced by more space boundaries of one space Attributes Description Attribute Every SpaceBoundary will have a corresponding Surface surfaceRef Children Description Element PlanarGeometry A planar polygon describing the surface geometry as described in gbXML The geometry is currently measured per analytical center line the same way as th...

Page 1604: ...type of Interi orFloor If the source element is a Floor and the Function parameter is set to Interior it will have a type of InteriorFloor If the source element is a Roof or a Ceiling and have one space adjacency it will have a type of Roof Supported Children Description Element Surface and Opening elements get an Name element assigned according to the below described schema Orientation Space Othe...

Page 1605: ... a hyphen separated string consisting of a prefix op and a sequential number For example op 1 id Surface and Opening elements get an Name element assigned according to the below described schema Orientation Space Other space Exposure Type sequence number Opening Type Name Sample N 101 102 E W D 84 N Orientation N NE E SE S SW W NW N T B X every surface within the sector of 22 5 degrees from the no...

Page 1606: ...bleSkylight For a Curtain Wall Panel the type will default to type FixedWindow A Curtain Wall panel having a material and the material is not transparent less than 3 transparency the type is solid panel Otherwise it is treated as a FixedWindow For a Curtain Wall Panel having no material the type is FixedWindow For an opening of the category Openings the type is Air Supported Children Description E...

Page 1607: ...uilding components 1398 Align tool 377 align with element 461 alpha channel 1231 alphabetic sequence for revision numbers 1074 altitude 1243 aluminum 482 anchor symbol 272 angular dimensions 267 animations solar studies 1245 annotation crop regions 211 212 specifying offset from the model crop region 215 annotation schedules sheets and 1042 annotation styles 500 arrowheads 500 dimensions 501 loade...

Page 1608: ...00 artifacts 1240 artificial light 1228 Artificial Lights dialog 1199 1200 Assign Layers tool 644 Attach Top Base tool 651 attached detail groups 354 creating 357 detaching from a model group 362 hiding 362 showing 362 attached end leader 1123 audit option 112 AutoCAD entities 1349 formats drag and drop 1388 1389 exporting to 1341 fonts 1395 importing 1388 linked files 1400 overrides 1349 Autodesk...

Page 1609: ... model 117 specifying building type 1373 building pads 965 adding 966 cut and fill volume for 965 modifying 966 967 properties 968 sloping 967 building sites exporting 1376 bump patterns 478 485 Buzzsaw publishing 1384 adding a location 1385 DWF files 1385 DWG files 1384 By Host View 1283 By Linked View 1283 C C macro examples 1430 1431 CAD formats drag and drop 1388 1389 exporting to 1341 fonts 1...

Page 1610: ...nds 1025 1027 modifying 1024 removing the display of 1025 colors color filters 1182 color preset 1189 color temperature 479 1189 dimming lamp color temperature shift 1182 filter color 479 image files for 485 initial color of light sources 1182 1189 materials and 473 modifying 525 new 525 render appearances and 485 render performance and 1235 setting 525 colour See color colours See colors columns ...

Page 1611: ...pplying to sketch lines 305 design options and 1321 dimensions and 300 equality 300 for imported geometry 1395 in linked models 1280 removing 302 visibility 301 worksets and 302 construction documents 1029 printing 1083 contour lines adding 953 labels 971 973 controls dimension text 351 drag 349 flip 350 lock 350 overview 349 rotate 351 spacebar 352 view 352 coordinate system basis 1351 coordinati...

Page 1612: ...16 properties 1218 1219 renaming 1217 sharing 1218 decimal degrees 953 decimal display 502 dedicated views 1308 creating 1318 deleting 1316 1317 default view templates 509 default worksets 1254 degrees 953 delete inner segment 408 Delete tool 413 Demolish tool 1338 dependent views 192 creating 194 deleting 198 making independent 198 matchlines 195 navigating 196 propagating 197 sheets and 1039 dep...

Page 1613: ... polymeshes exporting 1352 templates for export 1353 diagnostic tool 1413 dialog launcher 86 diffuse reflectance 479 digital cartoon sets 1031 dimension command 265 dimension styles 501 dimension text overriding 273 dimension text controls 351 dimension values adding text to 273 replacing with text 275 dimensions aligned 265 anchor symbol 272 angular placing 267 arc lengths 269 arc wall centers 26...

Page 1614: ...PS 1356 DWF markup files 1403 linking 1358 1403 managing 1360 modifying 1403 DWFx 1356 DWG files applying masking regions to 1151 exporting to 1343 importing 1387 importing line weights 1394 publishing to Buzzsaw 1384 setting units 1352 units 1352 DXF files exporting to 1344 importing 1387 importing line weights 1394 E eaves 686 aligning 688 plumb cut creating 687 two cut plumb 687 two cut square ...

Page 1615: ...ilding sites 1376 CAD formats 1341 civil engineering applications 1376 coordinate system basis 1351 crop regions and 1342 DGN files 1345 DWF 1355 DWG files 1343 DXF files 1344 file names 1353 format properties 1349 1358 geometry 1355 IFC 1367 images 1364 improving performance of 1342 layers 1360 properties and 1349 settings 1349 limiting model geometry 1342 1374 linetype scaling 1350 ODBC database...

Page 1616: ...ons 693 properties 703 resizing 692 segments 692 vertical offset 694 Favorites links InfoCenter 104 FBX file format exporting to 1373 1375 preparing for 1374 fbxooprender exe 1234 field angle 1182 1193 1195 Field of View mode 216 Fields tab for schedules 176 files auditing 112 backup copies of 115 default template files 118 exporting 1341 1353 importing 1386 linking 1386 opening 112 pinned 90 redu...

Page 1617: ...s when importing 1395 exploding 1404 exporting 1355 how treated in SketchUp 1390 intersecting 1355 snapping to 1387 girders 843 glass 1240 glass materials 480 481 glazing 1240 glazing materials 481 glossiness 479 485 graded region 960 gradient background 158 grand totals in schedules 182 graphic display overriding 198 removing overrides 202 graphical user interface 85 86 gray inactive workset grap...

Page 1618: ...bugging macros 1433 frequently asked questions 1445 integrating macros 1439 macros 1427 modules 1426 related information 1448 running macros 1433 samples on SDK 1435 using SDK samples 1436 VB NET application level examples 1430 VB NET document level examples 1432 identity data for materials 487 488 IES files 1166 1167 1178 IFC files exporting to 1367 file locations 1371 IFC entities for families 1...

Page 1619: ...ted Development Environment See IDE interface 85 86 interference checking 1294 interior light 1228 interior tick marks 288 interior wall properties 908 interior walls 634 635 properties 672 intersecting geometry 1355 isolated footings 925 itemizing instances in schedules 181 J join geometry 406 592 joined 567 joins editing 651 mullions 777 roofs 681 wall 653 joist systems 874 876 beam direction 88...

Page 1620: ...ctivation Utility 7 Network License Manager 6 network licensing client setup 15 network server setup 6 NLA 7 options 5 redundant license server 6 14 Registration and Authorization office 7 standalone 5 transferring 16 light bulbs 486 1166 1169 light distribution 1180 light groups 1197 adding lights to 1199 1200 Artificial Lights dialog 1199 1200 creating 1199 deleting 1202 Light Group Editor 1200 ...

Page 1621: ...305 splitting 408 subcategories 807 thin 243 trimming 390 Lines tool 805 linetype scaling 1350 linework silhouette edges 254 Linework tool 398 402 Link tool 1386 linked elements scheduling 177 linked files AutoCAD files 1400 changing graphic display of 1407 1409 deleting layers 1405 1406 DWF markups 1358 exported to 3D DWF 1355 hiding layers 1405 1406 how linking works 1401 layers to link 1401 lin...

Page 1622: ...n option 1318 moving elements to design options 1313 selecting elements in 1314 viewing without design options 1320 Make Primary tool 1310 1312 Manage Images tool 1397 manufacturers materials and 488 mapping file for IFC 1367 for layers 1360 marked up DWF linking 1358 managing links 1360 masking regions 1147 adding in a 2D family 1148 in a 3D family 1148 in a family 1150 in a project 1148 exportin...

Page 1623: ... paint 482 mirror 483 overview 469 paint 483 physical data 488 489 plastic 483 porcelain 478 renaming 490 render appearances 485 491 render appearances of 475 478 render performance and 1235 1236 searching for 470 493 section cut 953 shaders 478 sharing with team members 470 solid glass 480 stone 484 stored in project file 470 surface pattern 473 tags 1128 transparency 473 vinyl 483 water 484 wood...

Page 1624: ...work License Manager 6 network license server setup 6 New tool 118 new window 97 non cuttable families 515 non planar beam system 886 north 448 449 note blocks 175 sheets and 1042 numeric fields formatting 184 numeric sketching 805 nurb surfaces curtain systems from 621 roofs from 624 O object data DWF files and 1356 exporting 1356 viewing in DWF files 1356 object snaps 506 object styles 493 creat...

Page 1625: ...perspective lines 495 perspective views 157 3D 156 background 158 properties 163 saving 242 phase mapping 1000 1280 phases 1331 combining 1333 demolishing elements 1338 elements and 1332 graphic display of elements 1334 1335 in fill elements 1335 linked models and 1000 mapping in linked Revit models 1280 masses and 593 overrides 1334 phase filters 1333 applying 1334 default 1333 properties 1331 ro...

Page 1626: ...cation 448 Project North 450 project parameters 458 creating 458 project place 1296 project settings 497 project standards transferring to another project 446 project templates creating 445 custom 445 saving 445 settings 446 sheets and 1032 project units by discipline 502 Project Units tool 502 project views 125 3D views 156 closing hidden views 97 crop regions 211 dedicating to design options 131...

Page 1627: ...lass codes 1382 guidelines for manufacturers 1382 to Autodesk Seek website 1382 to Buzzsaw 1384 adding a Buzzsaw location 1385 DWF 1385 DWG 1384 publish coordinates 1298 purlins 842 843 Q quad corner mullions 778 quality of rendered images 1224 1225 Query tool 1405 Quick Access toolbar 90 91 R radial array 365 radial dimensions 268 railings 746 adding 746 editing joins 748 height and slope 748 pro...

Page 1628: ...djusting exposure 1230 background 1229 black areas in 1238 camera clipping planes and 1223 color problems 1240 creating 1229 crop regions and 1223 exporting 1231 faded 1239 file size 1221 1228 gray elements 1239 height 1221 light source problems 1240 lighting 1228 quality 1224 1225 render regions and 1223 saving as project views 1231 section boxes and 1223 troubleshooting quality issues 1240 view ...

Page 1629: ...681 room area report 1366 Room Bounding parameter elements 982 992 linked models 984 spaces and 997 Room Separation tool 982 983 rooms 975 applying color scheme in linked models 1024 area of 989 base offset 994 boundaries 979 982 984 989 991 993 996 998 color schemes 1019 columns and 992 computation height 989 990 995 creating 977 deleting 1000 1002 design options and 1322 1324 displaying 979 expo...

Page 1630: ...grouping 180 instance display 181 joining split sections on sheets 1065 keys 173 linked models and 177 mass floors 597 602 605 608 610 material takeoffs 174 modifying 189 moving sections on sheets 1064 multi category 457 multiple sections 1064 note blocks 175 percentages 176 perimeter analysis 608 phases and 1331 properties tabs 176 rooms 977 988 1001 sections moving 1065 shared parameters 457 she...

Page 1631: ... 455 families 454 IFC export 1370 projects 458 schedules 457 setting up 452 tagging 455 title blocks and 1054 viewing 454 shared positioning 1296 acquiring coordinates 1298 named locations 1296 publishing coordinates 1298 reporting shared coordinates 1301 sheet indexes See drawing lists Sheet Issues Revisions dialog 1070 sheet sets 1029 sheet views See sheets sheet specific information sheets and ...

Page 1632: ...ing content for use in Revit 1390 exploding 3D data 1390 files importing 1390 geometric flexing 1390 integrating with 1389 massing studies in 626 627 629 630 SKP files 1390 sky background 1229 clouds 1229 color 158 haze 1229 illumination 1225 slabs adding 930 curved edges 948 drop panels 935 flipping 712 foundation 941 modifying 937 offsets 713 properties 938 resizing 712 segments 712 shape edit 9...

Page 1633: ...thic 737 properties 738 railings 734 735 risers 730 spiral 732 stair calculator 734 735 standalone licensing 5 standards 108 start end radius arc 309 status bar 99 for hints 99 SteeringWheels 226 options 520 StepInto debugging macros 1433 still solar studies based on azimuth and altitude 1243 based on location 1243 settings 1242 stone materials 484 storefronts 638 structural beam end pocket seats ...

Page 1634: ...ature shift 1182 loss gain factor 1187 templates creating 445 custom 445 default project templates 118 settings 446 worksets and 1255 Temporary Dimension tool 507 temporary dimensions 263 setting 507 temporary files 116 Temporary Hide Isolate tool 209 text overriding in dimensions 273 text files sheets and 1044 text notes adding 1087 editing 1089 leaders 1087 modifying 1089 non wrapping 1087 prope...

Page 1635: ...lays line styles 402 undo 91 353 Uniformat assembly codes 818 units for DWG export 1352 units for a project 502 setting 118 unjoin geometry 408 unjoin roofs 681 Unpin tool 382 Update to Face tool 625 updating Communication Center updates 103 upgrading workshared projects 1270 upper limit rooms 993 usage 612 analysis 601 602 assigning to mass floors 600 user defined height for revision schedules 10...

Page 1636: ...categories 202 for individual elements 200 temporary hide isolate 209 when exporting a model 1342 Visibility Graphics dialog 198 Visible in Option parameter 1317 1320 deleting design option sets and 1317 deleting design options and 1317 visible range 247 Visual Studio Tools for Applications See VSTA void swept blend 331 voids conceptual design environment 553 swept blend 331 voltage loss gain fact...

Page 1637: ...undaries and 981 991 rounded chain of walls 636 shape of 662 663 splitting 408 662 structural 906 sweeps 664 trimming 390 type of 672 vertically compound walls 639 vertically stacked walls 647 649 650 warning messages 1415 water materials 484 wattage 1188 1239 weathering 479 web library 113 white point 1230 Window panel arrange icons 97 cascade 97 close hidden windows 97 new window 97 tile 97 wind...

Page 1638: ...ns and 1324 detach from central file 1268 editable elements 1268 editing workshared projects 1258 enabling 1250 loading updates 1269 process overview 1249 project rollback 1271 relinquish borrowed elements 1261 saving changes to the local file 1267 saving changes without synchronizing with central 1267 saving local files 1265 synchronizing with the central file 1265 terminology 1250 upgrading proj...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for 256B1-05A761-1301 - AutoCAD Revit Structure Suite 2010

Xerox Phaser 6115 Getting Started preview
Phaser 6115
Brand: Xerox Pages: 28
BrainMaster BMrMMP User Manual preview
BMrMMP
Brand: BrainMaster Pages: 14
ProfiNet ProfinetCommander User Manual preview
ProfinetCommander
Brand: ProfiNet Pages: 25
Citrix MetaFrame MetaFrame Presentation Server Reviewer'S Manual preview
MetaFrame MetaFrame Presentation Server
Brand: Citrix Pages: 97
ACRONIS SNAP DEPLOY 2.0 - User Manual preview
SNAP DEPLOY 2.0 -
Brand: ACRONIS Pages: 68
Crestron SIMPL Windows Installation & Operating Manual preview
SIMPL Windows
Brand: Crestron Pages: 230
Adobe LIVE CYCLE 7.2 - INSTALLING AND CONFIGURING LIVECYCLE FOR JBOSS Manual preview
LIVE CYCLE 7.2 - INSTALLING AND CONFIGURING LIVECYCLE FOR JBOSS
Brand: Adobe Pages: 90
Brocade Communications Systems Brocade 8/12c Installation Manual preview
Brocade 8/12c
Brand: Brocade Communications Systems Pages: 47
HP PROLIANT 56976839 Release Notes preview
PROLIANT 56976839
Brand: HP Pages: 16
HP ProLiant Power Interface Control Utility User Manual preview
ProLiant Power Interface Control Utility
Brand: HP Pages: 10
HP ProBook 6450b User Manual preview
ProBook 6450b
Brand: HP Pages: 181
HP ProLiant SL160s Installation Instructions Manual preview
ProLiant SL160s
Brand: HP Pages: 8
HP ProDesk 600 Maintenance And Service Manual preview
ProDesk 600
Brand: HP Pages: 245
HP ProBook 6445b - Notebook PC User Manual preview
ProBook 6445b - Notebook PC
Brand: HP Pages: 183
HP ProLiant Lights Out-100 User Manual preview
ProLiant Lights Out-100
Brand: HP Pages: 60
HP StorageWorks 2/64 - Core Switch Command Reference Manual preview
StorageWorks 2/64 - Core Switch
Brand: HP Pages: 830
HP StorageWorks 2/64 - Core Switch Installation Manual preview
StorageWorks 2/64 - Core Switch
Brand: HP Pages: 166
HP ProBook 6360b Maintenance And Service Manual preview
ProBook 6360b
Brand: HP Pages: 157

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands